8304_NCORCompost_1safetymanual_20230313

34

Section 9 – Corporate Safety Handbook

NCOR
ACCIDENT PREVENTION PLAN/ HEALTH AND SAFETY PLAN

NCOR 13761 Airport Rd Maxton, NC 28364
Employee Acknowledgement

As an employee of NCOR, I acknowledge that I
have read and received a copy of the Accident
Prevention Plan/Health and Safety Plan and
have also read and received a copy of the Safety
Rules (Appendix E) as provided by my
employer.

__________________ _______________
Print Name Signature

Keep for your records.

TABLE OF CONTENTS 1.0 INTRODUCTION
2.0 SAFETY LEADERSHIP AND ADMINISTRATIVE RESPONSIBLITIES
3.0 SITE SPECIFIC TRAINING AND SAFETY MEETINGS
4.0 DAILY SAFETY TAILGATE MEETINGS
5.0 DAILY SAFETY INSPECTIONS
6.0 HOUSEKEEPING
7.0 PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT (PPE)
8.0 WEEKLY SAFETY MEETINGS
9.0 NEAR MISS POLICY
10.0 REPORTABLE INCIDENTS AND ACCIDENT INVESTIGATIONS
11.0 ACTIVITY HAZARD ANALYSIS (SITE SAFETY & HEALTH PLAN)
12.0 HAZARD COMMUNICATION (HAZCOM)
APPENDIX A: HAZCOM detailed procedures
13.0 FOLLOWING OUR CLIENT’S ACCIDENT PREVENTION/HEALTH AND
SAFETY PLANS
14.0 FIRE PREVENTION AND PROTECTION
15.0 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION
APPENDIX B: FORKLIFT AND MOTORIZED INDUSTRIAL TRUCK PROCEDURES
16.0 CONSTRUCTION SAFETY
17.0 EXCAVATION SAFETY
18.0 SANITATION
19.0 BLOODBORNE PATHOGENS - UNIVERSAL PRECAUTIONS
APPENDIX C: BLOODBORNE PATHEGENS
20.0 AERIAL LIFTS
21.0 LADDER SAFETY
22.0 ELECTRIC SAFETY ON CONSTRUCTION SITES
APPENDIX D: ELECTRICAL SAFETY
23.0 FALL PROTECTION
24.0 LOCKOUT/TAGOUT
25.0 EMERGENCY RESPONSE AND CONTINGENCY PLAN
26.0 DISCIPLINARY POLICY
27.0 DRUG AND ALCOHOL POLICY
28.0 OTHER POLICIES

1
1.0 INTRODUCTION This Accident Prevention Plan/Health and Safety Plan has been established by
NCOR(NCOR). NCOR is committed to providing safe working conditions for all of its employees. To accomplish this, NCOR will comply with all current occupational health, safety and environmental laws and closely follow its Accident Prevention Plan/Health and Safety
Plan. Each year, NCOR shall have the following goal: Zero time lost to accidents at all locations during the year.
To accomplish this goal each year, this Accident Prevention Plan/Health and Safety Plan, along with Key Policies, focuses on the following areas: 1. A culture of safety awareness will occur EVERYDAY during shift Safety Tailgate meetings and highlighted by weekly safety meetings where the discussion of safety issues and safety education will take place; 2. Recording near misses and recordable events and then talking about them as a team so that we can learn from them and prevent future accidents; 3. Proper safety planning for every job through performing an Activity Hazard Analysis (Site Safety and Health Plan (SSHP)) 4. Site specific training and safety meetings 5. Working with our client’s to observe their Safety Plans 6. A companywide focus on: a. Housekeeping b. PPE c. Daily equipment inspections d. Fall Protection e. Fire Prevention f. Reporting Procedures g. Other Key measures such as: Construction Safety, Excavation Safety, Sanitation, Bloodborne Pathogen Safety, Aerial Lift Safety, Ladder Safety, Electric Safety, Lockout/Tag out, and Emergency response. 7. Key Policies to Further Safety Culture
a. Drug and Alcohol Policy; b. Disciplinary Policy
Every employee will play an important role in establishing a culture of safety at NCOR and to ensure that the company’s safety goal is met. And EVERYDAY, the Project Managers and
every employee need to ask the team and her/himself the following question: Are there any Safety Issues that you have encountered or that you are concerned about.

2
2.0 SAFETY LEADERSHIP AND ADMINISTRATIVE RESPONSIBLITIES The Project Manager:
The Project Manager is to provide the leadership which encourages safety throughout the organization. The Project Manager is ultimately responsible for implementing this Accident Prevention Plan/Health and Safety Plan and providing the necessary resources for its effective implementation. The Project Manager is to conduct and lead the weekly safety meetings and to encourage the culture of safety. The Project Manager is expected
to talk about safety every day. The Project Manager is to provide for the materials and maintenance of equipment necessary to enhance and maintain safe site and work conditions. The Project Managers have the responsibility and the authority to control the day-to-day
activities in the field. The Project Managers are responsible for implementing this accident prevention plan on-site, and report directly to the Operations Manager (SSHP). In addition, he is to ensure that equipment brought to the site is in proper working condition and inspected regularly.
The Project Managers are responsible for identifying any unsafe products/conditions or activities not in compliance with this plan. The Project Manger conducts regular safety inspections and has the authority to shut down any site activity that poses an immediate health and safety hazard to personnel. Accident investigations will be performed by the Project Manager and the Operations Manager.
The Project Manager or Operations Manager has the authority to shut down any site activity posing an immediate health and safety hazard to site personnel. The Project Manager is responsible for tracking safety and health report forms ensuring complete, timely submittal and compliance with the safety and health requirements of the contracts.
Site workers are responsible for working safely and complying with all safety and health rules. Personnel are responsible for wearing all required protective equipment. All subcontractor personnel will receive training on the Accident Prevention Plan/Health
and Safety Plan and the SSHP. Subcontractor personnel will be required to adhere to the requirements set forth in these plans and will be accountable to the NCOR Project Manager for compliance. Corporate HR: Corporate HR shall monitor the results of the Accident Prevention Plan/Health and Safety Plan.
1. All Near Miss and Reportable Incident forms will come to Corporate HR and shall be summarized on Friday and distributed to the Project Managers and Senior Management. 2. All Weekly Meeting Attendance and Summary Forms shall be collected and any
exceptions shall be reported to Senior Management on Friday.
3
3. Each job’s Phase Safety Plan will be filed with and monitored by (making sure that the Plans are up to date) Corporate HR 4. The Health and Safety topics shall be provided to the Project Managers each Friday
for the following Monday’s Weekly Safety Meeting. 5. All Client required reporting shall be the responsibility of Corporate HR 6. Reports required by any safety body which the Company subscribes or reports required by law shall be the responsibility of Corporate HR. 7. That all required Policy and Procedure forms have been signed.

3.0 SITE SPECIFIC TRAINING AND SAFETY MEETINGS All field employees are trained and experienced operators and technicians. Supplementary training for field personnel includes a minimum of three days actual on-
site field experience under the direct supervision of a trained and experienced supervisor. NCOR’s procedure and policy (provided in employee handbook & new hire paperwork) for the enhancement of Company-wide safety has been communicated to all NCOR employees and its subcontractors and individual policies have been acknowledged by the
employees in writing. Documentation of the Weekly Safety meeting is required by the site-specific SSHP. Prior to working on-site, all site personnel will undergo a safety and health orientation where the SSHP and site conditions are discussed. Prior to each shift, a daily safety meeting will be held discussing the previous day’s and the current day’s health and safety issues.
In addition, when a new task or phase of the project is begun, the PROJECT MANAGER will prepare a Site Safety & Health Plan (SSHP) for that task or phase. The analysis will address the hazards for each activity performed in that phase and will present the procedures and safeguards necessary to eliminate the hazards or reduce the risk. The
analysis will be discussed with site personnel that will perform the work and attendance will be documented. All subcontractors are subject to the same training requirements as other field personnel. Subcontractors will be required to sign in daily and be required to attend a daily meeting
discussing operations and safety issues. The subcontractor reports directly to the NCOR project manager.
4
4.0 DAILY SAFETY TAILGATE MEETINGS
Prior to each shift, a daily safety meeting will be held discussing the previous day’s and the current day’s health and safety issues. The following question should be asked daily.
Are there any Safety Issues that you have encountered or that you are concerned about?
5
5.0 DAILY SAFETY INSPECTIONS
The Project Manager will perform daily site safety inspections. A report including results of the inspection and any corrective actions taken will be filed in the project files when deficiencies are encountered. Identified safety and occupational health deficiencies and corrective measures shall be recorded, and follow-up inspections performed within 48 hours
to evaluate the effectiveness of corrective measures instituted.
6
6.0 HOUSEKEEPING
A basic concept in any effective accident prevention endeavor is good housekeeping. No one item has a greater impact on the overall success of a safety program for a construction project.
The importance of good housekeeping must be planned for from the beginning to the final cleanup. The degree of attention given to housekeeping will normally be reflected in the project accident rate, as well as in construction efficiency. During the course of construction, work areas shall be kept clear of debris. Construction
materials shall be stored in an orderly manner. Storage areas and walkways on the site shall be maintained free from dangerous depressions, obstructions and debris. The essential elements of good housekeeping are:
5.1 Orderly placement of materials, tools, and equipment. 5.2 Placing receptacles at appropriate locations for the disposal of miscellaneous rubbish.
5.3 Prompt removal and disposal of trash and waste materials. 5.4 Locating air and water lines, welding leads, and burning hose in positions that eliminate tripping hazards.

7
7.0 PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT (PPE)
Proper Personal Protective Equipment is important to the NCOR safety policy. Personal protective equipment, commonly referred to as "PPE", is equipment worn to minimize exposure to hazards that cause serious workplace injuries and illnesses. These injuries and illnesses may result from contact with chemical, radiological, physical, electrical, mechanical, or other workplace hazards. Personal protective equipment may include items such as
reflective clothing, gloves, safety glasses and shoes, earplugs or muffs, hard hats, respirators, or coveralls, vests and full body suits. In general, the client’s policy for PPE shall govern. However, mandatory PPE on NCOR job sites shall be:
High Visibility Shirts or Vests Steel-toed Shoes And all guests must, as a minimum, wear High Visibility Shirts or Vests
NCOR will be provide (high visibility clothing, safety glasses, goggles, shields) depending upon the work to be performed. The required PPE shall be identified during the SSHP at each individual job.

8
8.0 WEEKLY SAFETY MEETINGS
Safety Meetings shall be held a minimum of once a week on Monday mornings before work begins at a job. These meetings are mandatory for all employees and subcontracts on the job. If Mondays do not work, then the Safety Meeting will take place the next available day.
The Project Manager will run these meetings and if they are not available, they will appoint a suitable person to run the meeting. Each person attending the meeting shall sign the Safety Meeting Summary and
Attendance form (sample of form on next page). Safety Meetings shall follow the below format: 1. Safety Issues: The Project Manager will ask the team if there are any Safety Issues
that they have encountered or are concerned about. The group will discuss these topics and if any need to be recorded as a “Near Miss.” 2. Corporate Safety Issues: The Project Manager will discuss and corporate Near Misses or Reportable with the group. Corporate HR will provide weekly near miss and recordable summaries.
3. Safety Topic: The Project Manager will present a topic regarding Safety to the Group. These topics will normally be provided by Corporate HR and will be a specific topic, a section of the Accident Prevention Plan/Health and Safety Plan
Upon completion of the meeting, the Safety Meeting Summary and Attendance Form will be submitted to Corporate HR. Sample of attendance form is on the next page.
9

Site Training Sign-In Sheet
Division:__________________

Company Name: NCOR
Instructor(s):
Date:
Course
Name/Topic(s):

Training Provider:

Trainee(s):
10
9.0 Near Miss Policy NEAR MISS - THE ONE THAT ALMOST HAPPENED
A near miss is an event or hazard that does not result in injury, illness or damage, but had the potential to do so. Starting from this day forward, all NCOR divisions will report all near misses, the day that they happen, regardless of how severe, in order to ensure that the appropriate steps are taken to prevent a recurrence in which serious injury or loss may
occur. Near misses happen in our type of industry on a regular basis. We can recognize near misses, and use them as a tool to change process and prevent future incidents and serious injuries from happening. With proper reporting and investigation, these incidents should
never reoccur. Examples of Near Misses
• A worker not wearing the proper Personal protective equipment for the job
• A worker not following proper procedures or safe work practices
• A person slips, but does not fall or hurt themselves
• A tool malfunctions or misuse
• Using the top of the step ladder as a step
• Equipment nearly contacting overhead power lines
• Inadequate or missing machine guarding Accident Theory and the Accident Pyramid Many safety practices are reactive and not proactive as
they tend to happen after a near miss or loss has already occurred. We must be proactive in our approach to safety and help protect our most important assets – our employees. There is a theory suggesting there is a ratio between the number of serious accidents compared to
the number of near misses or close calls. This is called the Accident Pyramid. In essence what the triangle portrays is that for every 600 near misses there are typically 30 property losses, 10 lost time accidents and one major accident. The top three levels are part of the reactive process of an accident where it is too late: damage has occurred and people are hurt.
Focusing on the lowest level, the proactive process provides an opportunity to: make changes to policy, procedure, practice, job task and habit; implement a new too or PPE: and /or engineer a solution. Investigations of serious accidents often reveal earlier incidents of a similar nature that were dismissed.
Why Investigate and discuss a Near Miss? Investigation into near misses could help prevent an injury or even a fatality. Near miss reports and findings will be discussed at each safety meeting to create awareness
and to seek additional ideas or corrective actions from the people that perform the work every day.
11
Positive change can result. For example, if five near misses are reported and then through the investigation, the team discovers three positive changes for each near miss, it would result in 15 positive changes that otherwise may have resulted in damage, injury, or worse.
Procedure for Reporting Near Misses Before They Become Accidents:
• Once a near miss occurs, report it immediately to the nearest foreman or supervisor.
• If the near miss is a result of an unsafe condition, don't continue to work under that
condition until the problem has been corrected and your supervisor gives the okay to proceed.
• If the incident is a result of unsafe acts, be certain that everyone involved has been alerted to their actions before they continue with the job.
Once a week, company-wide near misses will be summarized by Corporate HR and shared at the Weekly Meeting

12

10.0 REPORTABLE INCIDENTS AND ACCIDENT INVESTIGATIONS
An injury that requires only minor first aid need only be recorded on a first aid treatment log, which will be submitted to Corporate HR every Friday. All other injuries or occupational illnesses must be investigated, and the Accident/Injury Report Form must be completed.
In the case of an injury to an employee that requires medical treatment, the following steps will be followed: 10.1 Procure medical treatment for employee as described in Section 25.8 of the
SSHP. 10.2 The Project Manger and Operations Manager will investigate the accident and fill out Accident/Injury Report Form (sample attached at end of this section).
10.3 Employer’s Report of Injury will be filled out and sent to the Workers’ Compensation Insurance Company within 48 hours of an injury or within 24 hours of a lost time injury or death. A claim for workers’ compensation benefits must also be submitted.
10.4 Notify the client representative within 24 hours of the injury. 10.5 OSHA Form 200 Log will be updated if the injury is recordable under 29 CFR 1904.
10.6 A report must be obtained from the physician clearing the employee to resume regular duties, describing modified work acceptable, or removing the employee from work duty. In the case of fatal injury or where five or more persons are admitted to the hospital for an
overnight stay, OSHA and other appropriate agencies will be notified and an in-depth accident investigation will be conducted in addition to the steps identified above. Any incident where an injury or illness occurs (regardless of how minor) is a Reportable Incident.
Like Near Misses, we learn from Reportable Incidents, and their reporting is mandatory. Procedure for reporting Reportable Incidents:
• Send first aid log weekly and Accident/Injury Report Form to Corporate HR at the
corporate office.
• If the Reportable Incident is a result of an unsafe condition, don't continue to work under that condition until the problem has been corrected and your supervisor gives the okay to proceed.
• If the Reportable Incident is a result of unsafe acts, be certain that everyone involved
has been alerted to their actions before they continue with the job.
13
Once a week, Reportable Incidents and company-wide near misses will be summarized by Corporate HR and shared at the Weekly Meeting.
If the Reportable Incident results in Time Lost, then a Safety Meeting will be held the following day to discuss the incident company-wide. Sample of Accident/Incident report on next two pages.

14
15

16
11.0 ACTIVITY HAZARD ANALYSIS (SITE SAFETY & HEALTH PLAN)
A Site Safety & Health Plan (SSHP) will be developed for each contract activity and operation occurring in each major phase of work. It is job-specific and will address the following points:
1. Identify the activity being performed. 2. Identify the sequence of work to be performed. 3. Identify the hazards to be controlled in each activity and the control measures to be implemented. 4. Proper PPE required.
The Phase Safety Plan will be discussed with the client representative and with site personnel. Work will not proceed on that phase until the Phase Safety Plan has been accepted by the client representative.
The Plan shall be done for each job and for those jobs that last more than one year. The Plans shall be refreshed every January. Finally, the final approved plans must be submitted to Corporate HR.
The following Phase Safety Plan format is required (next seven pages).
17

NCOR
Accident Prevention Plan-
Health and Safety Plan-GP
Doc No: HAZASID
Initial Issue Date April 29, 2014
Revision Date: Initial Version
HAZARD IDENTIFICATION AND ASSESSMENT Revision No. 0
Next Review Date:
Preparation: Safety Mgr Authority: President Issuing Dept: Safety Page: Page 1 of 7
Purpose
• To provide guidelines for identifying, assessing and controlling workplace hazards;
• To ensure the potential hazards of new processes and materials are identified before they are introduced
into the workplace;
• To identify the jobs/tasks which require risk assessment. Key Responsibilities As specified within this program.
NCOR must assess a work site and identify existing or potential hazards before work begins at the work site or
prior to the construction of a new work site Hazard and Risk Identification
The hazard identification process is used for routine and non-routine activities as well as new processes, changes in
operation, products or services as applicable.
The Safety Manager shall conduct a baseline worksite hazard assessment which is a formal process in place to
identify the various tasks that are to be performed and the accompanying identified potential hazards. The results
are included in a report of the results of the hazard assessment and the methods used to control or eliminate the
hazards identified. The hazard assessment report must be signed and have the date on it.
Inputs into the baseline hazard identification include, but are not limited to: • Scope of work;
• Legal and other requirements;
• Previous incidents and non-conformances;
• Sources of energy, contaminants and other environmental conditions that can cause injury;
• Walk through of work environment;
Hazards identifications (as examples) are to include: • Working Alone
• Thermal Exposure
• Isolation of Energy
• Hearing Protection
• Musculoskeletal Disorders
• Bloodborne Pathogens
• Confined Spaces
• Driving
• General Safety Precautions
• And any other established policy or procedure by NCOR
• Any other site specific work scope

18
NCOR has a formal process for identifying potential hazards. Processes are in place to identify potential hazards
by the use of JSA's, JHA's, facility wide or area specific analysis/inspections.
19
NCOR
Accident Prevention Plan-
Health and Safety Plan-GP
Doc No: HAZASID
Initial Issue Date April 29, 2014
Revision Date: Initial Version
HAZARD IDENTIFICATION AND ASSESSMENT Revision No. 0
Next Review Date:
Preparation: Safety Mgr Authority: President Issuing Dept: Safety Page: Page 2 of 7

All identified hazards are assessed for risk and risk controls are assigned within the worksite hazard assessment for
that specific ha zard.
Employees and/or sub-contractors are actively involved in the hazard identification process. The NCOR program
provides processes to ensure employees and/or sub-contractors are actively involved in the hazard identification
process and hazards are reviewed with all employees concerned. Employees are trained in the hazard identification process. Employees will be trained in the hazard identification
process including the use and care of proper PPE.
Unsafe hazards must be reported immediately and addressed by the supervisor. The supervisor discusses the
worksite hazard assessment with employees at the respective work location during the employee’s documented
orientation. Review of Hazard Assessment Existing worksite hazard identifications are formally reviewed annually or repeated at reasonably practicable
intervals to prevent the development of unsafe and unhealthy working conditions and specifically updated when
new tasks are to be performed that have not been risk assessed, when a work process or operation changes,
before the construction of a new site or when significant additions or alterations to a job site are made.
The respective supervisor or project manager advises the Safety Manager when additional hazards are introduced
into the work place in order to revise planning and assessment needs. Risk Assessment
Hazards are classified and ranked based on severity. The program identifies hazards are classified/prioritized and
addressed based on the risk associated with the task. (See the risk analysis matrix outlining severity and probability).
20
NCOR
Accident Prevention Plan-
Health and Safety Plan-GP
Doc No: HAZASID
Initial Issue Date April 29, 2014
Revision Date: Initial Version
HAZARD IDENTIFICATION AND ASSESSMENT Revision No. 0
Next Review Date:
Preparation: Safety Mgr Authority: President Issuing Dept: Safety Page: Page 3 of 7

NCOR RISK ASSESSMENT MATRIX CONSEQUENCE PROBABILITY Severity People Assets Environment Reputation A B C D E
Not Done
Rarely

Once a week

Several Times in a Week

Multiple Times in a Day
0 No health effect No damage
No effect No impact
1 Slight health
effect
Slight
damage
Slight effect Slight impact
2 Minor health
effect
Minor
damage
Minor effect Limited
impact
3 Major health effect Localized damage
Localized effect Considerable impact
4 Single fatality Major
damage
Major effect National
impact
5 Multiple
fatalities
Extensive
damage
Massive effect Global impact

Key Manage for continuous improvement
(Low)
Incorporate risk reduction measures
(Medium)
Intolerable
(High)
Risk Controls/Methods to Ensure Identified Hazards Are Addressed and Mitigated
The following describes how identified hazards are addressed and mitigated: • Risk assessed hazards are compiled with and addressed and mitigated through dedicated assignment,
appropriate documentation of completion, and implemented controls methods including engineering or
administrative controls and PPE required into the worksite hazard assessment of the site specific HSE
plan. No work will begin before the worksite assessment is completed. Additionally, no risk assessed as
High (Intolerable) shall be performed.
• If an existing or potential hazard to workers is identified during a hazard assessment NCOR must take
measures to eliminate the hazard, or if elimination is not reasonably practicable, control the hazard. If
reasonably practicable, NCOR must eliminate or control a hazard through the use of engineering
controls. If a hazard cannot be adequately controlled using engineering controls, NCOR must use
administrative controls that control the hazard to a level as low as reasonably achievable. If the hazard
cannot be adequately controlled using engineering and/or administrative controls, NCOR must ensure
that the appropriate personal protective equipment (PPE) is used by workers affected by the hazard.
NCOR may use a combination of engineering controls, administrative controls, and personal protective
equipment if there is a greater level of worker safety because a combination is used.
Emergency Control of Hazards
Only those employees competent in correcting emergency controls of hazards may be exposed to the hazard and
only the minimum number of competent employees may be exposed during hazard emergency control. An
example is a gas leak in a building. Only those personnel with training on fire safety, gas supply shut off and other
related controls will attempt to resolve the emergency control of a hazard. GEORGE B. WITTMER ASSOCIATES,
21
NCOR
Accident Prevention Plan-
Health and Safety Plan-GP
Doc No: HAZASID
Initial Issue Date April 29, 2014
Revision Date: Initial Version
HAZARD IDENTIFICATION AND ASSESSMENT Revision No. 0
Next Review Date:
Preparation: Safety Mgr Authority: President Issuing Dept: Safety Page: Page 4 of 7
INC. will make every possible effort to control the hazard while the condition is being corrected or under the
supervision of client emergency response personnel in every emergency.
Certification of Hazard Assessment
The Safety Manager completes and signs the certification of hazard assessment for the worksite hazard
assessment (also see PPE Program) and includes it within the site specific HSE plan. Hazard assessments are
reviewed annually and updated when new tasks are to be performed that have not been risk assessed. Job Safety Analysis (JSA) For those jobs with the highest injury or illness rates, jobs that are new to our operation, jobs that have undergone
major changes in processes and procedures or jobs complex enough to require written instructions will have a Job
Safety Analysis performed. Completed JSAs are available from the Safety Manager. Site Specific HSE Plan (SSSP) Each work location has a site specific HSE plan. Each employee reporting to a location shall receive a documented
orientation from a NCOR supervisor that includes the SSSP for that site. The SSSP contains the NCOR Health and
Safety Policy, site specific safety requirements as well as a PPE matrix and a signed site specific worksite hazard
assessment for that location, which the NCOR has a responsibility to provide. Review Process The hazard assessment program will be reviewed to ensure no new hazards derived from the corrective measures.
The review shall include a management of change consideration as well.
The safety committee shall be involved in the review process as well.
22
TASKS RISK LEVEL HAZARDS ENGINEERING OR
ADMINISTRATIVE CONTROLS PPE (Refer to PPE Matrix)
List individual task

Use Risk
Matrix

Identify hazards
associated with task
• List procedures that apply
• List appropriate engineering controls
• List procedures or other administrative controls

List appropriate PPE
Example:
Washing Parts

MED
Chemical Exposure
(Skin, Eyes, Body)
• NCOR PPE Procedure
• No smoking;
Chemical gloves, splash proof
goggles chemical apron
•
•
•
•
•
•

NCOR
Accident Prevention Plan-
Health and Safety Plan-GP
Doc No: HAZASID
Initial Issue Date April 29, 2014
Revision Date: Initial Version
HAZARD IDENTIFICATION AND ASSESSMENT Revision No. 0
Next Review Date:
Preparation: Safety Mgr Authority: President Issuing Dept: Safety Page: Page 5 of 7
WORKSITE HAZARD ASSESSMENT FORM
CERTIFICATE OF HAZARD ASSESSMENT STATEMENT FOR _form shall be signed_ SITE I certify a worksite hazard assessment was performed for this facility on date by the NCOR Safety Manager. (Signature on File)
Task: Indicate Task Group (Additional Tasks shall be listed in each site specific HSE plan)
23
NCOR
Accident Prevention Plan-
Health and Safety Plan-GP
Doc No: HAZASID
Initial Issue Date April 29, 2014
Revision Date: Initial Version
HAZARD IDENTIFICATION AND ASSESSMENT Revision No. 0
Next Review Date:
Preparation: Safety Mgr Authority: President Issuing Dept: Safety Page: Page 6 of 7
JOB SAFETY ANALYSIS FORM
Location / Dept: Date: New? Revision JSA NO:
Task Supervisor:
Analysis By:
Team Members Reviewed By: Approved By:
Specific rules and procedures to be followed (Safe Work Practice Number ):
Sequence of Basic Job Steps Potential Injury or Hazards Recommendations to Eliminate or Reduce Potential Hazards.

CHECK ITEMS REQUIRED TO DO THIS JOB:
Safety Glasses Leather Gloves Face Shield Fire Extinguisher Atmospheric Testing
Hard Hats Work Vest Goggles (type?) Lockout/Tagout Traffic Control
Safety Shoes Fall Harness Flame Resistant Clothing Warning signs Other
PAGE 1 OF 2
27
NCOR
Accident Prevention Plan-
Health and Safety Plan-GP
Doc No: HAZASID
Initial Issue Date April 29, 2014
Revision Date: Initial Version
HAZARD IDENTIFICATION AND ASSESSMENT Revision No. 0
Next Review Date:
Preparation: Safety Mgr Authority: President Issuing Dept: Safety Page: Page 7 of 7
INSTRUCTIONS FOR COMPLETING THE JOB SAFETY ANALYSIS FORM
SEQUENCE OF BASIC JOB STEPS

Examining a specific job by breaking it down into a series of steps or tasks, will enable you to discover potential hazards employees may encounter.

Each job or operation will consist of a set of steps or tasks. For example, the job might be to move a box from a conveyor in the receiving area to a shelf
in the storage area. To determine where a step begins or ends, look for a change of activity, change in direction or movement.
Picking up the box from the conveyor and placing it on a hand truck is one step. The next step might be to push the loaded hand truck to the storage
area (a change in activity). Moving the boxes from the truck and placing them on the shelf is another step. The final step might be returning the hand
truck to the receiving area.
Be sure to list all the steps needed to perform the job. Some steps may not be performed each time; an example could be checking the casters on
the hand truck. However, if that step is generally part of the job it should be listed.
POTENTIAL HAZARDS

A hazard is a potential danger. The purpose of the Job Safety Analysis is to identify ALL hazards – both those produced by the environment or
conditions and those connected with the job procedure. To identify hazards, ask yourself these questions about each step:

Is there a danger of the employee striking against, being struck by, or
otherwise making injurious contact with an object?

Can the employee be caught in, by or between objects? Is there a potential
for slipping, tripping, or falling?

Could the employee suffer strains from pushing, pulling, lifting, bending, or
twisting?
Is the environment hazardous to safety and/or health (toxic gas, vapor, mist, fumes, dust, heat, or radiation)?
Close observation and knowledge of the job is important. Examine each
step carefully to find and identify hazards – the actions, conditions, and possibilities that could lead to an accident. Compiling an accurate and
complete list of potential hazards will allow you to develop the recommended safe job procedures needed to prevent accidents.
RECOMMENDED ACTION OR PROCEDURE

Using the first two columns as a guide, decide what actions or procedures are necessary to eliminate or minimize the hazards that could lead to an accident,
injury or occupational illness.
Begin by trying to: (1) engineer the hazard out; (2) provide guards, safety
devices, etc.; (3) provide personal protective equipment; (4) provide job instruction training; (5) maintain good housekeeping; (6) ensure good
ergonomics (positioning the person in relation to the machine or other elements).

List the required or recommended personal protective equipment necessary
to perform each step of the job.

Give a recommended action or procedure for each hazard.

Serious hazards should be corrected immediately. The JSA should then be
changed to reflect the new conditions.
Finally, review your input on all three columns for accuracy and completeness with affected employees. Determine if the recommended actions or procedures have been put in place. Re- evaluate the job safety analysis as necessary.
Select an employee to help you with the JSA: someone who is experienced in the job, willing to help and a good communicator. The employees play an important role in helping you identify job steps and hazards.
In summary, to complete this form you should consider the purpose of the job, the activities it involves, and the hazards it presents. In addition, observing an employee performing the job, or “walking through”
the operation step by step may give additional insight into potential hazards. Here’s how to do each of the three parts of a Job Safety Analysis:

28
12.0 HAZARD COMMUNICATION (HAZCOM)
Purpose: This Hazard Communication requires NCOR to provide information about the hazardous chemicals that employees will be exposed to, chemical product labels and other forms of warning, safety data sheets related to the chemicals,
appropriate training, and a written hazard communication program. NCOR will
develop, implement, and maintain at each workplace, a written hazard communication program which at least describes how labels and other forms of warning, safety data sheets, and employee information and training will be met. The Safety and Health Manager has the specific responsibility for implementing
the plan. Supervisors of employees have the responsibility to insure the Safety
Plan is carried out. The Safety and Health Manager is also responsible for providing consultation and specific training when needed. Supervisors who have employees who work in areas where hazardous chemicals
are stored, handled or used are responsible for:
(1) creating and maintaining an inventory of all hazardous chemicals; (2) ensuring proper labeling of all hazardous chemicals; (3) acquiring and maintaining safety data sheets for all hazardous chemicals located in the work area;
(4) informing employees of
(i) any operations in their work area where hazardous chemicals are present, and (ii) the location and availability of the written hazard communication program, the chemical inventory, and safety
data sheets; and training employees about hazardous
chemicals used in the work area. FOR COMPLETE PROCEDURES ON HAZCOM, PLEASE REFER TO
APPENDIX A

29

13.0 FOLLOWING OUR CLIENT’S ACCIDENT PREVENTION/HEALTH
AND SAFETY PLANS The NCOR Accident Prevention Plan/Safety Plan shall be followed at all
times.
However, should one of our clients have their own form of Accident Prevention Plan/Safety Plan, their plan should supersede the NCOR plan when we are on their site.

Should a procedure in a client plan be less stringent then the NCOR plan, then the more stringent procedure shall rule. Section 1.0 through 6.0 of this Accident Prevention Plan/Safety Plan shall
always be in effect.

30

14.0 Fire Protection and Extinguishers Safety Plan
Purpose: The purpose of the Fire Protection Safety Plan is to prevent potential injuries and
deaths, and to protect NCOR’s property from damage or loss due to fire. This
plan includes fire prevention, building exits, fire extinguishing, emergency evacuation, and employee training. This plan will be reviewed with all new employees when they begin their job and
with all employees when the plan is changed.
Fire Prevention: Our first line of defense against fire is to prevent it in the first place. It is the
responsibility of all employees to prevent fires. All employees will be apprised of
the potential fire hazards in their work area and will be trained in safe work procedures and practices. Employees are expected to follow proper procedures to prevent fires and to notify their supervisor or other management personnel if they observe any condition that could lead to the ignition of a fire or could
increase the spread of a fire.
The following are some general fire prevention practices and procedures that will be followed:
• All ignition sources (i.e., open flames, cutting torches, spark producing equipment, electric motors, heating equipment, etc.) will be controlled. All contact of ignition sources with combustible and flammable materials will be avoided. All employees will keep all combustible materials at least five feet from such ignition sources and all flammable
liquids at least twenty feet away.
• Extensive use of electrical extension cords should be avoided. Any damaged or frayed electrical wiring, equipment cords, extension cords,
etc. will be removed from service immediately and replaced or repaired.
• Any use of flammable liquids will be done in a manner that prevents
spills, and prevents the flammable liquid or its vapor or spray from
coming into contact with any ignition source. All flammable liquids will be stored in proper flammable liquid storage containers and kept in the proper storage cabinets.
• Housekeeping and storage practices are critical to preventing fires. Any combustible materials will be stored in neat stacks with adequate aisle space provided to prevent the easy spread of fire and to allow for access to extinguish any fire that may start. Trash, scrap, and other
31
unnecessary combustibles must be cleaned up immediately and
placed in proper disposal containers.

• Smoking is restricted to designated areas.
Company Fire Exits:

• Each area of the building/work site has at least two means of escape and are to be used in a fire emergency. The location of exits and the
path of egress (escape) will be shown on maps (and posted throughout the building as necessary).
• Fire exit doors will not be blocked or locked during business hours in
order to prevent their emergency use (when employees are within the
building).
• Exit routes from the work site will be clear and free of obstructions. All
exits are marked with signs designating exits from the premises.
Fire Extinguishers:
• Each area of NCOR will have a full complement of the proper type of fire extinguisher for the fire hazards present. All fire extinguishers will be inspected annually by a fire protection equipment company and tagged with the date of inspection. If a fire extinguisher is used or discharged for any reason, it will be removed from service and
replaced with another properly charged fire extinguisher while it is being recharged.
• Employees who are expected or anticipated to use fire extinguishers
will be instructed on the hazards of fighting fires, how to properly operate the fire extinguishers available, and what procedures to follow in alerting others to the fire emergency. These employees will only attempt to extinguish small incipient fires. If a fire cannot be immediately and easily extinguished with a fire extinguisher, the
employees will evacuate the building. They will not try to fight the fire! All employees who are not trained and designated to fight fires are to immediately evacuate the premises at the first sign of fire or initiation of the fire alarm and are prohibited from using an extinguisher and re-entering the premises.
Emergency Fire Evacuation: If any employee discovers a fire or smoke, the employee will immediately pull the nearest fire alarm box. If there is time and it is safe to do so, the employee will
contact a member of Management to report the fire. Management will then make an announcement over the public address system that all employees and
32
customers are to evacuate the building. Management will then call 911 and
report the fire to the fire department.
If a fire alarm sounds or a fire is otherwise announced, all employees (except those designated and trained to use fire extinguishers) are expected to immediately exit the premises by proceeding to the nearest exit in an orderly
fashion. If the nearest exit is blocked by fire or smoke, the employees should
proceed to an alternate exit. There should be no running, shouting, pushing, etc. A calm orderly evacuation is the safest for all concerned. Supervisors and managers will account for all of their employees to ensure that
no one is still in the building and unaccounted for.
Special procedures for helping physically impaired employees will be established where needed. This will be done on a case by case basis when the employee is first hired or when the physical impairment first occurs.

Employee Training: All new employees will receive fire prevention and emergency evacuation training when they are hired. All employees will also receive refresher training and a
review of this plan on an annual basis. NCOR will hold fire drills and will include a practice evacuation of the building at least annually. These drills will be used to evaluate employee response and behavior and will help us determine where more training is needed.
Those employees who are designated and authorized to use fire extinguishers to fight small fires will receive training in the proper use of extinguishers, how to extinguish a fire, the hazards involved in fighting fires, when not to fight a fire, and when to evacuate the area.
The Safety and Health Manager administers NCOR’s fire prevention and life safety inspection programs. This includes reviewing all new building construction and renovations to ensure compliance with applicable state, local, and national fire and life safety standards.
Fire prevention measures propose to reduce the incidence of fires by eliminating opportunities for ignition of flammable materials. Where NCOR has provided portable fire extinguishers for employee use in the
workplace, NCOR shall also provide an educational program to familiarize employees with the general principles of fire extinguisher use and the hazards involved with incipient stage fire fighting. Employees who are expected or anticipated to use fire extinguishers will be
instructed on the hazards of fighting fires, how to properly operate the fire extinguishers available, and what procedures to follow in alerting others to the
33
fire emergency. These employees will only attempt to extinguish small incipient
fires. If a fire cannot be immediately and easily extinguished with a fire
Extinguisher, the employees will evacuate the building. They will not try to fight the fire! All employees who are not trained and designated to fight fires are to immediately evacuate the premises at the first sign of fire or initiation of the fire alarm and are prohibited from using an extinguisher and re-entering the premises

NCOR shall provide the education and training required in the previous paragraph, above, of this section upon initial employment and at least annually thereafter.
NCOR shall provide employees who have been designated to use fire fighting
equipment as part of an emergency action plan with training in the use of the appropriate equipment. NCOR shall provide the training of this section upon initial assignment to the
designated group of employees and at least annually thereafter.
Inspection, Maintenance and Testing of Fire Extinguishers NCOR shall be responsible for the inspection, maintenance and testing of all
portable fire extinguishers in the workplace. Portable extinguishers or hose used in lieu thereof shall be visually inspected monthly.
NCOR shall assure that portable fire extinguishers are subjected to an annual maintenance check. Stored pressure extinguishers do not require an internal examination. NCOR shall record the annual maintenance date and retain this record for one
year after the last entry or the life of the shell, whichever is less. Flammable and Combustible Materials: Substitution-

Flammable liquids sometimes may be substituted by relatively safe materials in order to reduce the risk of fires. Any substituted material should be stable and nontoxic and should either be nonflammable or have a high flashpoint.
Storage - Flammable and combustible liquids require careful handling at all times. The proper storage of flammable liquids within a work area is very
important in order to protect personnel from fire and other safety and health hazards.
34

1) Cabinets Not more than 120 gallons of Class I, Class II, and Class IIIA liquids
may be stored in a storage cabinet. Of this total, not more than 60
gallons may be Class I and II liquids. Not more than three such cabinets (120 gallons each) may be located in a single fire area except in an industrial area.
2) Storage Inside Buildings.
Where approved storage cabinets or rooms are not provided, inside storage will comply with the following basic conditions:
a. The storage of any flammable or combustible liquid shall
not physically obstruct a means of egress from the building or area. b. Containers of flammable or combustible liquids will remain
tightly sealed except when transferred, poured or applied. Remove only that portion of liquid in the storage container required to accomplish a particular job. c. If a flammable and combustible liquid storage building is
used, it will be a one-story building devoted principally to the handling and storing of flammable or combustible liquids. The building will have 2-hour fire-rated exterior walls having no opening within 10 feet of such storage.
d. Flammable paints, oils, and varnishes in 1 or 5 gallon containers, used for building maintenance purposes, may be stored temporarily in closed containers outside approved storage cabinets or room if kept at the job site for less than 10 calendar days.
Ventilation - Every inside storage room will be provided with a continuous mechanical exhaust ventilation system. To prevent the accumulation of vapors, the location of both
the makeup and exhaust air openings will be arranged to provide, as far as practical, air movement directly to the exterior of the building and if ducts are used, they will not be used for any other purpose.

35
Elimination of Ignition Sources-

All nonessential ignition sources must be eliminated where flammable liquids are used or stored. The following is a list of some of the more common potential ignition sources:

•Open flames, such as cutting and welding torches, furnaces, matches, and heaters-these sources should be kept away from flammable liquids operations. Cutting or welding on flammable liquids equipment should not be performed unless the equipment
has been properly emptied and purged with a neutral gas such as
nitrogen. •Chemical sources of ignition such as d.c. motors, switched, and circuit breakers-these sources should be eliminated where flammable liquids are handled or stored. Only approved explosion-
proof devices should be used in these areas.
•Mechanical sparks-these sparks can be produced as a result of friction. Only non-sparking tools should be used in areas where flammable liquids are stored or handled. •Static sparks-these sparks can be generated as a result of electron
transfer between two contacting surfaces. The electrons can discharge in a small volume, raising the temperature to above the ignition temperature. Every effort should be made to eliminate the possibility of static sparks. Also proper bonding and grounding procedures must be followed when flammable liquids are
transferred or transported. Removal of Incompatibles - Materials that can contribute to a flammable liquid fire should not be
stored with flammable liquids. Examples are oxidizers and organic peroxides, which, on decomposition, can generate large amounts of oxygen. Flammable Gases-
Generally, flammable gases pose the same type of fire hazards as flammable liquids and their vapors. Many of the safeguards for flammable liquids also apply to flammable gases, other properties such as toxicity, reactivity, and corrosivity also must be taken into account. Also, a gas that
is flammable could produce toxic combustion products. Fire Extinguishers:
A portable fire extinguisher is a “first aid” device and is very effective when used while the fire is small. The use of fire extinguisher that matches the class of fire,
36
by a person who is well trained, can save both lives and property. Portable fire
extinguishers must be installed in workplaces regardless of other fire fighting
measures. The successful performance of a fire extinguisher in a fire situation largely depends on its proper selection, inspection, maintenance, and distribution.
Classification of Fires and Selection of Extinguishers-
Fires are classified into four general categories depending on the type of material or fuel involved. The type of fire determines the type of extinguisher that should be used to extinguish it.

1) Class A fires involve materials such as wood, paper, and cloth which produce glowing embers or char. 2) Class B fires involve flammable gases, liquids, and greases,
including gasoline and most hydrocarbon liquids which must be
vaporized for combustion to occur. 3) Class C fires involve fires in live electrical equipment or in materials near electrically powered equipment.
4) Class D fires involve combustible metals, such as magnesium, zirconium, potassium, and sodium.
5) Class K fires are kitchen fires that involve cooking oils.
Extinguishers will be selected according to the potential fire hazard, the construction and occupancy of facilities, hazard to be protected, and other factors pertinent to the situation. Location and Marking of Extinguishers-
Extinguishers will be conspicuously located and readily accessible for immediate use in the event of fire. They will be located along normal paths of travel and egress. Wall recesses and/or flush-mounted cabinets will be used as extinguisher locations whenever possible.
Extinguishers will be clearly visible. In locations where visual obstruction cannot be completely avoided, directional arrows will be provided to indicate the location of extinguishers and the arrows will be marked with the extinguisher classification.
If extinguishers intended for different classes of fire are located together, they will be conspicuously marked to ensure that the proper class extinguisher selection is made at the time of a fire. Extinguisher classification markings will be located on the front of the shell above or
37
below the extinguisher nameplate. Markings will be of a size and form to
be legible from a distance of 3 feet.
Condition of Fire Extinguishers- Portable extinguishers will be maintained in a fully charged and operable
condition. They will be kept in their designated locations at all times when
not being used. When extinguishers are removed for maintenance or testing, a fully charged and operable replacement unit will be provided. Mounting and Distribution of Extinguishers-

Extinguishers will be installed on hangers, brackets, in cabinets, or on shelves. Extinguishers having a gross weight not exceeding 40 pounds will be so installed that the top of the extinguisher is not more than 3-1/2 feet above the floor.

Extinguishers mounted in cabinets or wall recesses or set on shelves will be placed so that the extinguisher operating instructions face outward. The location of such extinguishers will be made conspicuous by marking the cabinet or wall recess in a contrasting color which will distinguish it
from the normal décor. Extinguishers must be distributed in such a way that the amount of time needed to travel to their location and back to the fire does not allow the fire to get out of control. OSHA requires that the travel distance for Class
A and Class D extinguishers not exceed 75 feet. The maximum travel distance for Class B extinguishers is 50 feet because flammable liquid fires can get out of control faster that Class A fires. There is no maximum travel distance specified for Class C extinguishers, but they must be distributed on the basis of appropriate patterns for Class A and B hazards.
Inspection and Maintenance of Extinguishers Once an extinguisher is selected, purchased, and installed, it is the responsibility of the Safety and Health Manager to oversee the inspection,
maintenance, and testing of fire extinguishers to ensure that they are in proper working condition and have not been tampered with or physically damaged. Fire Safety Inspections and Housekeeping:
First line Supervisors and the Safety and Health Manager are responsible for conducting work site surveys at least annually. These surveys should include observations of work site safety and housekeeping issues and should specifically address proper storage of chemicals and supplies, unobstructed access to fire
extinguishers, and emergency evacuation routes. Also, they should determine if
38
an emergency evacuation plan is present in work areas and that personnel are
familiar with the plan.
Emergency Egress:
Every exit will be clearly visible, or the route to it conspicuously identified in such
a manner that every occupant of the building will readily know the direction of escape from any point. At no time will exits be blocked. Any doorway or passageway which is not an exit or access to an exit but which
may be mistaken for an exit, will be identified by a sign reading “Not An Exit” or a
sign indicating it actual use (i.e., “Storeroom”). Exits and accesses to exits will be marked by a readily visible sign. Each exit sign (other than internally illuminated signs) will be illuminated by a reliable light source providing not less than 5 foot-candles on the illuminated surface.

Facilities Design Review: Facilities will be designed in a manner consistent with health and safety regulations and standards of good design. NCOR Management, together with
Safety and Health Manager, will ensure that there is appropriate health and safety review of facility concepts, designs, and plans. A formal design review process is currently in place for all new construction efforts. Occupant Emergency Plan for Persons with Disabilities:
The first line supervisor is assigned the responsibility to assist Persons with Disabilities under their supervision. An alternate assistant will be chosen by the supervisor. The role of the two assistants is to report to their assigned person, and to either assist in evacuation or assure that the Persons with Disabilities is
removed from danger. • Supervisors, alternates, and the person with a disability will be trained by the Safety and Health Manager on available escape routes and methods. • A list of persons with disabilities is kept in the Office of Health and
Safety. This list is updated by the Safety and Health Manager and the Office of Personnel Management. • Visitors who have disabilities will be assisted in a manner similar to that of NCOR employees. The Host of the person with disabilities will assist in their evacuation.
Emergencies Involving Fire: Fire Alarms-
In the event of a fire emergency, a fire alarm will sound for the building.
39
Evacuation Routes and Plans-

Each facility shall have an emergency evacuation plan. All emergency exits shall conform to NFPA standards. Should evacuation be necessary, go to the nearest exit or stairway and
proceed to an area of refuge outside the building. Most stairways are fire
resistant and present barriers to smoke if the doors are kept closed. Do not use elevators. Should the fire involve the control panel of the elevator or the electrical system of the building, power in the building may
be cut and you could be trapped between floors. Also, the elevator shaft
can become a flue, lending itself to the passage and accumulation of hot gases and smoke generated by the fire. Emergency Coordinators-

Emergency Coordinators will be responsible for verifying personnel have evacuated from their assigned areas. Fire Emergency Procedures-
If you discover a fire: 1. Activate the nearest fire alarm.
2. Notify the fire department by dialing 911. Give your location, the nature of the fire, and your name. 3. Notify the Manager on duty and other occupants.
4. Notify the Safety and Health Manager. Fight the fire ONLY if: 1. The fire department has been notified of the fire, AND
2. The fire is small and confined to its area of origin, AND 3. You have a way out and can fight the fire with your back to the exit, AND
4. You have the proper extinguisher, in good working order, AND know how to use it. 5. If your are not sure of your ability or the fire extinguisher’s
capacity to contain the fire, leave the area.
40

If you hear a fire alarm:
1. Evacuate the area. Close windows, turn off gas jets, and close
doors as you leave. 2. Leave the building and move away from exits and out of the way of emergency operations.

3. Assemble in a designated area. 4. Report to the Manager/monitor so he/she can determine that all personnel have evacuated your area.

5. Remain outside until competent authority (Physical Security, Office of Health and Safety, or your supervisor) states that it is safe to re-enter.
Evacuation Routes 1. Learn at least two escape routes, and emergency exits from your area.
2. Never use an elevator as part of your escape route. 3. Learn to activate a fire alarm. 4. Learn to recognize alarm sounds.
5. Take an active part in fire evacuation drills.
41

15.0 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION NCOR and subcontractor personnel will inspect all equipment before use to
ensure that it is in proper working condition and free from safety deficiencies.
Tools and equipment found to be defective in any manner will be removed from service. 15.1 Portable Tool Inspections

All hand and power tools used at the project site will be maintained in a safe condition. Each foreman is responsible for periodically inspecting all tools in the work area. All tools will be used in strict compliance with the manufacturer’s instructions and only for the use intended. Power tools will be equipped and
used with guards in place. Any tools having reciprocating, rotating, or moving
parts will be guarded. Supervisors will ensure that unsafe hand tools are removed from service. Unsafe tools include, but are not limited to:
1. Wrenches with jaws sprung which slip when used. 2. Impact tools (hammers, drift pins, wedges, and chisels) with mushroomed heads. 3. Wooden handles that are cracked, splintered, duct-taped and/or
loose on the tool. 4. Electric power-operated tools will be approved, double insulated or grounded; electrical cords will not be used for hoisting or lowering electrical tools 5. Pneumatic power tools will be secured to the hose by a positive
means to prevent accidental disconnection; pneumatic hoses will not be used for hoisting or lowering tools. 6. Fuel powered tools will be stopped while being refueled, serviced, or maintained; when fuel powered tools are used in confined spaces, adequate ventilation will be provided.
7. Tools that are not serviceable will be immediately removed from service and repaired or destroyed.
42

15.2 Heavy Construction Equipment Inspections The equipment operator is responsible to make daily inspections of their equipment and to note any deficiencies. These deficiencies, no matter how
small, should be reported immediately to the Project Manger. In this way, many
potential breakdowns of your machine or safety hazards can be avoided by corrective maintenance. Corrective maintenance examples are listed below: 1. Check the engine oil level and if low, add enough to bring the level
to the full mark.
2. Check the coolant level; add water coolant if level is low. 3. Check fuel level; refill if necessary.

4. Check tires for proper inflation, worn spots, cut or breaks and objects imbedded in or between the tires; correct and report conditions when found.
5. Check under the vehicle for signs of oil, water, fuel, or other leaks; if leads are seen, report them to the Project Manager. 6. Check head, tail and clearance lights; if any are burned out, damaged, or missing, report them at once.
7. Check batteries at least once a week for proper electrolyte level, leaks and loose connections. 8. Report any change in steering play or vibration in the steering
mechanisms. 9. Check the horn; if inoperative, have it repaired. 10. Check the condition of the windshield, rear view mirrors and other
glass; report broken, cracked or missing glass; clean all dirty or wet glass; adjust rear view mirrors. 11. Check belts on air compressor, generator, water pump, and any other; if loose or torn, report to the Project Manger.
12. Check special equipment such as wrenches, jacks, fire extinguishers, etc. and report any that are missing or unserviceable.
43

15.2 Heavy Construction Equipment Inspections (continued) 13. Check the tracks for any loose bolts, nuts, proper adjustment,
unusual wear patterns, cracks, etc.
14. Check for any worn or frayed cables. 15. Check the boom, buckets and gantry for cracks, bent members,
worn teeth and cutting edges.
16. Check fluid level of the hydraulic system. 17. Check for dirty or inoperative air cleaners and filters.

18. Check for proper brake operation. 19. Check to make sure the equipment is equipped with a back-up alarm and the alarm is working properly.
20. Make a complete walk-around inspection of your unit; in this manner, you may detect damage before you put the machine to work.
21. When walking up to or around the unit, observe its condition and notice if anyone or anything is on or under it; by checking now, you may prevent injury or damage when you start out. 22. If applicable, drain water off of the lubricating oil sump daily.
23. In cold weather, bleed the air tank and if equipment is equipped, use the alcohol injector pump.
44

15.3 Forklift and Motorized Industrial Trucks
Policy: All NCOR employees required to operate a powered industrial truck and/or forklift must be trained to operate the equipment. Motorized industrial trucks and
forklifts are a vital and necessary tool that enable NCOR to conduct its business efficiently and safely. Powered industrial trucks are defined as forklifts, platform lift trucks, power sweepers, motorized pallet jacks and all other motorized vehicles used on
NCOR’s premises. NCOR will insure that all industrial trucks are inspected daily for safety and mechanical operability. Any industrial truck found to be defective or unsafe will not be used until the defect or unsafe condition is repaired/remedied. See Daily Inspection Checklists in Appendix B.
SEE APPENDIX B FOR FORKLIFT AND MOTORIZED INDUSTRIAL TRUCK PROCEDURES

45
15.4 General Shop and Hand Tool Safety
Policy: Accepted safety and health precautions will be practiced in the use of general shop machines, fixed and portable power tools, and other hand held equipment
so that all employees using such equipment will be protected against personal
injury. It is also Company policy to institute practices which will minimize the danger of injury to non-operators or user personnel who may be in the area and to minimize the risk to visitors.
Responsibilities: Supervisors must recognize those factors in the workplace with accident potential. The supervisor shall provide frequent inspections of job sites, work methods, and materials/equipment used. Any unsafe equipment/material shall be
tagged and rendered inoperative or physically removed from its place of operation. The supervisor shall permit only qualified personnel to operate equipment and machinery according to safe work practices. a. Supervisors
1. Ensuring safe working conditions 2. Providing necessary protective equipment
3. Ensuring that required guards and protective equipment are provided, used, and properly maintained. 4. Ensuring that tools and equipment are properly maintained and used.
5. Planning the workload and assigning employees to jobs which they are qualified to perform. Ensuring that the employees understand the work to be done, the hazards that may be encountered, and the proper procedure for doing the work safely.
6. Taking immediate action to correct any violation of safety rules observed or reported to them. 7. Ensuring workers exposed or potentially exposed to hazardous chemicals/materials have access to appropriate Safety Data Sheets
(MSDS). 8.Of a shop or any area where fixed or portable powered or unpowered machines and tools are located, is responsible for being familiar with all procedures for safe use and guarding of machines, personal protective
equipment required, shielding against possible injury to other employees or visitors. Enforces safe practices.
46

9.Trains new employees by providing and requiring manuals to be studied,
personally instructing and requesting the assistance of veteran employees already familiar with required safety precautions. 10. Posts signs indicating the use of powered machines by "Authorized
Personnel Only" and requires the employees under his/her supervision to
assist in the enforcement of this policy. No one is allowed to use fixed or portable powered shop machines or welding equipment without sufficient training to the supervisors satisfaction.
11. designates a person to be responsible for general management of a
specific shop area and notifies the Safety and Health Manager of the person selected. 12. Designates a qualified person to be responsible for each major fixed,
powered machine or tool, posts the name on or near the apparatus, and
notifies the Safety and Health Manager accordingly. 13. Coordinates with the Safety and Health Manager to plan and conduct safety meetings with employees as often as needed and warranted.
Topics to be discussed at each session will be selected to fit current operations and any unsafe trends. Leads the discussion and encourages each employee to participate. May assign one employee on a rotating basis to make a short presentation of the topic to get discussion started.
14. Provides appropriate marking of shop floor areas to identify restricted work areas or "approved operator only" yellow floor lines. 15. Makes periodic inspections of shop areas and other industrial areas. Notes all deficiencies and initiates corrective actions.
16. Ensures that all painting operations or other operations are conducted in well ventilated areas. Asks assistance from the Safety and Health Manager in making this determination and to provide necessary protective equipment and respirators, when appropriate.
b. Employees Employees shall be thoroughly trained in the use of protective equipment, guards, and safeguards for chemicals and safe operation of equipment,
machines, and tools they use or operate. Only employees who have been trained and those undergoing supervised on-the-job training (OJT) shall be allowed to use shop equipment, machines, and tools. Employee’s responsibilities:

47
1. Complies with OSHA standards, Company policies and good safe
practices when using fixed and portable power tools, equipment and hand
held equipment. 2. cleans up when finished using equipment.
3. Maintains the tools, equipment and work area in an orderly and safe
manner. 4. Properly trains new users of equipment for which he/she is responsible.
5. Shares responsibility with the supervisor for identifying and marking
shop floor areas. 6. Will not use or permit use of defective equipment or tools in disrepair. Malfunctioning equipment and damaged hand tools will be reported and
repair made before using the equipment or tools. If repairs are not
possible the equipment or tools will be discarded. c. Safety and Health Manager
1. Ensures OSHA standards, Company policies and good safe practices are carried out. 2. Assists supervisor and employee in defining hazards and designating safe practices.
3. Conducts routine and periodic inspection of shop areas for compliance to OSHA standards and NIEHS policies. 4. Conducts periodic inspections of employees hand tools and portable
power tools. 5. Assists the supervisor in planning and conducting safety meetings. General Shop and Work Area Safety:
A. Shop Procedures: a. All portable and fixed powered shop machines and tools will be equipped with approved guarding devices. Guards are to be in place while
using the machine. Equipment must also be properly electrically grounded before use. A. Shop Procedures: (continued)
b. Proper personal protective equipment will be provided (safety glasses, goggles, shields) and used during grinding or other work that may produce
48
flying particles (e.g. drill press, power saws, etc.). Company approved dust
respirators will be used for work that produces airborne dust particles. Eye
protection is required during electrical or electronic hardware repair, installation and/or open front operation. c. Approved face, eye and body protection will be used during any burning
or welding operation. Also, sufficient shielding that provides protection to
others in the immediate area will be used. d. No flammable materials (paints, solvents, chemicals, etc.) will be stored within the immediate area of any burning or welding operation. Flammable
materials must be stored in OSHA and Company approved cabinets.
e. Any employee using portable fixed tools (drill press, jig or band saw, etc.) must not wear loose clothing. Anyone with long hair must tie back the hair or wear acceptable hair protection while operating equipment. All
stock must be clamped down (attempting to hold stock with hands will not
be permitted). f. Before any employee performs service or maintenance on a machine or equipment where the unexpected energizing, start up or release of stored
energy could occur and cause injury, the machine or equipment shall be made safe. This will be accomplished by locking out and tagging out energy isolating devices, and otherwise disabling the machines or equipment. (see Lockout/Tagout Policy).
g. Clean-up after using powered equipment or hand tools must be done immediately following use of the power tool. h. Before any work is started in an area posted with a "Radioactive Materials" label, the supervisor or the Safety and Health Manager will be
contacted for instructions so that the work may be safely performed. i. Before any work is started in an area designated as "Restricted" (e.g. high hazard, carcinogens, etc.,) the area must be inspected by the Safety and Health Manager and permission to proceed given to the supervisor.
j. Before any work is started in any laboratory area, a request will be made to the Laboratory Supervisor, principal investigator and/or Safety and Health Manager to ensure that there will be no danger from hazardous materials in the immediate area of work.
A. Shop Procedures: (continued) k. All burning or welding operations outside the shops area requires a Hot
Work permit from the Safety and Health Manager.
49
l. Good housekeeping will be maintained in the shop area. Material will be
stored in such a manner that there is no danger from sliding, falling or
presenting a hazard by striking against or cutting. Scrap stock must be cleaned from floor and work benches following each job or at the end of each day.
B. Personal Protective Equipment
Personal protective equipment (PPE) is not a substitute for engineering controls or feasible work or administrative procedures. While these controls are being implemented, or if it has been determined that control methods are not feasible,
personal protective equipment is required whenever there are hazards that can
do bodily harm through absorption, inhalation, or physical contact. This equipment includes respiratory and hearing protective devices, special clothing, and protective devices for the eyes, face, head, and extremities. All PPE shall be of a safe design and constructed for the work to be performed and shall be
maintained in a sanitary and reliable condition.
1. Eye Protection Eye protection is required when there is a possibility of injury from
chemicals or flying particles. Examples of operation requiring the use of eye protection include, but are not limited to: •Chipping, grinding, and impact drilling. •Breaking concrete, brick, and plaster. •Welding or helping in welding of any type.
•Cleaning with compressed air. •Tinning or soldering lugs or large joints. •Riveting, grinding, or burning metals. •Handling chemicals, acids, or caustics.
2. Face shields shall be thoroughly washed with soap and water before being worn by another person. 3. Hearing Protection
Appropriate hearing protection shall be used where employees are in designated hazardous noise areas with operating noise sources, or using tools or equipment which are labeled as hazardous noise producers. The Office of Health and Safety shall be contacted for noise level surveys and guidance on the type of hearing protection required.
4. Hand Protection a. Rubber protective gloves shall be worn by personnel working in battery
shops or where acids, alkalies, organic solvents, and other harmful chemicals are handled.
50

b. Electrical worker's gloves are designed and shall be used to insulate
electrical workers from shock, burns, and other electrical hazards. These gloves shall NOT be the only protection provided and will never be used with voltages higher than the insulation rating of the gloves.
c. Multi-use gloves shall be worn to protect the hands from injuries caused
by handling sharp or jagged objects, wood, or similar hazard-producing materials. These gloves are usually made of cloth material with chrome leather palms and fingers or synthetic coating. All-leather gloves are also acceptable.

5. Foot Protection Non-skid shoes shall be worn where floors may be wet or greasy. Where there is reasonable probability of foot or toe injury from impact and compression forces,
safety footwear shall be worn.
6. Respiratory Protection There are various airborne hazards, e.g., organic vapors, particulates, fumes,
etc., that personnel may encounter and respiratory protection may be required. The Safety and Health Manager shall be consulted for guidance on the type of protection required. 7. Head Protection
Hard hats shall be worn by all personnel working below other workers and in areas where sharp projections or other head hazards exist. 8. Body Protection
Natural or synthetic rubber or acid-resisting rubberized cloth aprons shall be worn by personnel handling irritating or corrosive substances. Aprons shall normally be worn with acid sleeves and gloves for greater body protection against skin injuries.
9. Insulated Matting Insulating matting shall be used by workers for additional resistance to shock where potential shock hazards exist, such as:
•Areas where floor resistance is lowered due to dampness. •Areas where high voltages (above 600 bolts) may be encountered. •Areas with electrical repair or test benches.
10. Other
51
a. Shop supervisors shall ensure that shop personnel use the protective
clothing and equipment that will protect them from hazards of the work
they perform. It is the responsibility of workers to keep their PPE in a clean, sanitary state of repair and use the equipment when required. b. Workers shall keep their hands and face clean, change clothes when
they are contaminated with solvents, lubricants, or fuels, and keep their
hands and soiled objects out of their mouth. No food or drink shall be brought into or consumed in areas exposed to toxic materials, chemicals, or shop contaminants. Workers shall wash their hands before eating or smoking after exposure to any contaminant.

c. Workers shall not wear rings, earrings, bracelets, wristwatches, or necklaces in the vicinity of operating machinery and power tools. Additionally, long full beards, unrestrained long hair, and loose clothing can become caught in tools or machinery and cause serious personal
injury. Highly combustible garments or coveralls made of material such as
nylon shall not be worn in or around high temperature equipment or operations such as boiler operations, welding, and any other work with open flame devices.
C. Shop Layout Proper layout, spacing, and arrangement of equipment, machinery, passageways, and aisles are essential to orderly operations and to avoid congestion.
1. Equipment and machinery shall be arranged to permit an even flow of materials. Sufficient space should be provided to handle the material with the least possible interference from or to workers or other work being performed. Machines should be placed so it is not necessary for an
operator to stand in a passageway or aisle. Additionally, machine positioning should allow for easy maintenance, cleaning, and removal of scrap. Clear zones shall be established and should be of sufficient dimensions to accommodate typical work. Marking of machine clear zones may be yellow or yellow and black hash-marked lines, 2 to 3 inches wide.
Machines designed for fixed locations shall be securely anchored. If pieces of stock to be worked exceeds workplace/clear zone floor markings, rope/stanchions may be used to temporarily extend the workplace. Machines with shock mounting pads shall be securely anchored and installed according to manufacturer's instructions.
C. Shop Layout (continued) 2. Passageways/aisles shall be provided and marked to permit the free
movement of employees bringing and removing material from the shop.
52
These passageways are independent of clear zones and storage spaces.
They shall be clearly recognizable.
3. Where powered materials handling equipment (forklift) is used, facility layout shall provide enough clearance in aisles, on loading docks, and through doorways to permit safe turns. Aisles shall be at least 3 feet wider
than the widest vehicle used or most common material being transported.
D. Illumination Adequate illumination shall be provided to ensure safe working conditions.

1. Portable lamps shall have UL approved plugs, handles, sockets, guards, and cords for normal working conditions. 2.For work in boilers, condensers, tanks, turbines, or other grounded
locations that are wet or may cause excessive perspiration, a low voltage
lighting system should be used, either from a battery system or low-voltage lighting unit. In situations where these lighting systems are not available, a vapor-proof 110 volt lighting system shall be used.
3. Flashlights for use near energized electrical equipment and circuitry shall have insulated cases. 4. At least 50 foot-candles of illumination shall be provided at all work stations. However, fine work may require 100 foot-candles or more. This
can be obtained with a combination of general lighting plus supplemental lighting. E. Exits and Exit Markings
1. Every exit shall have "EXIT" in plain legible letters not less than 6 inches high with the strokes of the letters not less than three-quarters of an inch wide. 2. Doors, passageways, or stairways which are neither exits nor ways to
an exit (but may be mistaken for an exit) shall be clearly marked "NOT AN EXIT" or by a sign indicating their actual use, for example: "STORAGE ROOM" or "BASEMENT." 3. When the direction to the nearest exit may not be apparent to an
occupant, an exit sign with an arrow indicating direction shall be used. E. Exits and Exit Markings (continued)
4. Exit access shall be arranged so it is unnecessary to travel toward any area of high hazard potential in order to reach the nearest exit (unless the
53
path of travel is effectively shielded by suitable partitions or other physical
barriers).
5. Exit signs shall be clearly visible from all directions of egress and shall not be obstructed at any time. If occupancy is permitted at night, or if normal lighting levels are reduced at times during working hours, exit
signs shall be suitably illuminated by a reliable light source.
6. A door from a room to an exit or to a way of exit access will be the side-hinged swinging type. It will swing out in the direction of travel if 50 or more persons occupy the room or the exit is from an area of high hazard
potential.
7. Areas around exit doors and passageways shall be free of obstructions. The exit route shall lead to a public way. No lock fastening device shall be used to prevent escape from inside the building.

8. Where occupants may be endangered by the blocking of any single exit due to fire or smoke, there shall be at least two means of exit remote from each other.
9. Exits, exterior steps, and ramps shall be adequately lighted to prevent mishaps. Separate lighting will not be required if street or other permanent lighting gives at least one foot-candle of illumination on the exit, steps, or ramp.
F. Housekeeping Good housekeeping shall be maintained in all shops, yards, buildings, and mobile equipment. Supervisors are responsible for good housekeeping in or around the work they are supervising. As a minimum, the following requirements
shall be adhered to: 1. Material shall not be placed where anyone might stumble over it, where it might fall on someone, or on or against any support unless the support can withstand the additional weight.
2. Aisles and passageways shall be kept clear of tripping hazards. 3. Nails shall be removed from loose lumber or the points turned down.
4. Ice shall be removed from all walkways and work areas where it may create a hazard or interfere with work to be done. If ice cannot be removed readily, sand or other approved materials shall be applied. F. Housekeeping (continued)

54
5. Trash and other waste materials shall be kept in approved receptacles.
Trash shall not be allowed to accumulate and shall be removed and
disposed of as soon as practicable, at least once per shift (or more often if needed). 6. Disconnect switches, distribution panels, or alarm supply boxes shall
not be blocked by any obstruction which may prevent ready access.
7. Machinery and equipment shall be kept clean of excess grease and oil and (operating conditions permitting) free of excessive dust. Pressure gauges and visual displays shall be kept clean, visible, and serviceable at
all times. Drip pans and wheeled or stationary containers shall be cleaned
and emptied at the end of each shift. G. Fire Prevention
All shop services personnel shall receive fire prevention training as part of their
general training. 1. Supervisors in charge of operations where fuels, solvents, or other flammable liquids are used shall be constantly alert for hazards and
unsafe acts. Fuels such as gasoline shall never be used to clean floors or clothing, and open solvent or gasoline containers shall not be kept near electrical equipment. The use of low flashpoint petroleum solvents shall be avoided whenever possible. Open flames, open element heaters, equipment not properly grounded, and nonexplosion-proof electrical
equipment used in the presence of flammable or combustible liquids shall be avoided. 2. Fire extinguishers of at least 20 BC or greater rating shall be installed in shop areas. The number of extinguishers depends upon the size and
layout of the facility. Fire extinguishers shall meet the following OSHA requirements: a. Be kept fully charged and in their designated area. B. Be located along normal paths of travel.
c. Not be obstructed or obscured from view. d. Be visually inspected at least monthly to ensure that they: 1. Are in their designated places. 2. Have not been tampered with or actuated.
3. Do not have corrosion or other impairments. 4. Are accessible and not obstructed. 2. Fire extinguishers shall meet the following OSHA requirements:
(continued) d. Be visually inspected at least monthly to ensure that they:
55

5. Be examined at least yearly and/or recharged or
repaired to ensure operability and safety. 6. Be hydrostatically tested.
7. Be placed so the maximum travel distance, unless
there are extremely hazardous conditions, does not exceed 75 feet for Class A or 50 feet for Class B locations.
3. Supervisors shall ensure that employees remove construction debris
and rubbish from the job site upon completion of the job, or daily if extended beyond one day. Hazardous materials shall not be left at job sites unless properly stored. Work being performed on job sites shall not endanger building occupants (e.g., exits blocked, fire alarm devices
disconnected, etc.).
H. Material Storage All unnecessary accumulation of materials and supplies in the shop area shall be
avoided. The presence of unnecessary material in the shop could cause such incidents as tripping, falling, or slipping. This could be especially hazardous around equipment that is in operation. The only material in the shop area shall be that actually in work. The only place that materials should accumulate in quantity are in storerooms and material holding areas.
1. The storage of materials shall not, of itself, create a hazard. Materials stored in tiers shall be stacked, strapped, blocked or interlocked, and limited in height so they are stable and secure against sliding or collapse. Storage racks shall have sufficient capacity to bear the loads imposed on
them. 2. Stored materials shall not obstruct fire extinguishers, alarm boxes, sprinkler system controls, electrical switch boxes, machine operations, emergency lighting, first aid or emergency equipment, or exits.
3. Heavy materials and equipment should be stored low and close to the ground or floor to reduce the possibility of injury during handling. 4. All passageways and storerooms shall be maintained clean,
unobstructed, dry, and in sanitary condition. Spills will be promptly removed. 5. Where mechanical handling equipment, such as lift trucks are used, safety clearance shall be provided for aisles at loading docks, through
doorways, and wherever turns or passages must be made. No obstructions that could create a hazard are permitted in aisles.
56

I. Use of Tools
Condition of tools: All hand and power tools and similar equipment, whether furnished by NCOR or the employee, shall be maintained in a safe condition. Machine Guards:
Many accidents are caused by machinery that is improperly guarded or not guarded at all. Important factor that must be kept in mind relative to machinery guarding is that no mechanical motion that threatens a worker’s safety should be left without a safeguard.
When power operated tools are designed to accommodate guards, they shall be equipped with such guards when in use. Guards shall be in place and operable whenever the tool is in use. The guard
shall not be manipulated or disabled or changed in such a way as to prevent it from protecting as it is intended to protect. Guarding shall meet the requirements of ANSI B15.1. The following areas of machinery will be provided with barriers and/or
enclosures that will effectively prevent personnel from coming in contact with moving components: a) Point of operation exposures such as blades, knives and cutting heads. b) Power transmission exposures such as belts, pulleys, shaft, gears, etc.
c) Top, bottom and backside exposures, such as the underside of table saws and the wheels on band saws. d) When a point-of-operation guard cannot be used because of unusual shapes or cuts, jigs or fixtures which will provide equal safety for the operator will be used.
e) Upon completion of an unusual operation, the guard will be immediately replaced. Whenever a guard is removed for other than an operational requirement, the machine will be shut down and the control switch(es) locked and tagged in
the “OFF” position. Guards will be affixed to the machine. Where possible, the guards will be of the hinged type to enhance maintenance or adjustments.
Personal Protective Equipment: Proper personal protective equipment will be provided (safety glasses, goggles,
shields) and used during grinding or other work that may produce flying particles (e.g. drill press, power saws, etc.). Company approved dust respirators will be
57
used for work that produces airborne dust particles. Eye protection is required
during electrical or electronic hardware repair, installation and/or open front
operation. Employees using hand and power tools and are exposed to the hazard of falling, flying, abrasive, and splashing objects, or exposed to harmful dusts, fumes,
mists, vapors, or gases shall be provided with the particular personal protective
equipment necessary to protect them from the hazard. The use of any machinery, tool, material, or equipment which is not in compliance with any applicable requirement of this part is prohibited. Such
machine, tool, material, or equipment shall either be identified as unsafe by
tagging or locking the controls to render them inoperable or shall be physically removed from its place of operation. 1. Handtools

a. Incidents at the job site involving hand tools are usually the result of misuse. Hand tools are precision tools capable of performing many jobs when used properly. Prevention of incidents involving hand tools on the job site becomes a matter
of good instruction, adequate training, and proper use. b. Hand tool safety requires that the tools be of good quality and adequate for the job. All tools shall be kept in good repair and maintained by qualified personnel.
c. Racks, shelves, or tool boxes shall be provided for storing tools which are not in use. d. When personnel use hand tools while they are working on
ladders, scaffolds, platforms, or work stands, they shall use carrying bags for tools which are not in use. Workers shall not drop tools. 2. Supervisors shall frequently inspect all hand tools used in the operation
under their supervision. Defective tools shall be immediately removed from service. Some common tool defects are: a. Handles
When handles of hammers, axes, picks, or sledges become cracked, split, broken, or splintered, they shall be immediately replaced. Tool handles shall be well-fitted and securely fastened by wedges or other acceptable means.
58
Wedges, always used in pairs, shall be driven into the handle when
repairing a sledgehammer or maul, to prevent the head from
accidentally flying off if the handle shrinks. b. Tangs
Files, wood chisels, and other tools with tangs shall be fitted and
used with suitable handles covering the end of the tang. Ends of the handles shall not be used for pounding or tapping.
c. Mushroom Heads
Cold chisels, punches, hammers, drift pins, and other similar tools have a tendency to mushroom from repeated poundings. They shall be dressed down as soon as they begin to crack and curl.

1. When dressing tools, a slight bevel of about three-sixteenths of an inch shall be grounded around the head. This will help prevent the heads from mushrooming.
2. When tool heads mushroom, the material is highly crystallized and, with each blow of the hammer, fragments are likely to break off. 3. Portable Power Tools
Portable power tools increase mobility and convenience but are frequently more hazardous to use than their stationary counterparts. Personnel who are required to use portable power tools in their work shall be thoroughly trained in safe operating
practices. Safe operating procedure shall be set up for each type of tool consistent with the manufacturer's instructions. J. Use of Compressed Air Sources
1. Compressed air has the appearance of a relatively harmless gas. However, to avoid accidents, compressed air must be used correctly. The improper or inadvertent connection of items not designed for shop air pressure, i.e., equipment, storage vessels, or containers, to a shop air supply may cause serious personal injury and more than likely will
damage the item being connected. 2. The maximum air pressure approved for general use in the shops and laboratories is 30 psi (pounds per square inch). This pressure is sufficient for most shop and laboratory operations and is not
significantly hazardous. Use discretion and good judgement when using compressed air, even at this low pressure.
59

3. The following rules and practices are suggested to avoid personal
injury, equipment damage, and potential environmental impact: a. All personnel assigned to shops with air compressors shall be familiar with compressor operating and maintenance
instructions.
b. Compressed air is not to be used to blow dirt, chips, or dust from clothing. c. Air compressors shall be maintained strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
d. Do not use compressed air to transfer materials from containers
when there is a possibility of exceeding the safe maximum allowable working pressure of the container. e. The maximum working pressure of compressed air lines shall be identified in psi. Pipeline outlets shall be tagged or marked
showing maximum working pressure immediately adjacent to
the outlet. f. Do not use compressed air to transfer materials from standard 55-gallon drums. Use a siphon with a bulk aspirator on a pump.
WARNING It is dangerous to pressurize any container not designed for that purpose. g. Never use compressed air where particles can be accelerated by the air stream.
h. Do not use compressed air to clean machinery or parts unless absolutely necessary. Where possible, use a brush. If necessary, use a minimum pressure and provide barriers or clean the area of personnel. Wear goggles to protect your eyes. i. Never apply compressed air to any part of a person's body.
j. Do not use a compressed air line that does not have a pressure regulator for reducing the line pressure. k. Keep the hose length between tool housing and the air source as short as possible. l. Where possible, attach a short length of light chain between the
hose and the housing on air-operated tools. This keeps the hose from whipping should the hose-tool coupling separate. m. Inspect air supply and tool hoses before using. Discard and label unfit hoses. Repair hoses where applicable. n. Turn valve off and vent pressure from a line before connecting
or disconnecting it. Never work on a pressurized line. o. Do not connect air supply respirators or supplied-air suits to the compressed air supply system of any building. Such compressed air is unsafe to breathe. p. Do not attach pneumatic tools, process, or control instruments
to breathing air lines. The potential contamination to personnel and systems is hazardous.
60

16.0 CONSTRUCTION SAFETY
All construction and demolition activities will be performed in compliance with 20 CFR 1910, 29 CFR 1926 Subpart T, The USACE guidelines of EM 385-1-1,
Section 33, and the National Association of Demolition Contractors’ (NADC)
Demolition Safety Manual. In the event of a conflict between these standards, the more stringent will prevail. The following fundamental safety rules will be applied at all times:

1. During the course of construction, work areas, passageways, and stairs in and around buildings and structures will be kept clear of debris. Construction materials will be stored in an orderly manner. Storage areas and walkways on the site will be maintained free
from dangerous depressions, obstructions and debris. Trash and
waste materials will be promptly removed and disposed of properly. 2. Warning signs, barricades, and flagging are to be used to warn personnel of potential or hidden hazards or advise of intermittent
activities, which might endanger outside personnel. They are not to be used in lieu of more effective protection. 3. Adequate ventilation or localized exhaust may be required to satisfy the work environment requirement of OSHA (1926.55,57). Real-
time air monitoring will be used to verify the need for ventilation. 4. All construction/demolition work areas, aisles, stairs, ramps, runways, corridors, offices, shops, and storage areas where work is in progress will be lighted with either natural or artificial illumination.
Minimum illumination intensities for general construction areas will be 5-foot candles. Phase safety plans will be developed for each operation to identify construction hazards. The applicable hazards and respective control measures will be
reviewed with employees at the morning safety meetings. Standard Safe Operating Procedures (SSOPs) will be enforced as part of the SSHP for all construction and demolition operations conducted at the site.

61

17.0 EXCAVATION SAFETY
Excavation operations to be conducted on-site will be performed in accordance with 19 CFR 1926 Subpart P- Excavations, and the USACE EM 385-1-1, Section
23. In the event of a conflict between these referenced standards, the more
stringent will apply. Safety operations while performing excavation operations, or working in or around excavations involve many factors. SSOPs for safe excavation operations
will be enforced as part of the SSHP. The applicable SSOPs will be identified
and reviewed at the morning safety meeting prior to conducting excavation operations. The SSHP will address excavation preparation requirements such as identifying
surface encumbrances, underground utilities, pipelines, overhead electrical
equipment and the appropriate actions to be followed. SSOPs implemented for safe excavation will address at a minimum the following related requirements:
1. Safe access and egress 2. Exposure to vehicular traffic 3. Exposure to falling loads 4. Warning systems for mobile equipment
5. Hazardous atmospheres 6. Protection from hazards associated with water accumulation 7. Adjacent structures 8. Protection from loose rock or soil 9. Excavation inspections by competent person
10. Fall protection 11. Soil classification 12. Protective system requirements 13. Excavation permits

62

18.0 SANITATION
Drinking water will be supplied to the site by public utilities or commercial vendors. Employees engaged in field operations where public facilities for
drinking water are not immediately accessible will be provided daily with
commercial drinking water contained in dedicated clean and sanitized portable water coolers equipped with a tap. Sufficient quantities of disposable cups will be stored in sanitary containers and used disposable cups will be collected in plastic trash bags and properly disposed of at the end of each work shift. Toilet
facilities will be provided and maintained in accordance with USACE EM 385-1-1
(02.B).
63

19.0 BLOODBORNE PATHOGENS

PLEASE SEE APPENDIX C BLOODBORNE PATHOGENS
64

20.0 AERIAL LIFTS
Aerial lifts include the following types of vehicle-mounted aerial devices used to elevate personnel to work at above ground elevations:
1 Extensible boom platforms
2 Articulating boom platforms
3 Vertical towers
4 Aerial ladders
5 A combination of any of the above

1 Ladder trucks and tower trucks - Ladders shall be locked in lowered and
stowed position prior to highway travel.
2 Extensible and articulating boom platforms
a. Lift controls shall be tested each day prior to use to determine that such controls are in safe working condition.
b. Only authorized persons shall operate an aerial lift.
c. Belting off to an adjacent pole, structure, or equipment while working from an
aerial lift shall not be permitted.
d. Employees shall always stand firmly on the floor of the basket, and shall not sit or climb on the edge of the basket or use planks, ladders or other devices for a work position.
e. A body belt shall be worn and a lanyard attached to the boom or basket when working from an aerial lift.
f. Boom and basket load limits specified by the manufacturer shall not be exceeded.
g. The brakes shall be set and when outriggers are used, they shall be positioned
on pads or a solid surface. Wheel chocks shall be installed before using an aerial lift on an incline, provided they can be safely installed.
h. An aerial lift truck shall not be moved when the boom is elevated in a working position with men in the basket, except for equipment which is specifically
65
designed for this type of operation in accordance with the provisions of
1926.556(a)(1) and (2).
i. Articulating boom and extensible boom platforms, primarily designed as personnel carriers, shall have both platform (upper) and lower controls. Upper controls shall be in or beside the platform within easy reach of the operator. Lower controls shall provide for overriding the upper controls. Controls shall be
plainly marked as to their function. Lower level controls shall not be operated
unless permission has been obtained from the employee in the lift, except in case of emergency.
j. Climbers shall not be worn while performing work from an aerial lift
k. The insulated portion of an aerial lift shall not be altered in any manner that
might reduce its insulating value.
l. Before moving an aerial lift for travel, the boom(s) shall be inspected to see that it is properly cradled and outriggers are in stowed position except as provided in paragraph h. above.
66

21.0 LADDER SAFETY
Do you know there's a killer on this job that you probably meet face-to-face everyday? I'm talking about the common, ordinary ladder. Ladders are involved in many accidents, some of which are fatal. Your life literally can depend on knowing how to inspect, use, and care for this tool. Let's spend a few minutes
talking about ladders.
15.1 INSPECTING LADDERS
Before using any ladder, inspect it. Look for the following faults:
1. Loose or missing rungs or cleats.
2. Loose nails, bolts, or screws.
3. Cracked, broken, split, dented, or badly worn rungs, cleats, or side rails.
4. Wood splinters.
5. Corrosion of metal ladders or metal parts.
If you find a ladder in poor condition, don't use it. Report it. It should be tagged and properly repaired or immediately destroyed.
15.2 USING LADDERS
Choose the right type and size ladder. Except where stairways, ramps, or runways are provided, use a ladder to go from one level to another. Keep these tips in mind:
1. Be sure straight ladders are long enough so that the side rails extend above
the top support point by 36" at least.
2. Don't set up ladders in areas such as doorways or walkways where they may be run into by others, unless they are protected by barriers. Keep the area around the top and base of the ladder clear. Don't run hoses, extension cords, or ropes on a ladder and create an obstruction.
3. Don't try to increase the height of a ladder by standing it on boxes, barrels, or other materials. Don't try to splice two ladders together either!
4. Set the ladder on solid footing against a solid support. Don't try to use a step ladder as a straight ladder.
67
5. Place the base of straight ladders out away from the wall or edge of the upper
level about one foot for every four feet of vertical height. Don't use ladders as a
platform, runway, or scaffold.
6. Tie in, block, or otherwise secure the top of straight ladders to prevent them from being displaced.
7. To avoid slipping on a ladder, check your shoes for oil, grease, or mud and
wipe it off before climbing.
8. Always face the ladder and hold on with both hands when climbing up or down. Don't try to carry tools or materials with you.
9. Don't lean out to the side when you're on a ladder. If something is out of reach, get down and move the ladder over.
10. Most ladders are designed to hold only one person at a time. Two may cause the ladder to fail or throw it off balance.
15.3 CARE OF LADDERS
Take good care of ladders and they'll take care of you. Store them in well ventilated areas, away from dampness.
These procedures are designed to prevent the injury of NCOR personnel due to falls or slips any time personnel are working on portable stairs, ladders, or at elevations or more than four (4) feet above grade. Applicable OSHA standards include 29 CFR 1910.21-.68.
1. Ladders A. Hazards Falls are the primary hazard associated with the use of ladders. Falls result from a number of unsafe acts and conditions such as:
1) Ladders being set on unstable surfaces. 2) Personnel reaching too far out to the sides. 3) Personnel standing too high to maintain balance. 4) Personnel using defective ladders (e.g., broken rails, rungs,
missing hardware). These hazards are minimized if workers adhere to proper ladder safety practices and if supervisors periodic basis ensure equipment is used, inspected, and maintained in good condition. Tasks which
require frequent use of ladders and involve significant climbing effort must be accomplished by workers capable of the physical exertion required under these conditions.
68
B. Ladder Requirements

1. Procurement Portable ladders procured for the NCOR shall meet the design and construction specification of OSHA 29 CFR 1910.25 for wood
ladders and 29 CFR 1910.26 for metal ladders. Portable ladders
constructed of reinforced plastic shall meet the specifications of ANSI A14.5-1974. 2. Allowable Lengths

The maximum allowable lengths of portable ladders are: Stepladders - 8 feet Platform stepladders - 12 feet Straight ladders - 20 feet
Extension ladders - 36 feet – with minimum overlap of 3 feet
3. Wooden Ladders
Wooden parts used in construction of ladders should be straight-grained; thoroughly seasoned; smoothly dressed; and free of sharp edges, splinters, checks, decay and other defects. Rungs must be parallel, level and uniformly spaced. The spacing shall not be more than 12 inches.
Wooden ladders will be coated with a suitable protective coating such as boiled linseed oil, clear varnish or clear lacquer. Wood ladders shall not be painted with an opaque coating, since possible defects may be covered up.
4. Nonslip Bases Portable ladders shall be equipped with nonslip bases such as safety feet or spikes, depending upon the type of usage.
5. Electrical Personnel shall not use portable metal ladders when performing work on or near electrical equipment. The side rails of metal ladders will be stenciled in 2-inch (or smaller is necessary to fit on
the side rails) red letters: "DANGER - DO NOT USE AROUND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT." Wood or reinforced plastic ladders shall be used for work on or near electrical equipment. They will be kept clean. Remove all surface buildup or dirt, grease, or oils to avoid creating a ready path for electrical current.

69
6. Care of Ladders

a) Handle ladders with care. Do not drop, jar or misuse them. b) Ladders shall be stored in a manner that will provide easy access for inspection and will permit safe withdrawal for use. They shall not be stored in a manner that presents a tripping hazard not
where they can fall on someone. They should be stored in a
manner that will prevent sagging. c) Lubricate metal bearings of locks, wheels, pulleys, etc., as required to keep them working. d) Replace frayed or badly worn rope.
e) Keep safety feet and other parts in good condition to ensure they
work. f) Maintain ladders in good usable condition. Inspect ladders prior to use. g) Ladders with defects which cannot be immediately repaired,
shall be removed from service for repair or destruction, and shall be
tagged with a danger tag. Do not attempt to straighten or use a bent ladder made of reinforced plastic. h) Rungs or steps on metal ladders that are not corrugated, knurled, or dimpled will have skid-resistant materials applied.
C. Proper Use of Ladders The correct procedures for using ladders are as follows:
1) Where possible, portable non self-supporting ladders will be used at such a pitch that the base of the ladder is placed a distance from the vertical wall that is one-fourth of the working length of the ladder. The ladder shall be placed to prevent slipping, or it will be lashed or manually held in position. Ladder rungs, cleats, and steps shall be parallel, level,
and uniformly spaced, when the ladder is in position for use. 2) Ladders shall not be used by more than one person at a time. Ladders specially designed to support greater loads shall be used in combination with ladder jacks and scaffold planks when an operation requires more
than one person. 3) Place portable ladders so that the side rails have a secure footing. The top rest for portable rung and cleat ladders will be reasonably rigid and will have adequate strength to support the applied load.
4) Ladders shall not be placed in front of doors opening toward the ladder unless the door is blocked open, locked, or guarded. 5) Do not place ladders on boxes, barrels, or other unstable bases to
obtain additional height.
70
6) To support the top of the ladder at a window opening, attach a board
across the back of the ladder, extending across the window to provide firm
support against the building walls or window frames. 7) When ascending or descending, users shall face the ladder and use both hands.

8) Ladders with broken or missing steps, rungs, or cleats, broken side rails, or other defects shall not be used. Do not make improvised repairs. 9) Do not splice short ladders together to provide long sections.

10) Do not use ladders made by fastening cleats across a single rail. 11) Do not use ladders as guys, braces, skids, horizontal platforms or scaffolds, or for other than their intended purposes.

12) Do not use a ladder to aid access to a roof unless the top of the ladder extends at least 3 feet above the point of support, at eave, gutter, or roof line.
13) Always raise extension ladders so that the upper section overlaps and rests on the bottom section. The upper section will always overlap on the climbing side of the extension ladder.
14) Nonslip bases are not intended as a substitute for care in safely placing, lashing, or holding a ladder that is being used on oily, metal, concrete, or slippery surfaces. 15) The bracing on the back legs of step ladders is designed solely for
increasing stability and not for climbing. 16) Hooks may be attached at or near the top of ladders to provide added stability.
17) When the ladder can be knocked over by others who are working in the area, the ladder will be securely fastened. As an alternative, someone will be assigned to steady the bottom, or the area around the ladder will be roped off.
18) Workers shall not stand higher that the third rung/ step from the ladder top and shall not attempt to reach beyond a normal arm's length.
REMEMBER
These tips on ladders may save you from a ladder that tips.
71
22.0 Electrical Safety (Non-Qualified)

GENERAL INTRODUCTION. This Chapter addresses electrical safety requirements that are necessary for the
practical safeguarding of employees involved in construction work and is divided
into four major divisions and applicable definitions as follows: (a) Installation safety requirements. Included in this category are electric equipment and installations used to provide electric power and light on jobsites.

(b) Safety-related work practices. In addition to covering the hazards arising from the use of electricity at jobsites, these regulations also cover the hazards arising from the accidental contact, direct or indirect, by employees with all energized lines, above or below ground, passing through or near the jobsite.

(c) Safety-related maintenance and environmental considerations. (d) Safety requirements for special equipment.
(e) Definitions.

SEE APPENDIX D FOR ELECTRICAL SAFETY

72

23.0 FALL PROTECTION
OSHA has released a final rule covering FALL PROTECTION in the construction industry. It is called Subpart M and the effective date was February 6, 1995. The procedures specified in this new standard are intended to prevent employees from failing off, onto, or through working levels, and to protect them from falling
objects.
The standard stresses three types of protection to be used for fall protection. They are GUARDRAIL SYSTEMS, SAFETY NET SYSTEMS, AND PERSONAL FALL ARREST SYSTEMS. A determination should be made of which method is going to be used when an employee is on a walking or working surface,
horizontal or vertical, with an unprotected side or edge which is 6 feet or more
above a lower level. This includes floors, roofs, ramps, bridges, runways, etc., but not ladders, vehicles, or trailers, on which employees must be located in order to perform their job. Leading edges, residential construction and precast concrete erection may be exceptions to the rule. In these cases the employer
must have a qualified person develop a written fall protection plan for the specific area in which this type of work is being performed. The plan must be maintained and kept up to date.
As a construction worker you also need to know that the subpart does NOT apply
when employees are making an inspection, investigation, or assessment of
workplace conditions prior to the actual start of construction work, or after all construction has been completed.
In addition, Subpart M specifies that as of January 1, 1998, body belts are not acceptable as part of a personal fall arrest system, (Note: the use of a body belt in a positioning device system will be acceptable.) The use of a non-locking
snaphook as a part of personal fall arrest systems and positioning device systems will be prohibited. What this means to you is that non-locking snaphooks and body belts are a thing of the past in the construction industry. Workers will be using full body harnesses with locking snaphooks for fall arrest systems.
Policy:
It is the policy of NCOR to take all practical measures possible to prevent employees from being injured by falls from heights. NCOR will take all necessary steps to eliminate, prevent, and control fall hazards. NCOR will comply fully with the OSHA Fall Protection standard (CFR 1926, Subpart M, Fall Protection).
First consideration will be given to the elimination of fall hazards. If a fall hazard cannot be eliminated, effective fall protection will be planned, implemented, and monitored to control the risks of injury due to falling.
73
All personnel exposed to potential falls from heights will be trained to minimize
their exposures. Fall protection equipment will be provided and used by all
employees. Managers will be responsible for implementation of a fall protection plan for each job site. Fall protection equipment will meet the requirements of applicable ANSI, ASTM,
or OSHA requirements. When purchasing equipment and raw materials for use
in fall protection systems, the equipment and raw material shall meet applicable ANSI and ASTM requirements. Fall Hazard Identification and Evaluation Responsibilities:
The Manager/foreman on each job site will be responsible for identifying fall hazards on their job site. The Manager/foreman will evaluate each situation or work procedure where employees may be exposed to a fall of 4 feet or more. The Manager/foreman will be responsible for developing a plan to eliminate the
exposures, if possible, or to select the appropriate fall protection systems and/or equipment. Fall Rescue Policy:
NCOR shall provide for prompt rescue of employees in the event of a fall or shall
assure that employees are able to rescue themselves. Examples of Situations Requiring Fall Protection:
The following are examples of situations were fall protection will be required. This
listing is by no means complete, and there are many other situations where a fall of 4 feet or more is possible. It should be noted that ladders and scaffolding are not included in this list. They are covered by other OSHA standards and other requirements of our safety program.

• Wall Openings
Any employee working near a wall opening (including those with chutes attached) where the outside bottom edge of the wall opening is 4 feet or more from a lower level, or the wall opening is less than 39 inches (1.0 meter) above the walking/working surface below, will be protected from
falling by the use of a guardrail system, a safety net system, or a personal fall arrest system.
• Holes
74
Personal fall arrest systems, covers, or guardrail systems shall be erected
around holes (including skylights) that are more than 4 feet above lower
levels.
• Leading Edges

Each employee who is constructing a leading edge 4 feet or more above lower levels shall be protected by guardrail systems, safety net systems, or personal fall arrest systems.
• Excavations Each employee at the edge of an excavation 4 feet or more deep shall be protected from falling by guardrail systems, fences, barricades, or covers.
Where walkways are provided to permit employees to cross over excavations, guardrails are required on the walkway if it is 4 feet or more above the excavation.
• Form-work and Reinforcing Steel
For employees, while moving vertically and/or horizontally on the vertical face of reinforcing bar (rebar) assemblies built in place, fall protection is not required when employees are moving. OSHA considers the multiple
hand holds and foot holds on rebar assemblies as providing similar
protection as that provided by a fixed ladder. Consequently, no fall protection is necessary while moving point to point for heights below 24 feet. An employee will be provided with fall protection when climbing or otherwise moving at a height more than 24 feet, the same as for fixed
ladders.
• Hoist Areas
Each employee in a hoist area shall be protected from falling 4 feet or
more by guardrail systems or personal fall arrest systems. If guardrail systems (chain gate or guardrail) or portions thereof must be removed to facilitate hoisting operations, as during the landing of materials, and a worker must lean through the access opening or out over the edge of the
access opening to receive or guide equipment and materials, that
employee must be protected by a personal fall arrest system.
• Overhand Bricklaying and Related Work
Each employee performing overhand bricklaying and related work 4 feet or more above lower levels shall be protected by guardrail systems, safety net systems, or personal fall arrest systems, or shall work in a controlled access zone. All employees reaching more than 10 inches (25 cm) below
the level of a walking/working surface on which they are working shall be
75
protected by a guardrail system, safety net system, or personal fall arrest
system.

• Precast Concrete Erection and Residential Construction
Each employee who is 4 feet or more above lower levels while erecting
precast concrete members and related operations such as grouting of precast concrete members and each employee engaged in residential construction shall be protected by guardrail systems, safety net systems, or personal fall arrest systems.

• Ramps, Runways, and Other Walkways Each employee using ramps, runways, and other walkways shall be
protected from falling 4 feet or more by guardrail systems.
• Low-slope Roofs
Each employee engaged in roofing activities on low-slope roofs with
unprotected sides and edges 4 feet or more above lower levels shall be protected from falling by guardrail systems, safety net systems, personal fall arrest systems or a combination of a warning line system and guardrail system, warning line system and safety net system, warning line system
and personal fall arrest system, or warning line system and safety
monitoring system. On roofs 50 feet or less in width, the use of a safety monitoring system without a warning line system is permitted.
• Steep Roofs Each employee on a steep roof with unprotected sides and edges 4 feet or more above lower levels shall be protected by guardrail systems with
toeboards, safety net systems, or personal fall arrest systems.

• Controlled Access Zones A Controlled access zone is a work area designated and clearly marked in which certain types of work (such as overhand bricklaying) may take place without the use of conventional fall protection systems—guardrail,
personal arrest or safety net—to protect the employees working in the zone. Controlled access zones are used to keep out workers other than those authorized to enter work areas from which guardrails have been removed.
Where there are no guardrails, masons are the only workers allowed in controlled access zones.
76

Controlled access zones, when created to limit entrance to areas where
leading edge work and other operations are taking place, must be defined by a control line or by any other means that restrict access. Control lines shall consist of ropes, wires, tapes or equivalent materials,
and supporting stanchions, and each must be:

• Flagged or otherwise clearly marked at not more than 6-foot intervals with a high-visibility material

• Rigged and supported in such a way that the lowest point (including sag) is not less than 39 inches from the walking/working surface and the highest point is not more than
45 inches --nor more than 50 inches when overhand bricklaying operations are being performed—from the walking/working surface
• Strong enough to sustain stress of not less than 200. Control
lines shall extend along the entire length of the unprotected or leading edge and shall be approximately parallel to the unprotected or leading edge.
• Control lines will be connected on each side to a guardrail system or wall. When control lines are used, they shall be erected not less than 6 feet nor
more than 25 feet from the unprotected or leading edge, except when
precast concrete members are being erected. In the latter case, the control line is to be erected not less than 6 feet nor more than 60 feet or half the length of the member being erected, whichever is less, from the leading edge.

Controlled access zones when used to determine access to areas where overhand bricklaying and related work are taking place are to be defined by a control line erected not less than 10 feet nor more than 15 feet from the working edge. Additional control lines must be erected at each end to
enclose the controlled access zone. Only employees engaged in overhand
bricklaying or related work are permitted in the controlled access zones. On floors and roofs where guardrail systems are not in place prior to the beginning of overhand bricklaying operations, controlled access zones will
be enlarged as necessary to enclose all points of access, material
handling areas, and storage areas. On floors and roofs where guardrail systems are in place, but need to be removed to allow overhand bricklaying work or leading edge work to take
77
place, only that portion of the guardrail necessary to accomplish that day’s
work shall be removed.
Fall Protection Systems:
When there is a potential fall of 4 feet or more, NCOR will utilize one or more of
the following means of providing protection:
• Guardrail Systems

Guardrail systems must meet the following criteria. Toprails and midrails of guardrail systems must be at least one-quarter inch nominal diameter or thickness to prevent cuts and lacerations. If wire rope is used for toprails, it must be flagged at not more 6 feet intervals with a high-visibility material.
Steel and plastic banding will not be used as toprails or midrails. Manila,
plastic, or synthetic rope used for toprails or midrails must be inspected as frequently as necessary to ensure strength and stability. The top edge height of toprails, or (equivalent) guardrails must be 42 inches
plus or minus 3 inches, above the walking/working level. When workers are
using stilts, the top edge height of the top rail, or equivalent member, must be increased an amount equal to the height of the stilts. Screens, midrails, mesh, intermediate vertical members, or equivalent
intermediate structural members must be installed between the top edge of the guardrail system and the walking/working surface when there are no walls or parapet walls at least 21 inches high. When midrails are used, they must be installed at a height midway between the top edge of the guardrail system
and the walking/working level. When screens and mesh are used, they must
extend from the top rail to the walking/working level and along the entire opening between top rail supports. Intermediate members, such as balusters, when used between posts, shall not be more than 19 inches apart.
Other structural members, such as additional midrails and architectural
panels, shall be installed so that there are no openings in the guardrail system more than 19 inches. The guardrail system must be capable of withstanding a force of at least 200
pounds applied within 2 inches of the top edge in any outward or downward
direction. When the 200 pound test is applied in a downward direction, the top edge of the guardrail must not deflect to a height less than 39 inches above the walking/working level.
Midrails, screens, mesh, intermediate vertical members, solid panels, and
equivalent structural members shall be capable of withstanding a force of at least 150 pounds applied in any downward or outward direction at any point along the midrail or other member.
78

Guardrail systems shall be surfaced to protect workers from punctures or
lacerations and to prevent clothing from snagging. The ends of top rails and midrails must not overhang terminal posts, except where such overhang does not constitute a projection hazard.

• Guardrail Systems When guardrail systems are used at hoisting areas, a chain, gate or
removable guardrail section must be placed across the access opening
between guardrail sections when hoisting operations are not taking place. At holes, guardrail systems must be set up on all unprotected sides or edges. When holes are used for the passage of materials, the hole shall have not
more than two sides with removable guardrail sections. When the hole is not
in use, it must be covered or provided with guardrails along all unprotected sides or edges. If guardrail systems are used around holes that are used as access points
(such as ladderways), gates must be used or the point of access must be
offset to prevent accidental walking into the hole. If guardrails are used at unprotected sides or edges of ramps and runways, they must be erected on each unprotected side or edge.
Personal Fall Arrest Systems:
These consist of an anchorage, connectors, and a body belt or body harness and
may include a deceleration device, lifeline, or suitable combinations. If a personal fall arrest system is used for fall protection, it must do the following:
• Limit maximum arresting force on an employee to 900 pounds when
used with a body belt
• Limit maximum arresting force on an employee to 1,800 pounds when used with a body harness

• Be rigged so that an employee can neither free fall more than 4feet nor contact any lower level
• Bring an employee to a complete stop and limit maximum deceleration distance an employee travels to 3.5 feet
• Have sufficient strength to withstand twice the potential impact energy of an employee free-falling a distance of 4 feet or the free fall distance permitted by the system, whichever is less.
79

The use of body belts for fall arrest is prohibited and a full body harness is be
required. Personal fall arrest systems must be inspected prior to each use for wear damage, and other deterioration. Defective components must be removed from
service.
Positioning Device Systems:
These body belt or body harness systems are to be set up so that a
worker can free fall no farther than 2 feet. They shall be secured to an anchorage capable of supporting a least twice the potential impact load of an employee’s fall or 3,000 pounds, whichever is greater.

Safety Monitoring Systems: When no other alternative fall protection has been implemented, NCOR shall implement a safety monitoring system. NCOR will appoint a
competent person to monitor the safety of workers and shall ensure that the safety monitor:
• Is competent in the recognition of fall hazards;

• Is capable of warning workers of fall hazard dangers and in detecting unsafe work practices;
• Is operating on the same walking/working surfaces of the workers and can see them;
• Is close enough to work operations to communicate orally with workers
and has no other duties to distract from the monitoring function. Mechanical equipment shall not be used or stored in areas where safety monitoring systems are being used to monitor employees engaged in
roofing operations on low-sloped roofs.
No worker, other than one engaged in roofing work (on low-sloped roofs) or one covered by a fall protection plan, shall be allowed in an area where an employee is being protected by a safety monitoring system.

All workers in a controlled access zone shall be instructed to promptly comply with fall hazard warnings issued by safety monitors. Safety Net Systems:

80
Safety nets must be installed as close as practicable under the walking/working
surface on which employees are working and never more than 30 feet (9.1
meters) below such levels. Defective nets shall not be used. Safety nets shall be inspected at least once a week for wear, damage, and other deterioration. Safety nets shall be installed with sufficient clearance underneath to prevent contact with the surface or structure below.

Items that have fallen into safety nets including—but not restricted to, materials, scrap, equipment, and tools—must be removed as soon as possible and at least before the next work shift.
Warning Line Systems: Warning line systems consist of ropes, wires, or chains, and supporting stanchions and are set up as follows:
• Flagged at not more than 6-foot intervals with a high-visibility material;
• Rigged and supported so that the lowest point including sag) is no less
than 34 inches from the walking/working surface and its highest point is no more than 39 inches from the walking/working surface.
• Stanchions, after being rigged with warning lines, shall be capable of
resisting, without tipping over, a force of at least 16 pounds applied horizontally against the stanchion, 30 inches above the walking/working surface, perpendicular to the warning line and in the direction of the floor, roof, or platform edge;
• The rope, wire, or chain shall have a minimum tensile strength of 500 pounds and after being attached to the stanchions, must support without breaking the load applied to the stanchions as prescribed above.

• Shall be attached to each stanchion in such a way that pulling on one section of the line between stanchions will not result in slack being taken up in the adjacent section before the stanchion tips over.
Warning lines shall be erected around all sides of roof work areas. When mechanical equipment is being used, the warning line shall be erected not less than 6 feet from the roof edge parallel to the direction of mechanical equipment operation, and not less than 10 feet from the roof edge perpendicular to the
direction of mechanical equipment operation. When mechanical equipment is not being used, the warning line must be erected not less than 6 feet from the roof edge.
Covers:
81
Covers located in roadways and vehicular aisles must be able to support at least
twice the maximum axle load of the largest vehicle to which the cover might be
subjected. All other covers must be able to support at least twice the weight of employees, equipment, and materials that may be imposed on the cover at any one time. To prevent accidental displacement resulting from wind, equipment, or workers’ activities, all covers must be secured. All covers shall be color coded or
bear the markings "HOLE" or "COVER."
Protection From Falling Objects:
When guardrail systems are used to prevent materials from falling from one level
to another, any openings must be small enough to prevent passage of potential falling objects. No materials or equipment except masonry and mortar shall be stored within 4 feet of working edges. Excess mortar, broken or scattered masonry units, and all other materials and debris shall be kept clear of the
working area by removal at regular intervals.
During roofing work, materials and equipment shall not be stored within 6 feet of a roof edge unless guardrails are erected at the edge, and materials piled, grouped, or stacked near a roof edge must be stable and self-supporting.

Training:
NCOR shall provide a training program for each employee who might be exposed to fall hazards. The program shall enable each employee to recognize the hazards of falling and shall train each employee in the procedures to be
followed in order to minimize these hazards.
NCOR shall verify compliance with paragraph (a) of this section by preparing a written certification record. The written certification record shall contain the name or other identity of the employee trained, the date(s) of the training, and the signature of the person who conducted the training or the signature of NCOR. If
NCOR relies on training conducted by another employer or completed prior to the effective date of this section, the certification record shall indicate the date NCOR determined the prior training was adequate rather than the date of actual training.
The latest training certification shall be maintained.
Retraining:
When NCOR has reason to believe that any affected employee who has already been trained does not have the understanding and skill required by, NCOR shall retrain each such employee. Circumstances where retraining is required include, but are not limited to, situations where:
• Changes in the workplace render previous training obsolete; or
82
• Changes in the types of fall protection systems or equipment to be used
render previous training obsolete; or
• Inadequacies in an affected employee's knowledge or use of fall protection systems or equipment indicate that the employee has not retained the
requisite understanding or skill.
Employees will be trained in the following areas, as a minimum: (a) The nature of fall hazards in the work area;
(b) The correct procedures for erecting, maintaining, disassembling, and inspecting fall protection systems; (c) The use and operation of controlled access zones and guardrail,
personal fall arrest, safety net, warning line, and safety monitoring systems; (d) The role of each employee in the safety monitoring system when the system is in use;
(e) The limitations on the use of mechanical equipment during the performance of roofing work on low-sloped roofs; (f) The correct procedures for equipment and materials handling and
storage and the erection of overhead protection; and, (g) The Employees’ role in fall protection plans.
"Fall protection plan” for employees engaged in leading edge work, precast
concrete erection work, or residential construction work (See 1926.501(b)(2),
(b)(12), and (b)(13) of the OSHA Regulations for more guidance) who can demonstrate that it is infeasible or it creates a greater hazard to use conventional fall protection equipment. The fall protection plan must conform to the following
provisions.
• The fall protection plan shall be prepared by a qualified person and the Safety and Health Manager and developed specifically for the site where the leading edge work, precast concrete work, or residential construction work is being performed and the plan must be maintained up to date.
• Any changes to the fall protection plan shall be approved by a qualified person and the Safety and Health Manager.
• A copy of the fall protection plan with all approved changes shall be
maintained at the job site.
• The implementation of the fall protection plan shall be under the supervision of a competent person.
83
• The fall protection plan shall document the reasons why the use of
conventional fall protection systems (guardrail systems, personal fall arrest systems, or safety nets systems) are infeasible or why their use would create a greater hazard.
• The fall protection plan shall include a written discussion of other measures that will be taken to reduce or eliminate the fall hazard for workers who cannot be provided with protection from the conventional fall protection systems. For example, NCOR shall discuss the extent to which scaffolds, ladders, or vehicle mounted work platforms can be used to
provide a safer working surface and thereby reduce the hazard of falling.
• The fall protection plan shall identify each location where conventional fall protection methods cannot be used. These locations shall then be classified as controlled access zones and NCOR must comply with the
criteria in paragraph (g) of this section.
• Where no other alternative measure has been implemented, NCOR shall implement a safety monitoring system in conformance with OSHA Regulation 1926.502(h).
If an employee falls
In the event an employee falls, or some other related, serious incident occurs, (e.g., a near miss) NCOR shall investigate the circumstances of the fall or other incident to determine if the fall protection plan needs to be changed (e.g. new practices, procedures, or training) and shall implement those changes to prevent
similar types of falls or incidents.
84

Safety Harness Inspection Report
JOBSITE Date Inspector’s
Name

Harness Make/ Model
MFG.'S SERIAL NUMBER
HARNESS WEBBING OR LEATHER
ALL STITCHING RIVETS & EYELETS D-RINGS, BUCKLES & TONGUE
BODY PAD (IF APPL.)
LANYARDS SAFETY LATCH / HOOK
CERTIFICATION OR DATA TAG
x x x x x x x x x x
x x x x x x x x x x
x x x x x x x x x x
x x x x x x x x x x
x x x x x x x x x x
0 = YES - OK
X = NO - REPLACE
Ensure Harness is COLOR-CODED with the appropriate tape marker
FORWARD TO SAFETY DIRECTOR AT
_____________________

85
24.0 THE CONTROL OF HAZARDOUS ENERGY (Lockout/Tagout)

(1) Scope, application and purpose (a) Scope
(i) This standard covers the servicing and maintenance of machines
and equipment in which the unexpected energization or start up of the machines or equipment, or release of stored energy could cause injury to employees. This standard establishes minimum performance requirements for the control of such hazardous
energy.
(ii) This standard does not cover the following: (A) Installations under the exclusive control of electric utilities
for the purpose of power generation, transmission and
distribution, including related equipment for communication or metering; and (B) Exposure to electrical hazards from work on, near, or
with conductors or equipment in electric utilization installations. and (C) Oil and gas well drilling and servicing.
(b) Application. (i) This standard applies to the control of energy during servicing and/or maintenance of machines and equipment.
(ii) Normal production operations are not covered by this standard. Servicing and/or maintenance which takes place during normal production operations is covered by this standard only if: (A) An employee is required to remove or bypass a guard or
other safety device; or (B) An employee is required to place any part of his or her body into an area on a machine or piece of equipment where work is actually performed upon the material being
processed (point of operation) or where an associated danger zone exists during a machine operating cycle.

86
Note: Exception to paragraph (a)(2)(ii): Minor tool changes and adjustments, and
other minor servicing activities, which take place during normal production
operations, are not covered by this standard if they are routine, repetitive, and integral to the use of the equipment for production, provided that the work is performed using alternative measures which provide effective protection
(iii) This standard does not apply to the following.
(A) Work on cord and plug connected electric equipment for which exposure to the hazards of unexpected energization or start up of the equipment is controlled by
the unplugging of the equipment from the energy source
and by the plug being under the exclusive control of the employee performing the servicing or maintenance. (B) Hot tap operations involving transmission and distribution
systems for substances such as gas, steam, water or
petroleum products when they are performed on pressurized pipelines, provided that NCOR demonstrates that (1) continuity of service is essential;
(2) shutdown of the system is impractical; and (3) documented procedures are followed, and (4) special equipment is used which will provide proven effective protection for employees.
(c) Purpose. (i) This section requires NCOR to establish a program and utilize procedures for affixing appropriate lockout devices or tagout devices to energy isolating devices, and to otherwise disable
machines or equipment to prevent unexpected energization, start-up or release of stored energy in order to prevent injury to employees. (ii) When other standards in this part require the use of lockout or
tagout, they shall be used and supplemented by the procedural and training requirements of this section. (2) Definitions applicable to this section.
Affected employee. An employee whose job requires him/her to operate or use a machine or equipment on which servicing or maintenance is being performed under lockout or tagout, or whose job requires him/her to work in an area in which such servicing or maintenance is being performed.
Authorized employee. A person who locks out or tags out machines or equipment in order to perform servicing or maintenance on that machine
87
or equipment. An affected employee becomes an authorized employee
when that employee's duties include performing servicing or maintenance
covered under this section. Capable of being locked out. An energy isolating device is capable of being locked out if it has a hasp or other means of attachment to which, or
through which, a lock can be affixed, or it has a locking mechanism built
into it. Other energy isolating devices are capable of being locked out, if lockout can be achieved without the need to dismantle, rebuild, or replace the energy isolating device or permanently alter its energy control capability.

Energized. Connected to an energy source or containing residual or stored energy. Energy isolating device. A mechanical device that physically prevents the
transmission or release or energy, including but not limited to the
following: A manually operated electrical circuit breaker; a disconnect switch; a manually operated switch by which the conductors of a circuit can be disconnected from all ungrounded supply conductors, and, in addition, no pole can be operated independently; a line valve; a block; and
any similar device used to block or isolate energy. Push buttons, selector switches and other control circuit type devices are not energy isolating devices. Energy source. Any source of electrical, mechanical, hydraulic, pneumatic,
chemical, thermal, or other energy. Hot tap. A procedure used in the repair, maintenance and services activities which involves welding on a piece of equipment (pipelines, vessels or tanks) under pressure, in order to install connections or
appurtenances. It is commonly used to replace or add sections of pipeline without the interruption of service for air, gas, water, steam, and petrochemical distribution systems. Lockout. The placement of a lockout device on an energy isolating device,
in accordance with an established procedure, ensuring that the energy isolating device and the equipment being controlled cannot be operated until the lockout device is removed. Lockout device. A device that utilizes a positive means such as a lock,
either key or combination type, to hold an energy isolating device in a safe position and prevent the energizing of a machine or equipment. Included are blank flanges and bolted slip blinds. Normal production operations. The utilization of a machine or equipment
to perform its intended production function.
88
Servicing and/or maintenance. Workplace activities such as constructing,
installing, setting up, adjusting, inspecting, modifying, and maintaining
and/or servicing machines or equipment. These activities include lubrication, cleaning or unjamming of machines or equipment and making adjustments or tool changes, where the employee may be exposed to the unexpected energization or startup of the equipment or release of
hazardous energy.
Setting up. Any work performed to prepare a machine or equipment to perform its normal production operation.
Tagout. The placement of a tagout device on an energy isolating device,
in accordance with an established procedure, to indicate that the energy isolating device and the equipment being controlled may not be operated until the tagout device is removed.
Tagout device. A prominent warning device, such as a tag and a means of
attachment, which can be securely fastened to an energy isolating device in accordance with an established procedure, to indicate that the energy isolating device and the equipment being controlled may not be operated until the tagout device is removed.
(3) Training (a) Energy control program. NCOR shall establish a program consisting of energy control procedures, employee training and periodic inspections to ensure that before any employee performs any servicing or
maintenance on a machine or equipment where the unexpected energizing, start up or release of stored energy could occur and cause injury, the machine or equipment shall be isolated from the energy source, and rendered inoperative.
• Authorized employees shall be trained on hazardous energy control procedures and on the hazards related to performing activities required for cleaning, repairing, servicing, setting-up and adjusting prime movers, machinery and equipment.
• Each affected employee shall be instructed in the purpose and use of the energy control procedure.
• All other employees whose work operations may be in an area where energy control procedures may be utilized, shall be
instructed about the prohibition relating to attempts to restart or reenergize machines or equipment which are locked out or tagged out.
• Such training shall be documented

Enforcement and Control.

89
• Employees that fail to comply with NCOR policy and procedures
will be retrained, reprimanded, and/or their employment terminated, depending on the severity of the violation.
• NCOR shall ensure these policies and procedures are followed.
The Safety and Health Manager is in control of NCOR Lockout/Tagout Program. It is the responsibility of the Safety and Health Manager and the employee’s supervisor to inspect procedures/ actions and ensure these policies and procedures are complied with and followed. Employees shall notify management
IMMEDIATELY if they are aware that any violations are occurring or have occurred to this policy. Equipment Requiring Lockout Tagout
Procedures The procedures shall clearly and specifically outline the scope, purpose, authorization, rules, and techniques to be utilized for the control of hazardous energy, and the means to enforce compliance
including, but not limited to, the following: (A) A specific statement of the intended use of the procedure;
(B) Specific procedural steps for shutting down, isolating, blocking and securing machines or equipment to control hazardous energy; (C) Specific procedural steps for the placement, removal and
transfer of lockout devices or tagout devices and the responsibility for them; and (D) Specific requirements for testing a machine or equipment to determine and verify the effectiveness of lockout devices,
tagout devices, and other energy control measures.
90
(b) Lockout/tagout.

(i) If an energy isolating device is not capable of being locked out, NCOR’s energy control program under paragraph (c)(1) of this section shall utilize a tagout system.
(ii) If an energy isolating device is capable of being locked out,
NCOR's energy control program under paragraph (c)(1) of this section shall utilize lockout, unless NCOR can demonstrate that the utilization of a tagout system will provide full employee protection as set forth in paragraph (c)(3) of this section.
o Tagout devices shall warn against hazardous conditions if
the machine or equipment is energized and shall include a legend such as the following: Do Not Start, Do Not Open, Do Not Close, Do Not Energize, Do Not Operate.

(iii) Whenever replacement or major repair, renovation or modification of a machine or equipment is performed, and whenever new machines or equipment are installed, energy
isolating devices for such machines or equipment shall be designed to accept a lockout device. (c) Full employee protection.
(i) When a tagout device is used on an energy isolating device which is capable of being locked out, the tagout device shall be attached at the same location that the lockout device would have been attached, and NCOR shall demonstrate that the tagout program will provide a level of safety equivalent to that obtained by
using a lockout program. (ii) In demonstrating that a level of safety is achieved in the tagout program which is equivalent to the level of safety obtained by using a lockout program, NCOR shall demonstrate full compliance with
all tagout-related provisions of this standard together with such additional elements as are necessary to provide the equivalent safety available from the use of a lockout device. Additional means to be considered as part of the demonstration of full employee protection shall include the implementation of additional safety
measures such as the removal of an isolating circuit element, blocking of a controlling switch, opening of an extra disconnecting device, or the removal of a valve handle to reduce the likelihood of inadvertent energization.
(d) Energy control procedure.
91
(i) Procedures shall be developed, documented and utilized for the
control of potentially hazardous energy when employees are
engaged in the activities covered by this section. Note: Exception: NCOR need not document the required procedure for a particular machine or equipment, when all of the following elements
exist:
(1) The machine or equipment has no potential for stored or residual energy or re-accumulation of stored energy after shut down which could endanger employees; (2) The machine or equipment has a single energy source
which can be readily identified and isolated;
(3) The isolation and locking out of that energy source will completely de-energize and deactivate the machine or equipment; (4) The machine or equipment is isolated from that energy
source and locked out during servicing or maintenance;
(5) A single lockout device will achieve a locked-out condition;
(6) The lockout device is under the exclusive control of the authorized employee performing the servicing or
maintenance;
(7) The servicing or maintenance does not create hazards for other employees; and
(8) NCOR, in utilizing this exception, has had no accidents involving the unexpected activation or re-energization of the
machine or equipment during servicing or maintenance. (ii) The procedures shall clearly and specifically outline the scope, purpose, authorization, rules, and techniques to be utilized for the control of hazardous energy, and the means to enforce compliance
including, but not limited to, the following: (A) A specific statement of the intended use of the procedure;
(B) Specific procedural steps for shutting down, isolating, blocking and securing machines or equipment to control hazardous energy; (C) Specific procedural steps for the placement, removal and
transfer of lockout devices or tagout devices and the responsibility for them; and (D) Specific requirements for testing a machine or equipment to determine and verify the effectiveness of lockout devices,
tagout devices, and other energy control measures.
92
(e) Protective materials and hardware.

The following NCOR-initiated rule relates to 29 CFR 1910.147(c)(5): 437-
002-0154 Unique Locks. In addition to and not in lieu of the definition
contained in 1910.147(b) for "lockout device," each person's lock shall have either a key or combination which is unique to that device.

(i) Locks, tags, chains, wedges, key blocks, adapter pins, self-locking fasteners, or other hardware shall be provided by NCOR for isolating, securing or blocking of machines or equipment from energy sources.
(ii) Lockout devices and tagout devices shall be singularly
identified; shall be the only devices(s) used for controlling energy; shall not be used for other purposes; and shall meet the following requirements:
(A) Durable.

(1) Lockout and tagout devices shall be capable of withstanding the environment to which they are exposed for the maximum period of time that
exposure is expected.
(2) Tagout devices shall be constructed and printed so that exposure to weather conditions or wet and damp locations will not cause the tag to deteriorate or the message on the tag to become illegible.
(3) Tags shall not deteriorate when used in corrosive environments such as areas where acid and alkali chemicals are handled and stored. (B) Substantial.

(1) Lockout devices. Lockout devices shall be substantial enough to prevent removal without the use of excessive force or unusual techniques, such as with the use of bolt cutters or other metal cutting tools.

(2) Tagout devices. Tagout devices, including and their means of attachment, shall be substantial enough to prevent inadvertent or accidental removal. Tagout device attachment means shall be of a non-
reusable type, attachable by hand, self-locking, and non-releasable with a minimum unlocking strength of no less than 50 pounds and having the general design and basic characteristics of being at least equivalent to a one-piece, all-environment-tolerant
nylon cable tie.
93
(c) Standardized. Lockout and tagout devices shall be
standardized within the facility in at least one of the following
criteria: Color; shape; or size; and additionally, in the case of tagout devices, print and format shall be standardized. (D) Identifiable. Lockout devices and tagout devices shall
indicate the identity of the employee applying the device(s).
(iii) Tagout devices shall warn against hazardous conditions if the machine or equipment is energized and shall include a legend such as the following:

Do Not Start, Do Not Open, Do Not Close, Do Not Energize, Do Not Operate. (iv) Types of locks and tags used by NCOR Prinzing Portable lockout station with locks Model: LKP

(6) Periodic inspection. (i) NCOR shall conduct a periodic inspection of the energy control procedure at least annually to ensure that the procedure and the
requirements of this standard are being followed. (A) The periodic inspection shall be performed by an authorized employee other than the one(s) utilizing the energy control procedure being inspected.
(B) The periodic inspection shall be conducted to correct any deviations or inadequacies identified. (C) Where lockout is used for energy control, the periodic
inspection shall include a review, between the inspector and each authorized employee, of that employee's responsibilities under the energy control procedure being inspected.
(D) Where tagout is used for energy control, the periodic inspection shall include a review, between the inspector and each authorized and affected employee, of that employee's responsibilities under the energy control procedure being inspected, and the elements set forth in paragraph (c)(7)(ii)
of this section. (ii) NCOR shall certify that the periodic inspections have been performed. The certification shall identify the machine or equipment on which the energy control procedure was being utilized, the date
of the inspection, the employees included in the inspection, and the person performing the inspection.
94

(7) Training and communication.
(i) NCOR shall provide training to ensure that the purpose and function of the energy control program are understood by employees and that the knowledge and skills required for the safe
application, usage, and removal of the energy controls are acquired
by employees. The training shall include the following: (A) Each authorized employee shall receive training in the recognition of applicable hazardous energy sources, the type
and magnitude of the energy available in the workplace, and
the methods and means necessary for energy isolation and control. (B) Each affected employee shall be instructed in the
purpose and use of the energy control procedure.
(C) All other employees whose work operations are or may be in an area where energy control procedures may be utilized, shall be instructed about the procedure, and
about the prohibition relating to attempts to restart or reenergize machines or equipment which are locked out or tagged out. (ii) When tagout systems are used, employees shall also be trained
in the following limitations of tags: (A) Tags are essentially warning devices affixed to energy isolating devices, and do not provide the physical restraint on those devices that is provided by a lock.
(B) When a tag is attached to an energy isolating means, it is not to be removed without authorization of the authorized person responsible for it, and it is never to be bypassed, ignored, or otherwise defeated.
(C) Tags must be legible and understandable by all authorized employees, affected employees, and all other employees whose work operations are or may be in the area, in order to be effective.
(D) Tags and their means of attachment must be made of materials which will withstand the environmental conditions encountered in the workplace.
95
(E) Tags may evoke a false sense of security, and their
meaning needs to be understood as part of the overall
energy control program. (F) Tags must be securely attached to energy isolating devices so that they cannot be inadvertently or accidentally
detached during use.
(iii) Employee retraining. (A) Retraining shall be provided for all authorized and
affected employees whenever there is a change in their job
assignments, a change in machines, equipment or processes that present a new hazard, or when there is a change in the energy control procedures.
(B) Additional retraining shall also be conducted whenever a
periodic inspection under paragraph (c)(6) of this section reveals, or whenever NCOR has reason to believe, that there are deviations from or inadequacies in the employee's knowledge or use of the energy control procedures.
(C) The retraining shall reestablish employee proficiency and introduce new or revised control methods and procedures, as necessary.
(iv) NCOR shall certify that employee training has been accomplished and is being kept up-to-date. The certification shall contain each employee's name and dates of training. All training must be documented, signed and certified.
(8) Energy isolation. Lockout or tagout shall be performed only by the authorized employees who are performing the servicing or maintenance. (9) Notification of employees. Affected employees shall be notified by NCOR or authorized employee of the application and removal of lockout
devices or tagout devices. Notification shall be given before the controls are applied, and after they are removed from the machine or equipment. (4) Application of control. The established procedures for the application of energy control (the lockout or tagout procedures) shall cover the following
elements and actions and shall be done in the following sequence: (1) Preparation for shutdown. Before an authorized or affected employee turns off a machine or equipment, the authorized employee shall have knowledge of the type and magnitude of the energy, the hazards of the
energy to be controlled, and the method or means to control the energy.
96
(2) Machine or equipment shutdown. The machine or equipment shall be
turned off or shut down using the procedures established for the machine
or equipment. An orderly shutdown must be utilized to avoid any additional or increased hazard(s) to employees as a result of the equipment stoppage. (3) Machine or equipment isolation. All energy isolating devices that are
needed to control the energy to the machine or equipment shall be
physically located and operated in such a manner as to isolate the machine or equipment from the energy source(s). (4) Lockout or tagout device application.
(i) Lockout or tagout devices shall be affixed to each energy
isolating device by authorized employees. (ii) Lockout devices, where used, shall be affixed in a manner to that will hold the energy isolating devices in a "safe" or "off"
position.
(iii) Tagout devices, where used, shall be affixed in such a manner as will clearly indicate that the operation or movement of energy isolating devices from the "safe" or "off" position is prohibited.
(A) Where tagout devices are used with energy isolating devices designed with the capability of being locked, the tag attachment shall be fastened at the same point at which the lock would have been attached.
(B) Where a tag cannot be affixed directly to the energy isolating device, the tag shall be located as close as safely possible to the device, in a position that will be immediately obvious to anyone attempting to operate the device.
(5) Stored energy. (i) Following the application of lockout or tagout devices to energy isolating devices, all potentially hazardous stored or residual energy
shall be relieved, disconnected, restrained, and otherwise rendered safe. (ii) If there is a possibility of re-accumulation of stored energy to a hazardous level, verification of isolation shall be continued until the
servicing or maintenance is completed, or until the possibility of such accumulation no longer exists.
(6) Verification of isolation. Prior to starting work on machines or equipment that have been locked out or tagged out, the authorized
employee shall verify that isolation and de-energization of the machine or equipment have been accomplished.
97

(e) Release from lockout or tagout. Before lockout or tagout devices are removed
and energy is restored to the machine or equipment, procedures shall be followed and actions taken by the authorized employee(s) to ensure the following:
(1) The machine or equipment. The work area shall be inspected to
ensure that non-essential items have been removed and to ensure that machine or equipment components are operationally intact. (2) Employees.

(i) The work area shall be checked to ensure that all employees have been safely positioned or removed. (ii) After lockout or tagout devices have been removed and before a
machine or equipment is started, affected employees shall be
notified that the lockout or tagout device(s) have been removed. (3) Lockout or tagout devices removal. Each lockout or tagout device shall
be removed from each energy-isolating device by the employee who applied the device. Exception to paragraph (e)(3): When the authorized employee who applied the lockout or tagout device is not available to remove it, that
device may be removed under the direction of NCOR, provided that specific procedures and training for such removal have been developed, documented and incorporated into NCOR's energy control program. NCOR shall demonstrate that the specific procedure provides equivalent safety to the removal of the device by the authorized employee who
applied it. The specific procedure shall include at least the following elements: (i) Verification by NCOR that the authorized employee who applied the device is not at the facility;
(ii) Making all reasonable efforts to contact the authorized employee to inform him/her that his/her lockout or tagout device has been removed; and
(iii) Ensuring that the authorized employee has this knowledge before he/she resumes work at that facility.
(6) Additional requirements.
98
(1) Testing or positioning of machines, equipment or components thereof.
This situation, the temporary removal of devices, shall be documented as
to who performs and who verifies the action. Also, in situations in which lockout or tagout devices must be temporarily removed from the energy isolating device and the machine or equipment energized to test or position the machine, equipment or component thereof, the following
sequence of actions shall be followed:
(i) Clear the machine or equipment of tools and materials in accordance with paragraph (e)(1) of this section; (ii) Remove employees from the machine or equipment area in
accordance with paragraph (e)(2) of this section;
(iii) Remove the lockout or tagout devices as specified in paragraph (e)(3) of this section; (iv) Energize and proceed with testing or positioning; (v) De-energize all systems and reapply energy control measures in
accordance with paragraph (d) of this section to continue the
servicing and/or maintenance. (2) Outside personnel (contractors, etc.).
(i) Whenever outside servicing personnel are to be engaged in activities covered by the scope and application of this standard, NCOR and the outside Company shall inform each other of their respective lockout or tagout procedures.
(ii) NCOR shall ensure that his/her employees understand and comply with the restrictions and prohibitions of the outside Company's energy control program. (3) Shift or personnel changes. Specific procedures shall be utilized during
shift or personnel changes to ensure the continuity of lockout or tagout protection, including provision for the orderly transfer of lockout or tagout device protection between off-going and oncoming employees, to minimize exposure to hazards from the unexpected energization or start- up of the machine or equipment, or the release of stored energy.
(7) Group lockout or tagout.
When servicing and/or maintenance is performed by a crew, craft, department or other group, they shall utilize a procedure which affords the employees a level of protection equivalent to that provided by the implementation of a personal lockout or tagout device.
• Group lockout or tagout devices shall be used in accordance with the procedures required by paragraph (c)(4) [Energy Control Procedure section, previous], but not necessarily limited to, the
following specific requirements:
99

o Primary responsibility is vested in an authorized employee
for a set number of employees working under the protection of a group lockout or tagout device (such as an operations lock);

o Provision for the authorized employee to ascertain the
exposure status of individual group members with regard to the lockout or tagout of the machine or equipment and

o When more than one crew, craft, department, etc. is
involved, assignment of overall job-associated lockout or tagout control responsibility to an authorized employee designated to coordinate affected work forces and ensure continuity of protection shall be done. THIS DESIGNATED, AUTHORIZED EMPLOYEE SHALL HAVE THE PRIMARY
RESPONSIBILITY FOR THE EMPLOYEES WORKING UNDER THE PROTECTION OF A GROUP LOCKOUT OR TAGOUT DEVICE. Documentation of who these designated, authorized employee’s are shall be written down and records maintained
• Specific procedures shall be utilized during shift or personnel changes to ensure the continuity of lockout or tagout protection, including provision for the orderly transfer of lockout or tagout device protection
between off-going and oncoming employees, to minimize exposure to hazards from the unexpected energization or start-up of the machine or equipment, or the release of stored energy.
o Each authorized employee shall affix a personal lockout or tagout device to the group lockout device, group lockbox, or comparable mechanism when he or she begins work, and shall remove those devices when he or she stops working on
the machine or equipment being serviced or maintained.

100
TYPICAL MINIMAL LOCKOUT PROCEDURE
Note: The following A to §1910.147 serves as a non-mandatory guideline to assist NCOR and employees in complying with the requirements of this section, as well as to provide other helpful information. Nothing in the Appendix adds to or detracts from any of the requirements of this section. A general lockout/tagout policy does not comply with OSHA regulations: NCOR must have a separate
lockout/tagout procedure for each piece of different equipment. TYPICAL MINIMAL LOCKOUT PROCEDURE GENERAL The following simple lockout procedure is provided to assist NCOR in developing
its procedures so they meet the requirements of this standard. When the energy isolating devices are not lockable, tagout may be used, provided NCOR complies with the provisions of the standard which require additional training and more rigorous periodic inspections. When tagout is used and the energy isolating devices are lockable, NCOR must provide full employee protection (see
paragraph (c)(3)) and additional training and more rigorous periodic inspections are required. For more complex systems, more comprehensive procedures may need to be developed, documented and utilized. LOCKOUT PROCEDURE
Purpose This procedure establishes the minimum requirements for the lockout of energy isolating devices whenever maintenance or servicing is done on machines or equipment. It shall be used to ensure that the machine or equipment is stopped,
isolated from all potentially hazardous energy sources and locked out before employees perform any servicing or maintenance where the unexpected energization or start-up of the machine or equipment or release of stored energy could cause injury.
Compliance with this program All employees are required to comply with the restrictions and limitations imposed upon them during the use of lockout. The authorized employees are required to perform the lockout in accordance with this procedure. All employees, upon observing a machine or piece of equipment which is locked out to perform
servicing or maintenance shall not attempt to start, energize or use that machine or equipment. Type of compliance enforcement to be taken for violation of the above NCOR shall ensure these policies and procedures are followed. It is the
responsibility of the Safety and Health Manager and the employee’s supervisor to inspect procedures/ actions and ensure these policies and procedures are complied with and followed. Employees shall notify management IMMEDIATELY if they are aware that any violations are occurring or have occurred to this policy. Employees that fail to comply with NCOR policy and procedures will be retrained,
reprimanded, and/or their employment terminated, depending on the severity of the violation.
101

SEQUENCE OF LOCKOUT (1) Notify all affected employees that servicing or maintenance is required on a machine or equipment and that the machine or equipment must be shut down and locked out to perform the servicing or maintenance.
Name(s)/Job Title(s) of affected employees and how to notify. (2) The authorized employee shall refer to NCOR procedure to identify the type and magnitude of the energy that the machine or equipment utilizes,
shall understand the hazards of the energy, and shall know the methods to control the energy. Type(s) and magnitude(s) of energy, its hazards and the methods to control the energy.
(3) If the machine or equipment is operating, shut it down by the normal stopping procedure (depress stop button, open switch, close valve, etc.). Type(s) and location(s) of machine or equipment operating controls.
(4) Deactivate the energy isolating device(s) so that the machine or equipment is isolated from the energy source(s). Type(s) and location(s) of energy isolating devices.
(5) Lock out the energy isolating device(s) with assigned individual lock(s). (6) Stored or residual energy (such as that in capacitors, springs, elevated machine members, rotating flywheels, hydraulic systems, and air, gas,
steam, or water pressure, etc.) must be dissipated or restrained by methods such as grounding, repositioning, blocking, bleeding down, etc. Type(s) of stored energy--methods to dissipate or restrain.
(7) Ensure that the equipment is disconnected from the energy source(s) by first checking that no personnel are exposed, then verify the isolation of the equipment by operating the push button or other normal operating control(s) or by testing to make certain the equipment will not operate.
Caution: Return operating control(s) to neutral or "off" position after verifying the isolation of the equipment. Method of verifying the isolation of the equipment.
(8) The machine or equipment is now locked out.
102
RESTORING EQUIPMENT TO SERVICE- When the servicing or maintenance is
completed and the machine or equipment is ready to return to normal operating condition, the following steps shall be taken: (1) Check the machine or equipment and the immediate area around the
machine or equipment to ensure that non-essential items have been removed and that the machine or equipment components are operationally intact. (2) Check the work area to ensure that all employees have been safely positioned or removed from the area.
(3) Verify that the controls are in neutral. (4) Remove the lockout devices and reenergize the machine or equipment.
Note: The removal of some forms of blocking may require re-energization of the machine before safe removal. (5) Notify affected employees that the servicing or maintenance is completed and the machine or equipment is ready for use.

103

25.0 EMERGENCY RESPONSE AND CONTINGENCY PLAN This contingency plan details the emergency response procedures to be
implemented for anticipated emergency situations during site operations. 25.1 Pre-Emergency Planning Before starting site operations, the Project Manger will implement emergency
procedures that include: 1. Identifying the location and route to emergency medical services. 2. Establishing site communications. 3. Designating emergency warning signal and evacuation routes.
4. Inventorying emergency equipment. 5. Communicating emergency procedures to personnel and Mill management. 25.2 Personnel Roles, Lines of Authority
The Project Manger takes the lead during site emergencies until the Mill and/or off-site emergency responders arrive on-site. In cases of major emergencies, personnel will be evacuated from the site, contact the Mill and/or local emergency responders and rely on them to handle the emergency. Minor
emergencies that are controllable on-site with emergency equipment located at the site will be addressed by on-site personnel with the approval of the Project Manger. 25.3 Emergency Recognition and Prevention
The Project Manager will conduct an initial site safety briefing to review the requirements of the site safety plan with site personnel. This briefing will include discussions on the recognition, prevention and control of emergencies anticipated on-site. Daily safety meetings will be held to emphasize emergency
prevention and control measures. 25.4 Site Security and Control
Access to the site will be controlled by the Project Manager until the Mill and/or local emergency responders arrive. The Project Manager will then relinquish site security/control to the authorized emergency response organization.
104

25.5 Site Communications Site communications will provide means for both on-site and off-site communications. When reporting an emergency situation to the Mill and/or off-
site emergency responders, the following information must be provided:
1. Name of person making the call. 2. Telephone number and location of person making the call. 3. Name of person(s) exposed or injured.
4. Description of exposure and emergency.
5. Actions taken. 6. Name and location of site contact for emergency if other than caller.
105

25.6 Personal Protective Equipment and Emergency Equipment Policy:
Protective clothing will be provided whenever it is necessary by reason of
hazards, processes or environmental conditions. NCOR requires that protective clothing be used when chemical hazards, radiological hazards, or mechanical irritants are encountered in a manner capable of causing injury or impairment through absorption, inhalation, or physical contact.
References 20 CFR 1910.132 Subpart I - Personal Protective Equipment
Responsibilities:
The Safety and Health Manager will be responsible for assessing the hazards and exposures that may require the use of PPE, determining the type of equipment to be provided, and purchasing the equipment. Input from managers,
supervisors, and employees will be obtained and considered in selecting
appropriate equipment. Managers/supervisors will be responsible for training employees in the use and proper care of PPE, ensuring that all employees are assigned appropriate PPE,
and ensuring that PPE is worn by employees when and where it is required.
Employees are responsible for following all provisions of this program and related procedures. They are expected to wear PPE when and where it is required.
Purpose:
The purpose of this program is to protect our employees by ensuring that Personal Protective Equipment (PPE), including personal protective equipment for eyes, face, head, and extremities, protective clothing, respiratory devices, and
protective shields and barriers, shall be provided, used, and maintained in a
sanitary and reliable condition wherever it is necessary by reason of hazards of processes or environment, chemical hazards, radiological hazards, or mechanical irritants encountered in a manner capable of causing injury or impairment in the function of any part of the body through absorption, inhalation
or physical contact.

106

Employee-owned equipment. Where employees provide their own protective
equipment, NCOR shall be responsible to assure its adequacy, including proper maintenance, and sanitation of such equipment. This program covers eye and face protection, head protection, foot protection,
hand protection, and electrical protection. Respiratory hazards and hearing
hazards are covered by other programs, but they will also be included in the Hazard Assessment described below. This program covers the responsibilities of managers, supervisors and workers, assessment of hazards, selection and use of personal protective equipment (PPE), and training.

Procedures: a. Personal protective clothing is to include approved lab coats, surgical caps,
masks, gloves, special shirts, trousers, overalls, jumpsuits, safety shoes, hard
hats, coats and smocks. As a minimum, NCOR furnished lab coats should always be worn during laboratory work. b. Requests for all personal protective clothing not available as NCOR stock
items are generated by the supervisor and are approved by the Safety and
Health Manager. The protective clothing must be worn by the employees and visitors as dictated by NCOR policy. The clothing will be available only in compromise sizes (i.e. small, medium, and large).
c. Personal protective clothing may not be worn in the cafeteria or other food
consumption areas, conference rooms, picnic areas or off campus. d. Sandals, and open-toed shoes, are prohibited in laboratory, shop, warehouse, and animal housing areas.

e. Safety shoes should be worn by all shop, warehouse and maintenance personnel as dictated by the nature of the work. Safety shoe areas are recommended by the supervisor and approved by the Safety and health Manager. The user will be responsible for the proper cleaning, maintenance and
use of the safety shoes.
g. Hard hats should be worn in all posted areas (e.g., locations in warehouses, shops, and building construction or renovation areas) and when performing work in which the supervisor Safety and Health Manager decides such hazards exist.

107
Hazard Assessment:
NCOR will perform an assessment of the workplace to determine if hazards are present, or likely to be present, which necessitate the use of personal protective equipment (PPE). This assessment will consist of a survey of the workplace to identify sources of hazards to workers. Consideration will be given to hazards
such as impact, penetration, laceration, compression (dropping heavy objects on foot, roll-over, etc.), chemical exposures, harmful dust, heat, light (optical) radiation, electrical hazards, noise, etc. Where such hazards are present, or likely to be present, NCOR will:
• Select, and have each affected employee use, the types of PPE that will protect the employee from the hazards identified in the hazard assessment.
• Communicate equipment selection decisions to each affected employee
• Select PPE that properly fits each affected employee
• Train employees in the use and care of PPE as described elsewhere in this program

NCOR will verify that the workplace hazard assessment has been performed by conducting a written certification. This certification will be dated and signed by the Safety and Health Manager or person conducting the assessment. Whenever there is a change in process or in the workplace that might introduce or change
an exposure or hazard, NCOR will perform an assessment to determine if there
needs to be additional PPE or a change in the PPE provided. These supplemental hazard assessments will also be documented, signed and dated by the person performing the assessment. NCOR will review and update the workplace hazard assessment on an annual basis.

SELECTION OF PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT (PPE): Personal protective equipment (PPE) will be selected on the basis of the hazards to which the workers' are exposed or potentially exposed. All selections will be
made by with input from managers, supervisors and workers.
Personal protective equipment will meet the following standards:
• Eye & Face Protection devices - ANSI Z87.1-1989 "American National Standard Practice for Occupational and Educational Eye and Face Protection"
• Head Protection devices - ANSI Z89.1-1986 "American National Standard for
Personal Protection - Protective Headwear for Industrial Workers"
108
• Foot Protection devices - ANSI Z41-1991 "American National Standard for
Personal Protection - Protective Footwear"
• Hand Protection - No national standard available - Selection will be based on
task performed, conditions present, duration of use, and the hazards and potential hazards identified.
• Electrical Protective equipment - No national standard - Equipment will be tested
electrically before first use and every 6 months thereafter or upon indication that insulating value is suspect. Selected PPE must be fitted to each affected employee, to include fitting, proper donning, doffing, cleaning and maintenance
Payment:
Personal protective equipment (PPE), used to comply with this chapter, shall be provided by NCOR at no cost to employees. Please refer to 29 CFR 1910.132 (h) for exceptions to this payment

Training:
Each employee who is required to use PPE will be trained in the following: • Why PPE is necessary

• When PPE is necessary • What PPE is necessary and any alternative choices of equipment
• How to properly don, doff, adjust, and wear PPE
• The proper care, maintenance, storage, useful life, and disposal of PPE The training will include an opportunity for employees to handle the PPE and
demonstrate that they understand the training and have the ability to use the
PPE properly. Training will be provided by the manager or supervisor of the affected employees. Training will be documented in writing with the documentation including the names of each employee trained, the date(s) of the training, and the subject matter covered.

If an employee, who has been trained, demonstrates a lack of knowledge or behavior which leads the supervisor to believe the employee does not have a proper understanding of the PPE involved, that employee will be retrained. If there are changes in the workplace or processes that change the exposures or
type of PPE to be used, all affected employees will be retrained.

109
NCOR shall verify that each affected employee has received and understood the
required training through a written certification that contains the name of each
employee trained, the date(s) of training, and that identifies the subject of the certification. Per employee penalties for PPE and training violations: OSHA has issued its final
rule allowing OSHA to cite employers on a "per employee basis" for failure to
wear/use required personal protective equipment (PPE). This rule went into effect January 12, 2009, and applies to PPE and training. As a result, an employer who has failed to properly train employees or who has employees not wearing or using PPE may receive a citation per employee.
Care of Personal Protective Equipment: Whenever practical, PPE will be assigned to individual workers for their exclusive use. Employees will be responsible for the PPE equipment assigned to them or
used by them.
PPE will be regularly cleaned, inspected and stored according to instructions given during the training sessions or as directed by supervisors or managers. Defective or damaged PPE shall not be used. Employees are to report any
defective or damaged equipment to their supervisor for repair or replacement.
Personal Protective Equipment: Engineering controls shall be the primary methods used to eliminate or minimize
hazard exposure in the workplace. When such controls are not practical or applicable, personal protective equipment shall be employed to reduce or eliminate personnel exposure to hazards.
Personal protective equipment (PPE) will be provided, used, and maintained when it has been determined that its use is required and that such use will lessen the likelihood of occupational injuries and/or illnesses. The Safety and Health Manager will recommend and/or provide necessary protective equipment where there is a reasonable probability that the use of the equipment will prevent or
reduce the severity of injuries or illness. Equipment Specifications and Requirements- All personal protective clothing and equipment will be of safe design and
construction for the work to be performed. Only those items of protective clothing and equipment that meet National Institute of Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH) or American National Standards Institute (ANSI) standards will be procured or accepted for use.

110
Eye and Face Protection-

The majority of occupational eye injuries can be prevented by the use of suitable/approved safety spectacles, goggles, or shields. Approved eye and face protection shall be worn when there is a reasonable possibility of personal injury. Supervisors, with
assistance from the Safety and Health Manager, determine jobs
and work areas that require eye protection and the type of eye and face protection that will be used. Typical hazards that can cause eye and face injury are:
• Splashes of toxic or corrosive chemicals, hot liquids, and
molten metals; • Flying objects, such as chips of wood, metal, and stone dust; • Fumes, gases, and mists of toxic or corrosive chemicals;
and
• Aerosols of biological substances. Prevention of eye accidents requires that all persons who may be in eye hazard areas wear protective eyewear. This includes
employees, visitors, researchers, contractors, or others passing through an identified eye hazardous area. To provide protection for these personnel, activities shall procure a sufficient quantity of heavy duty goggles and/or plastic eye protectors which afford the maximum amount of protection possible.
If these personnel wear personal glasses, they shall be provided with a suitable eye protector to wear over them. Specifications-
Eye and face protectors procured, issued to, and used by NCOR personnel must conform to the following design and standards: a) Provide adequate protection against the particular
hazards for which they are designed b) Fit properly and offer the least possible resistance to movement and cause minimal discomfort while in use.
c) Be durable. d) Be easily cleaned or disinfected for or by the wearer.
e) Be clearly marked to identify the manufacturer.
111

f) Persons who require corrective lenses for normal
vision, and who are required to wear eye protection, must wear goggles or spectacles of one of the following types:
1) Spectacles with protective lenses which
provide optical correction. 2) Goggles that can be worn over spectacles without disturbing the adjustment of the
spectacles.
3) Goggles that incorporate corrective lenses mounted behind the protective lenses.
Description and Use of Eye/Face Protectors
a) Safety Spectacles. Protective eye glasses are made with safety frames, tempered glass or plastic lenses, temples and side shields which provide eye protection from moderate
impact and particles encountered in job tasks such as carpentry, woodworking, grinding, scaling, etc. b) Single Lens Goggles. Vinyl framed goggles of soft pliable body design provide adequate eye protection from many
hazards. These goggles are available with clear or tinted lenses, perforated, port vented, or non-vented frames. Single lens goggles provide similar protection to spectacles and may be worn in combination with spectacles or
corrective lenses to insure protection along with proper vision. c) Welders/Chippers Goggles. These goggles are available in rigid and soft frames to accommodate single or two eye
piece lenses. Welder’s goggles provide protection from sparking, scaling or splashing metals and harmful light rays. Lenses are impact resistant and are available in graduated shades of
filtration. Chippers/grinders goggles provide eye protection from flying particles. The dual protective eye cups house impact resistant clear lenses with individual cover plates.

112
d) Face Shields. These normally consist of an adjustable
headgear and face shield of tinted/transparent acetate or
polycarbonate materials, or wire screen. Face shields are available in various sizes, tensile strength, impact/heat resistance and light ray filtering capacity. Face shields will be used in operations when the entire face needs protection
and should be worn to protect eyes and face against flying
particles, metal sparks, and chemical/ biological splash. e) Welding Shields. These shield assemblies consist of vulcanized fiber or glass fiber body, a ratchet/button type
adjustable headgear or cap attachment and a filter and cover
plate holder. These shields will be provided to protect workers’ eyes and face from infrared or radiant light burns, flying sparks, metal spatter and slag chips encountered during welding, brazing, soldering, resistance welding, bare
or shielded electric arc welding and oxyacetylene welding
and cutting operations. The Safety and Health Manager maintains a supply of various eye and face protective devices. Personnel requiring prescription safety glasses
must contact the Safety and Health Manager. Emergency Eyewash Facilities- Emergency eyewash facilities meeting the requirements of
ANSI Z358.1-1981 shall be provided in all areas where the eyes of any employee may be exposed to corrosive materials. All such emergency facilities shall be located where they are easily accessible to those in need.
Hearing Protection- Hearing protection devices are the first line of defense against noise in environments where engineering controls have not reduced employee exposure to safe levels. Hearing protective
devices can prevent significant hearing loss, but only if they are used properly. The most popular hearing protection devices are earplugs which are inserted into the ear canal to provide a seal against the canal
walls. Earmuffs enclose the entire external ears inside rigid cups. The inside of the muff cup is lined with acoustic foam and the perimeter of the cup is fitted with a cushion that seals against the head around the ear by the force of the headband.
Preformed earplugs and earmuffs should be washed periodically and stored in a clean area, and foam inserts should be discarded
113
after each use. It is important for you to wash hands before
handling pre-formed earplugs and foam inserts to prevent
contaminants from being placed in the ear which may increase your risk of developing infections. Also, check hearing protective devices for signs of wear or
deterioration.
Replace devices periodically. The Safety and Health Manager maintains a supply of a variety of
disposable foam ear inserts and earmuffs.
Respiratory Protection- Respiratory hazards may occur through exposure to harmful dusts,
fogs, fumes, mists, gases, smoke, sprays, and vapors. The best
means of protecting personnel is through the use of engineering controls, e.g., local exhaust ventilation. Only when engineering controls are not practical or applicable shall respiratory protective equipment be employed to reduce personnel exposure.
The Safety and Health Manager is responsible for the Respiratory Protection Program at NCOR. The Safety and Health Manager conducts respirator training and fit tests and is responsible for determining the proper type of respiratory protection required for
the particular hazard. Adherence to the following guidelines will help ensure the proper and safe use of respiratory equipment:
• Wear only the respirator you have been instructed to use. For example, do not wear a self-containing breathing apparatus if you have been assigned and fitted for a half-mask respirator. • Wear the correct respirator for the particular hazard. For
example, some situations, such as chemical spills or other emergencies, may require a higher level of protection than your respirator can handle. Also, the proper cartridge must be matched to the hazard (a cartridge designed for dusts and mists will not provide protection from vapors)
• Check the respirator for a good fit before each use. Positive and negative fit checks should be conducted. • Check the respirator for deterioration before and after use. Do not use a defective respirator.
114
• Recognize indications that cartridges and canisters are at
their end of service. If in doubt, change the cartridges or
canisters before using the respirator. • Practice moving and working while wearing the respirator so that you can get used to it. • Clean the respirator after each use, thoroughly dry it and
place the cleaned respirator in a sealable plastic bag.
• Store respirators carefully in a protected location away from excessive heat, light, and chemicals. Head Protection-

Hats and caps have been designed and manufactured to provide workers protection from impact, heat, electrical and fire hazards. These protectors consist of the shell and the suspension combined as a protective system. Safety hats and caps will be of
nonconductive, fire and water resistant materials. Bump caps or
skull guards are constructed of lightweight materials and are designed to provide minimal protection against hazards when working in congested areas.
Head protection will be furnished to, and used by, all employees and contractors engaged in construction and other miscellaneous work in head-hazard areas. Head protection will also be required to be worn by engineers, inspectors, and visitors at construction sites. Bump caps/skull guards will be issued to and worn for protection
against scalp lacerations from contact with sharp objects. They will not be worn as substitutes for safety caps/hats because they do not afford protection from high impact forces or penetration by falling objects.
Hand Protection- Skin contact is a potential source of exposure to toxic materials; it is important that the proper steps be taken to prevent such contact. Gloves should be selected on the basis of the material being
handled, the particular hazard involved, and their suitability for the operation being conducted. One type of glove will not work in all situations. Most accidents involving hands and arms can be classified under
four main hazard categories: chemicals, abrasions, cutting, and heat. There are gloves available that can protect workers from any of these individual hazards or any combination thereof. The first consideration in the selection of gloves for use against
chemicals is to determine, if possible, the exact nature of the substances to be encountered. Read instructions and warnings on
115
chemical container labels and MSDSs before working with any
chemical. Recommended glove types are often listed in the section
for personal protective equipment. All glove materials are eventually permeated by chemicals. However, they can be used safely for limited time periods if specific
use and glove characteristics (i.e., thickness and permeation rate
and time) are known. The Safety and Health Manager can assist is determining the specific type of glove material that should be worn for a particular chemical.
Gloves should be replaced periodically, depending on frequency of
use and permeability to the substance(s) handled. Gloves overtly contaminated should be rinsed and then carefully removed after use.
Gloves should also be worn whenever it is necessary to handle
rough or sharp-edged objects, and very hot or very cold materials. The type of glove materials to be used (in these situations) include leather, welder’s gloves, aluminum-backed gloves, and other types of insulated glove materials.
Careful attention must be given to protecting your hands when working with tools and machinery. Power tools and machinery must have guards installed or incorporated into their design that prevent the hands from contacting the point of operation, power train, or
other moving parts. To protect the hands from injury due to contact with moving parts, it is important to: • Ensure that guards are always in place and used. • Always lock out machines or tools and disconnect the
power before making repairs. • Treat a machine without a guard as inoperative; and • Do not wear gloves around moving machinery, such as drill presses, mills, lathes, and grinders.
The Safety and Health Manager can help the supervisor identify appropriate glove selections for their operations. The Safety and Health Manager also maintains a selection of gloves for various tasks.
Safety Shoes- Safety shoes shall be worn in the shops, warehouses, maintenance, cagewash, glassware, and other areas as determined by the Health and Safety Branch. Recommendations
for safety footwear shall be approved by the Health and Safety Branch. All safety footwear shall comply with American National
116
Standards Institute (ANSI) Standard ANSI Z41-1991, "American
National Standard for Personal Protection - Protective Footwear.
Protective footwear purchased before July 5, 1994, shall comply with ANSI Standard Z41.1-1967. Permanent full time employees will be initially issued two pairs of
safety shoes of approved type. Shoes will be replaced or repaired
as necessary based on supervisory approval. Other than permanent employees will be issued one pair of safety shoes with replacement as necessary based on supervisory approval.
Responsibilities-
a. Supervisor - Reviews employees work situation and recommends safety footwear as appropriate in accordance with established Institute policy. Requests safety shoes from the
Safety and Health manager for new employees or as indicated
for replacement. Ensures that all employees under his supervision use and maintain safety footwear. Makes determination on the need for replacement or repair of safety shoes.
b. Employee - Wears Institute provided or approved safety shoes in all areas requiring safety footwear as determined by the supervisor and the Health and Safety Manager.
c. Health and Safety Manager - Consults with supervisors concerning safety shoe requirements and approves issuance of all safety shoes. Arranges for local purchase of all safety shoes. Makes arrangements for necessary repairs.
Safety Shoes- Procedures- a. Supervisors must review employee's work situation in
consultation with the Health and Safety Manager to decide the need for safety footwear and appropriate types. The "Request for Safety Shoes" must be completed, reviewed and signed by the supervisor and approved by the Health and Safety Manager.
b. Any employee desiring to replace his/her safety footwear must complete the "Request for Safety Shoes" and have it signed by their supervisor.

117
c. If an employee is unable to find appropriate safety footwear at
the designated vendors, he or she should check with the Health
and Safety Manager for alternate procedures. Alternate procedures involve employees purchasing safety footwear with their own funds and being reimbursed.
d. Employees who want to have their footwear repaired, should be
encouraged to do so. Some footwear is designed to be repaired, and some is not. Repairs would include such items as new soles and heels. NCOR will reimburse employees for repairs.
Hearing Personal Protective Equipment
Hearing protective devices (ear plugs, muffs, etc.) shall be the permanent solution only when engineering or administrative controls are considered to be infeasible or cost prohibitive. Hearing protective devices are defined
as any device that can be worn to reduce the level of sound entering the
ear. Hearing protective devices shall be worn by all personnel when they must enter or work in an area where the operations generate noise levels of:
•Greater than 80 dBA sound levels, or •120 dB peak sound pressure level or greater Types of Hearing Protective Devices Hearing protective devices include
the following: a. Insert Type Earplugs A device designed to provide an air-tight seal with the ear canal. There are three types of insert earplugs – premolded, formable,
and custom earplugs. 1. Premolded Earplugs Premolded earplugs are pliable devices of fixed proportions. Two standard styles, single flange and triple flange, come in various sizes, and will fit most
people. Personnel responsible for fitting and dispensing earplugs will train users on proper insertion, wear, and care. While premolded earplugs are reusable, they may deteriorate and should be replaced periodically.
2. Formable Formable earplugs come in just one size. Some are made of material which, after being compressed and inserted, expands to form a seal in the ear canal. When properly inserted, they provide noise
attenuation values that are similar to those from correctly fitted premolded earplugs. Individual units
118
may procure approved formable earplugs.
Supervisors must instruct users in the proper use of
these earplugs as part of the annual education program. Each earplug must be held in place while it expands enough to remain firmly seated. A set of earplugs with a cord attached is available. These
earplugs may be washed and therefore are reusable,
but will have to be replaced after two or three weeks or when they no longer form an airtight seal when properly inserted. 3.Custom Molded Earplugs
A small percentage of the population cannot be fitted
with standard premolded or formable earplugs. Custom earplugs can be made to fit the exact size and shape of the individual’s ear canal. Individuals needing custom earplugs will be referred to an
audiologist.
b. Earmuffs Earmuffs are devices worn around the ear to reduce the level of noise that reaches the ear. Their effectiveness depends on an air
tight seal between the cushion and the head. Selection of Hearing Protective Devices
Employees will be given the opportunity to select hearing protective devices from a variety of suitable ones provided by the Office of Health and Safety. In all cases the chosen hearing protectors shall have a Noise Reduction Ratio (NRR) high enough to reduce the noise at the ear drum to 80 dBA or lower.
Issuance of Hearing Protective Devices The issuance of hearing protective devices is handled through the Safety and Health Manager. The Safety and Health Manager will issue and fit the
initial hearing protective devices (foam inserts, disposables). Instruction on the proper use and care of earplugs and earmuffs will be provided whenever HPDs (hearing protective devices) are dispensed. Personnel requiring earmuffs in addition to earplugs will be informed of this requirement and educated on the importance of using proper hearing
protection. The Safety and Health Manager will dispense ear muffs when necessary and will maintain a supply of disposable earplugs. Use of Hearing Protective Devices
a. Always use and maintain HPDs as originally intended and in accordance with
119
instructions provided.
b. Earmuff performance may be degraded by anything that compromises
the cushion-to-circumaural flesh seal. This includes other pieces of personal protective equipment such as eyewear, masks, faceshields, and helmets.
Maintenance of Hearing Protective Devices
a. Reusable earplugs, such as the triple flange or formable devices should be washed in lukewarm water using hand soap, rinsed in clean water, and dried thoroughly before use. Wet or damp earplugs should
not be placed in their containers. Cleaning should be done as needed.
b. Earmuff cushions should be kept clean. The plastic or foam cushions may be cleaned in the same way as earplugs, but the inside of the muff should not get wet. When not n use, ear muffs should be placed in open air to allow moisture that may have been absorbed into the
cups to evaporate.
Hearing Protection Performance Information The maximum of sound attenuation one gets when wearing hearing
protection devices is limited by human body and bone conduction mechanisms. Even though a particular device may provide outstanding values of noise attenuation the actual noise reductions may be less because of the noise surrounding the head and body bypasses the hearing protector and is transmitted through tissue and bone pathways to
the inner ear. The term “double hearing protection” is misleading. The attenuation provided from any combination earplug and earmuff is not equal to the sum of their individual attenuation values.
PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT
120
HAZARD ASSESSMENT FORM

Date of Hazard Assessment: _____________________________ Person Performing Hazard Assessment: ______________________
____Location Job Task/Position __ Hazards PPE Required
(EXAMPLE ) (Molding Dept). (Press Operator) (Flying particles) (Safety Glasses)
CERTIFICATION OF HAZARD ASSESSMENT I certify that a hazard assessment of the workplace was performed at our facility
located at ____________________. This assessment consisted of a review of prior injury and illness records and a walk-through inspection of all work areas. The purpose of this assessment was to identify sources of hazards to employees that are present, or are likely to be present, in the workplace which necessitate the use of personal protective equipment (PPE).
Workplace Evaluated:
(Insert address of the facility and a listing of all departments or areas of the
facility that were inspected.)
Person Certifying Hazard Assessment: Name: _______________________________ Title: ______________________
Date(s) of Hazard Assessment: _____________________________ Attachments: Hazard Assessment Forms

121
25.8 Emergency Medical Treatment

All personnel must be provided with concise, clear directions and transportation to local emergency medical treatment services. The name, location and map outlining the direction to the nearest hospital must be posted on-site.
122

25.8.1.First Aid Procedures- First Aid, Medical Treatment and CPR
Prompt medical attention will be provided to anyone regardless of the extent of an injury or illness!
In the absence of an infirmary, clinic, hospital, or physician, that is reasonably
accessible in terms of time and distance to the worksite (within 3-4 minutes of the worksite), which is available for the treatment of injured employees, a person who has a valid certificate in first-aid training from the U.S. Bureau of Mines, the American Red Cross, or equivalent training that can be verified by documentary
evidence, shall be available at the worksite to render first aid. The Foreman
has valid certificates in first aid training, and shall be contacted to render first aid, as necessary. NCOR provides a First Aid Kit on the premises. It is there for employee’s use in the
treatment of minor scratches, burns, headaches, nausea, etc. All employees shall
know the location of the First Aid Kit and shall notify their supervisor if they need to use the First Aid Kit. If an employee has a work related injury or illness that requires professional medical
assistance, they shall notify their supervisor and let him/her know before they receive this assistance. If they fail to notify their supervisor, they may be ineligible for Worker’s Compensation benefits to pay for doctor’s bills, and/or lost wages.
The Safety and Health Manager shall inspect First Aid Kits before the kits are sent
out to each job, and on a weekly basis to ensure that they are filled and complete.
The contents of the first aid kit shall be placed in a weatherproof container with individual sealed packages for each type of item. The Safety and Health Manager shall ensure that expended items are replaced.
Each First Aid Kit shall have the minimum Fill Requirements:
Qty Item Size
1 Absorbent Compress 32 sq. in. (81.3 sq. cm)
1 Adhesive Bandages 1” x 3” (2.5 x 7.5 cm)
1 Adhesive Tape 5 yd. (457.2 cm)
10 Antiseptic 0.5 g (0.14 fl. oz)
6 Burn Treatment 0.5 g (0.14 fl. oz)
2 Medical Exam Gloves Pair
4 Sterile Pad 3" x 3" (7.5 x 7.5 cm)
1 Triangular Bandage 40" x 40" x 56" (101 x 101 x 142 cm)
Note: In addition to the above minimum contents, a kit should have optional items
added, based upon specific workplace hazards. The selection of additional supplies should be made by consulting with a health care professional or a
123
person competent in first aid who is knowledgeable of the hazards found in that
specific workplace. The optional items shall meet specifications stated in Section
5.3 of ANSI Z308.1-1998. Prompt medical attention will be provided to anyone regardless of the extent of an injury or illness!
Emergency Medical Treatment
Proper equipment for prompt transportation of the injured person to a physician or hospital, or a communication system for contacting necessary ambulance service, shall be provided.
If an employee sustains a severe injury requiring emergency treatment:

• Call for help and seek assistance from a co-worker.
• Use the emergency telephone numbers and instructions posted next to the
telephone in your work area to request assistance and transportation to the
local hospital emergency room.
• Provide details for the completion of the accident investigation report.
FIRST AID PROCEDURES AND INSTRUCTIONS – Call 911 In all cases requiring emergency medical treatment, immediately call, or have a co-worker call, to request emergency medical assistance. Where 911 is not available, call the below: 911 is available in all our work areas. EMERGENCY PHONE NUMBERS FOR ALL DIVISIONS
AGR Safety and Health Manager: Plant Manager
Poison Control: 911
First Aid: 911
Fire Department: 911
Ambulance: 911
Police: 911
Medical Clinic: Maxton Medical Center
Clinic Address: 610 Martin Luther King Hwy #1800 Maxton, NC 28364

NCOR Safety and Health Manager: Fred Mussari
Poison Control: 911
124

First Aid: 911
Fire Department: 911
Ambulance: 911
Police: 911
Medical Clinic: Same as Above
Clinic Address: Same as Above

Minor First Aid Treatment
First aid kits are stored in the dozer. If an employee sustains an injury or are
involved in an accident requiring minor first aid treatment, they shall:
• Inform their supervisor.
• Administer first aid treatment to the injury or wound.
• If a first aid kit is used, indicate usage on the accident investigation report.
• Access to a first aid kit is not intended to be a substitute for medical attention.
• Provide details for the completion of the accident investigation report.
Non-Emergency Medical Treatment
For non-emergency work-related injuries requiring professional medical assistance, management must first authorize treatment. If an employee sustains an injury requiring treatment other than first aid, they shall:

• Inform their supervisor.
• Proceed to the posted medical facility. The supervisor will assist with
transportation, if necessary.
• Provide details for the completion of the accident investigation report. Smurfit-Stone Container Enterprises shall be used in the event an employee
(Quick Drenching/ Flushing Facility) accidentally spills or splashes injurious chemicals or liquids on their clothing or body. Employees shall notify their supervisor if they use the Quick Drenching/Flushing Facility. First Aid Training
Each employee will receive training and instructions from his or her supervisor on the following NCOR first aid procedures.

125
First Aid Procedures
WOUNDS: Minor: Cuts, lacerations, abrasions, or punctures-
• Wash the wound using soap and water; rinse it well.
• Cover the wound using clean dressing. Major: Large, deep and bleeding
• Stop the bleeding by pressing directly on the wound, using a bandage or
cloth.
• Keep pressure on the wound until medical help arrives. BROKEN BONES:
• Do not move the victim unless it is absolutely necessary.
• If the victim must be moved, "splint" the injured area. Use a board, cardboard, or rolled newspaper as a splint.

BURNS: Thermal (Heat) Rinse the burned area, without scrubbing it, and immerse it in cold water; do not use ice water.
Blot dry the area and cover it using sterile gauze or a clean cloth.
Chemical Flush the exposed area with cool water immediately for 15 to 20 minutes.
EYE INJURY:
Small particles Do not rub your eyes. Use the corner of a soft clean cloth to draw particles out, or hold the eyelids open and flush the eyes continuously with water.
Large or stuck particles
If a particle is stuck in the eye, do not attempt to remove it. Cover both eyes with bandage. Chemical Immediately irrigate the eyes and under the eyelids, with water, for 30
minutes.
NECK AND SPINE INJURY: If the victim appears to have injured his or her neck or spine, or is unable to move his or her arm or leg, do not attempt to move the victim unless it is
absolutely necessary.
HEAT EXHAUSTION: Loosen the victim's tight clothing. Give the victim "sips" of cool water.
Make the victim lie down in a cooler place with the feet raised.
CORROSIVE MATERIALS:
126

Where the eyes or body of any person may be exposed to injurious corrosive materials, suitable facilities for quick drenching or flushing of the eyes and body shall be provided within the work area for immediate emergency use. This area is located: _ We keep portable eye wash in our shed by the ash pond and in the manager’s site truck._

CPR (Cardio Pulmonary Resuscitation)
Alternative names: Rescue breathing, chest compressions - for adults;
resuscitation, cardiopulmonary - for adults Definition: CPR is a combination of rescue breathing (which provides oxygen to the victim's lungs) and chest compressions (which keep the victim's heart
circulating oxygenated blood).
Considerations: CPR can be lifesaving, but it is best performed by those who have been trained in a CPR course. The procedures described here are not a substitute for CPR training.

Time is very important when dealing with an unconscious who is not breathing. Death can occur in 8 to 10 minutes and brain death begins after 4 to 6 minutes without oxygen.
Causes: Cardiopulmonary arrest is a combination of 2 life-threatening conditions:
absence of breathing and no heartbeat. Symptoms:
• No Breathing
• No pulse
• Unconsciousness

DO NOT:
• DO NOT give chest compressions if there is a heartbeat; doing so may cause the heart to stop beating.
• DO NOT move the victim's head or neck to check for breathing if a spinal injury is suspected. Call immediately for emergency medical assistance if:
• you are not alone, have one person call the local emergency number while another person begins CPR.
• you are alone, shout for help and administer CPR.
FIRST AID: 1. Check for consciousness. Shake or tap the victim gently. See if the victim moves or makes a noise. Shout, "Are you OK?"
127

2. If there is no response, shout for help.
3. Position the victim on his or her back on a hard surface, keeping the back in a straight line, supporting the head and neck. Unfasten the victim's clothing if necessary to gain access to the victim's chest.

4. Kneel next to the victim's chin. Tilt the head back and lift the jaw forward to move the tongue away from the windpipe. If a spinal injury suspected, pull the jaw forward without moving the head or neck. Don't let the victim's mouth close.
5. Place your ear close to the victim's mouth and watch for chest movement. For
5 seconds, look, listen, and feel for breathing. 6. If the victim is not breathing, begin rescue breathing. Maintain the head position, close the victim's nostrils by pinching them with your thumb and index
finger, and cover the victim's mouth tightly with your mouth. Give 2 slow, full
breaths, with a pause in between. 7. If the chest does not rise, reposition the head and give 2 more breaths. If the chest still doesn't rise, the victim's airway is blocked. Follow instructions for
chocking
Chocking Symptoms:
• unconscious
• lack of breathing
• inability to move air into the lungs with mouth-to-mouth resuscitation DO NOT:
• DO NOT try to grasp an object that is lodged in the victim's throat. This might push it farther down the airway. If the object is visible in the mouth, it may be removed.
• DO NOT begin the chest compressions of CPR (if heartbeat has stopped) until the
airway is cleared.
FIRST AID: 1. Roll the victim onto their back on a hard surface, keeping their back in a straight line, firmly supporting their head and neck. Expose the victim's chest.
2. Open the victim's mouth with your thumb and index finger, placing your thumb over his tongue and your index finger under his chin. If the object is visible and loose, remove it. 3. Lift the victim's chin while tilting the head back to move the tongue away from the windpipe. If a spinal injury is suspected, pull the jaw forward without moving the head or
neck. Don't let the mouth close. 4. If the victim is not breathing, begin rescue breathing. Maintain the head position, close the victim's nostrils by pinching them with your thumb and index finger, and cover the
128
victim's mouth tightly with your mouth. Give 2 slow, full breaths, with a pause in between. 5. If the victim's chest does not rise, reposition the head and give 2 more breaths.

6. If the victim's chest still doesn't rise, begin abdominal thrusts, as follows. Kneel at the victim's feet or astride the thighs (or to the side if the victim is obese or pregnant). Place the heel of your hand in the middle of the abdomen just above the navel, well below the tip of their breastbone. (If the victim is obese or pregnant, place the heel of your hand in the
middle of the victim's breastbone. Do not place your hand on the ribs or on the tip of the
breastbone.) Place your other hand on top of the first hand. 7. Give 6 to 10 quick thrusts compressing the victim's chest about 2 inches, pressing your hands inward and upward. Do not press to either side. Each thrust is a separate attempt to
clear the victim's airway by forcing air out through the windpipe.
8. Open the victim's mouth with your thumb and index finger. If the object is visible and loose, remove it. Observe the victim's breathing. If the infant stops breathing, begin CPR.
9. If the object is not dislodged, give 2 breaths, 6 to 10 abdominal thrusts, and then check
for the object. Repeat this sequence until the object is dislodged or help arrives.

8. If the victim's chest does rise, place 2 fingers on the victim's Adam's apple. Slide your fingers into the groove between the Adam's apple and the muscle on the side of their neck to feel for a pulse for 5 to 10 seconds.
9. If the victim has a pulse, give 1 breath every 5 seconds. Check the pulse after every 12 breaths. 10. Be sure the local emergency number has been called. Have someone else make the call if possible. Continue giving breaths
and checking the pulse. 11. If the victim has no pulse, begin chest compressions. Maintain the head position and place the heel of your hand 2 finger-widths above the lowest notch of the victim's breastbone (where the lower
edge of the ribcage meets in the middle). Place the heel of your other hand directly over the heel of the first hand. Interlock your fingers; don't let them touch the victim's chest. Lock your elbows straight. Lean your shoulders over your hands, and firmly press down about 2 inches into the victim's chest. Repeat the
compressions 30 times. Give the compressions in a smooth, rhythmic manner, keeping your hands on the victim's chest. Don't rock back and forth - push straight down. Don't pause between compressions.
12. Give the victim 2 breaths, followed by 30 chest compressions. Repeat this sequence 4 times. Count aloud as you pump in a
129
regular rhythm. You should pump at a rate of about 80 to 100 times
a minute. Count 1 and 2 and 3 and 4 and...15 and (breathe,
breathe). 13. Recheck the victim's pulse for 5 to 10 seconds.
14. Repeat steps 12 and 13 until the victim's pulse resumes or help
arrives. If the pulse resumes, go to step 9. 15. Once pulse and respiration resume, roll the person onto his side taking care to move the body as a whole unit. This is called the
recovery position, but it should not be used if you suspect there
might be a neck or spinal injury. Stay by the person until help arrives. Prevention:
Be prepared and use good judgment.
130

131

25.9 Fire Emergency Actions
Portable fire extinguishers will be located at the site and on each piece of mobile heavy construction equipment. The following procedures apply to fire emergencies on-site:

1. Attempt to extinguish the fire by discharging the contents of portable fire extinguishers in the area. 2. If unable to extinguish the fire, sound the general site evacuation alarm and evacuate the site.
3. Notify off-site fire emergency responders and provide detailed
information on the fire emergency conditions. 4. The Project Manager will interface with the fire department upon arrival and provide technical assistance.

25.10 Miscellaneous Small Spills Oil is used as a lubricant for heavy construction equipment that will be located on-site during excavation activities. A portable diesel fuel tank (approximately
500 gallons) will be used to fuel heavy construction equipment on-site. The possibility exists that spilled oil or diesel fuel could contaminate previously uncontaminated soils. This potential is lessened by training operators and technicians in good housekeeping, providing spill control materials, and limiting the amount of oil present in the work area. Oil will be collected in the work area
in appropriate containers for recycling. The portable diesel tank will be provided with secondary containment to control spillage and a portable fire extinguisher to extinguish incipient stage fires caused in the area. 25.11 General Site Evacuation
A general site evacuation will be ordered in the event of a fire, explosion, spill or toxic vapor release where on-site personnel are unable to control the emergency condition.
25.11.1 Safe Distance and Places of Refuge The on-site assembly point will be located at a pre-determined location where site personnel are accounted for and emergency services are contacted. The Project Manager will evaluate the emergency situation based on the hazards
posed to site personnel remaining at the on-site assembly point, and then determine the need and location of further off-site evacuation and assembly points. 25.11.2 Evacuation Routes and Procedures

132
Evacuation routes will be designated that direct evacuation from the worksite in
an upwind direction. A windsock will be erected in a prominent location on-site
so a visual determination of upwind direction may be made by personnel evacuating the site. In cases of uncontrollable emergencies such as fire, explosion or toxic vapor release, a site evacuation shall be implemented as follows:

1. Stop work activities and evacuate the work site in an upwind direction. 2. Assemble in the pre-determined gathering spot and account for personnel.
3. Contact off-site emergency response services.
133
26.0 DISCIPLINARY POLICY

NCOR
DISCIPLINARY POLICY
EFFECTIVE JANUARY 3, 2019
PROPERTY DAMAGE, UTILITY DAMAGE, EQUIPMENT DAMAGE: For all property damage, utility damage, etc., that is deemed to be a result of any NCOR
employee's actions, the responsible employee shall receive a minimum of a written warning, a drug screen, and shall not be allowed to return to work until the office receives the results of the drug screen. Depending on the severity and employee’s prior record, the employee may
be subject to a suspension or termination.
EMPLOYEE NEGLIGENCE:
Any property damage, utility damage, etc., that is caused by a NCOR employee due to
negligence, the responsible employee will receive a minimum of a written warning, a drug
screen, and a suspension without pay. The responsible employee will also be required to
pay for any repair costs for the damaged caused by the employee’s negligence. Payments
will be made by payroll deduction until the repair is paid in full. Depending on the severity and
the employee's prior record the employee may be subject to a longer suspension or termination.

VIOLATION OF SEATBELT POLICY:
Employees caught not wearing a seatbelt while operating mobile equipment (including company
trucks) will receive a minimum of a written warning, and suspension without pay. Depending
on employee's prior record the employee may receive suspension or termination.

USE OF PERSONAL CELL PHONES:
If an employee is discovered making personal calls during company time he/she will at a
minimum receive a write up. If he/she is operating a piece of equipment while on the phone,
he/she will receive a minimum of a written warning and suspension without pay. Depending
on the employee's prior record the employee may receive a written warning, suspension or
termination.

ACCIDENT PREVENTION POLICY: Supervisors are knowledgeable and aware of site specific safety programs. Site manager issues and implements written warning documents to employees observed or reported for unsafe acts or
site specific job site safety violations. These documents are inserted in employee personnel folders. Any continued unsafe practices by specific employees result in employee termination.

Foreman at the job sites are responsible for the enforcement of this policy. If foremen require
disciplinary action, the Operations Manager is responsible for the enforcement.

Please sign below that you have read and understand this policy.

Employee Name______________________________ Signature________________________
Date Signed_________________________________
134
NCOR 13602 FM 969 Austin, Texas 78724 [phone] DRUG & ALCOHOL POLICY
Purpose of Policy
The purpose of this policy is to develop a drug and alcohol-free workplace, which will help insure a safe and productive workplace. This policy is also to identify and remove the adverse affects of alcohol and drugs on job performance and to protect the health and safety of our employees by providing education and treatment. Use and misuse of alcohol or drugs can and does impair the ability of an employee to perform his/her duties and may endanger the employee, his/her coworkers and the public as well as property. NCOR (NCOR) seeks to prevent the use/abuse/misuse of drugs and alcohol by employees in any way, which impairs their ability to perform their duties. In order to further this objective, the following rules regarding alcohol and illegal drugs in the workplace have been established.
Policy
Alcoholism and other drug addictions are recognized as diseases responsive to proper treatment, and this will be an option as long as the employee cooperates. Employees assistance program (EAP) will be made available to assist employees. The manufacture, distribution, dispensing, possession, sale, purchase or use of controlled substance on company property is prohibited.
135
Being under the influence of alcohol or illegal drugs on company property is prohibited. The unauthorized use or possession of prescription drugs on over-the-counter drugs on company property is prohibited. Employees who violate this policy are subject to appropriate disciplinary action, including termination. This policy applies to all employees of NCOR regardless of rank or position, and includes temporary and part-time employees.
Definitions
1. Company Premises – All company property or customer property including vehicles, lockers and parking lots. 2. Company Property – All company or customer owned or leased property used by employees such as vehicles, lockers, desks, closets, etc. 3. Controlled Substances – Any substance listed in Schedule I-V of Section 202 of the Controlled Substance Act (211 U.S.C. S812), as amended. Copies are maintained for employee review by the IH Supervisor. 4. Drug – A drug is any chemical substance that produces a physical, mental, emotional or behavioral change in the user. 5. Drug Paraphernalia – Equipment, a product or material that is used or intended for use in concealing an illegal drug or for use in injective, ingesting, inhaling or otherwise introducing into the human body an illegal drug or controlled substance. 6. Fitness for Duty – To work in a manner suitable for the job. To determine “fitness” a medical evaluation may include drug and/or alcohol testing. 7. Illegal Drug – An illegal drug is any drug or derivative thereof which the use, possession, sale, transfer, attempted sale or transfer, manufacture or storage of is illegal or regulated under any federal, state or local law or regulation and any other drug including, but not limited, to a prescription drug, used for any reason other than a legitimate medical reason and inhalants used illegally, included is marijuana or cannabis in all forms. 8. Reasonable Cause/Reasonable Suspicion – Supported by evidence strong enough to establish that a policy violation has occurred. 9. Testing – Is generally defined as a urine or breath test to determine chemical or drug content. Any employee may be tested for drug or alcohol use when there is a “reasonable cause/reasonable suspicion “that: a. Use of a substance is affecting performance, or
136
b. The employee is engaged in any of the prohibited acts or activities listed in this policy. 10. Under the Influence – A state of having an alcohol concentration of 0.10 or more, where “alcohol concentration” has the meaning assigned to it in Article 67011-1, Revised Statues; or the state of not having the normal use of mental or physical faculties resulting from the voluntary introduction into the body of an alcoholic beverage or controlled substance. General Policy Provisions Any of the following actions constitutes a violation of the Policy and may subject an employee to disciplinary action to include immediate termination: 1. Using, selling, purchasing, transferring, possessing, manufacturing or storing an illegal drug, or drug paraphernalia, or attempting, or assisting another to do so while in the course of employment, or engaged in a company sponsored activity on premises, in owned, leased or rented vehicles, or on business. 2. Working or reporting to work, conducting company business, or going on company premises’ or in a company-owned, leased, or rented vehicle while under the influence of an illegal drug, alcohol, or in an implemented condition.
Search
Search procedures, conducted under reasonable cause, such as inspection of an employee’s personal property, including briefcases, lunch boxes, or tool boxes, will be maintained as part of the company’s security measures. All employees will be expected to cooperate as a condition of continued employment with special drug/alcohol searches of personal vehicles on company property, purses, clothing, briefcases, or other employee personal property when there is reasonable suspicion to believe that an employee may be in possession of drugs or alcohol. Searches on company premises and company property can be conducted at any time.
Preventative Acts
Employees taking drugs prescribed by an attending physician must advise their supervisor in writing of the possible effects of such medication regarding their job performance and physical/mental capabilities. This written information must be kept confidential and communicated to the direct supervisor prior to the employee commencing work. All medical information will be kept confidential
137
and the employer, without exception, will punish any breach of privacy and confidentiality in this regard. All prescription drugs must be kept in their original container. Any employee involved in a work-related accident where alcohol or drugs are believed to be a contributing factor will be referred to an employee assistance counselor in addition to any other accident investigation activities.
Corrective Act
Any employee involved in a work-related accident may be subject to urine and breathe testing for drug or alcohol use or abuse.
Coordination with Law Enforcement Agencies
The sale, use, purchase, transfer or possession of an illegal drug or drug paraphernalia is a violation of the law. The company will report information concerning possession, distribution or sale of any illegal drugs to law enforcement officials, any such substances found during a search of an individual property. Searches will only be conducted of individuals based on a reasonable cause; and only of their vehicles, lockers, desks or closets when based on reasonable suspicion. NCOR will cooperate fully in the prosecution and/or conviction of any violation of the law.
Reservation of Rights
NCOR reserves the right to interpret, change, suspend, cancel or dispute with or without notice, all or any part of the Policy or procedures or benefits discussed herein. Employees will be notified before implementation of any change. Although adherence to this Policy is considered a condition of continued employment, nothing in this Policy alters an employee’s status and shall not constitute nor be deemed a contract or promise of employment. Employees remain free to resign their employment any time for any or no reason, without notice, and the company retains the right to terminate any employee at any time, for any or no reason, without notice.
Other Laws and Regulations
The provisions of this Policy shall apply in addition to, and shall be subordinated to, any requirements imposed by applicable federal,
138
state or local laws, regulations or judicial decisions. Unenforceable provisions of this Policy shall be deemed to be deleted.
139
APPENDIX A: HAZCOM (detailed procedures)
Purpose: This Hazard Communication requires NCOR to provide information about the hazardous chemicals that employees will be exposed to, chemical product labels
and other forms of warning, safety data sheets related to the chemicals,
appropriate training, and a written hazard communication program. NCOR will develop, implement, and maintain at each workplace, a written hazard communication program which at least describes how labels and other forms of warning, safety data sheets, and employee information and training will be met.
The Safety and Health Manager has the specific responsibility for implementing
the plan. Supervisors of employees have the responsibility to insure the Safety Plan is carried out. The Safety and Health Manager is also responsible for providing consultation and specific training when needed.
Supervisors who have employees who work in areas where hazardous chemicals
are stored, handled or used are responsible for:
(5) creating and maintaining an inventory of all hazardous chemicals; (6) ensuring proper labeling of all hazardous chemicals; (7) acquiring and maintaining safety data sheets for all hazardous
chemicals located in the work area;
(8) informing employees of (iii) any operations in their work area where hazardous chemicals are present, and (iv) the location and availability of the written hazard
communication program, the chemical inventory, and safety
data sheets; and training employees about hazardous chemicals used in the work area. Procedures:
Hazardous Chemicals Inventory- Supervisor(s), or his/her designee, is required to maintain a list of all hazardous chemicals known to be present in each work area (e.g. shop area, section, etc.) and to update the list as necessary. This inventory list must identify each
hazardous chemical by the primary name on the label AND the manufacturer or distributor of the chemical. The inventory list must be kept in the work area and accessible to anyone requesting it. A suggestion is in a 3 ring binder, with the cover clearly labeled "HAZARDOUS CHEMICALS.
This inventory shall list all hazardous chemicals found in the work area. This is to include: (1) laboratory chemicals (2) janitorial supplies (3) compressed gases
(4) cleaning products
140
(5) materials found in the maintenance departments (such as lubricating
oils, solvents, etc.)
(6) specialty chemicals used by ANYONE! Labeling Requirements:
Supervisors must ensure that all hazardous chemicals in his/her area of
responsibility are properly labeled. Labels should list at least the chemical identity, appropriate hazard warnings and the name and address of the manufacturer, importer or other responsible party. Portable containers of working solutions must be labeled appropriately unless they are intended for immediate
use by the employee who prepares it. The contents of all vessels (containing
chemicals or products such as cleaning solutions) must be identified by name on the container. Chemicals that are manufactured by NCOR and distributed outside of the work
center that it was manufactured in, will be labeled in accordance with the OSHA
Hazard Communication Standard [29 CFR Part 1910.1200(f)(1-5)] if they contain hazardous chemicals in concentrations greater than one percent (or 0.1% for carcinogens). It is the responsibility of NCOR laboratory or manufacturing entity synthesizing the product to develop this label.

Chemicals stored in bulk quantities, pipelines, and storage tanks are required to be adequately labeled. Storage tanks or drums can be labeled collectively rather than labeling individual containers if they are not removed from the labeled area and if the hazards are the same. It is the responsibility of NCOR laboratory or
manufacturing entity synthesizing the product to develop this label.
NCOR shall not remove or deface existing labels on incoming containers of hazardous chemicals, unless the container is immediately marked with the required information.
NCOR shall ensure that labels or other forms of warning are legible, in English, and prominently displayed on the container, or readily available in the work area throughout each work shift. NCOR, if it has employees who speak other languages, will add the information in their language to the material presented, as long as the information is presented in English as well.
Safety Data Sheets (MSDS):
Supervisors are responsible for acquiring and updating safety data sheets for all hazardous chemicals found in their work area. The safety data sheets should be reviewed (before using the chemical), maintained and kept in the work area so
that they are readily accessible to all. To obtain specific safety data sheets, the supervisor shall procure them from the Safety and Health Manager.
141
Only the most current MSDS for a hazardous chemical from the same
manufacturer will be kept on file. All Supervisors will check the date of all
MSDS’s and use the most current one for each chemical, while discarding all other out of date MSDS’s. To obtain further information or assistance in interpreting Safety Data Sheets, contact the Safety and Health Manager.
A Safety Data Sheet must be developed and sent with those products that are
synthesized by NCOR, and distributed outside of the Centers in accordance with the OSHA Hazard Communication Standard [29 CFR Part 1910.1200(f)(1-5)] if they contain hazardous chemicals in concentrations greater than one percent (or 0.1% for carcinogens). It is the responsibility of NCOR laboratory synthesizing
the product to develop and distribute the Safety Data Sheet.
Employee Training and Information: A. Training

It is the responsibility of Supervisors to recognize when training is needed for his/her employees and to arrange for such training. Supervisors are not responsible to provide any training (in the sense that he must develop and present the training program) but rather must recognize the need for training and
arrange for his employees to receive it.
This training is available in several formats: •A presentation arranged or presented by the local Safety Committee •A video presentation from NCOR library
•A presentation arranged or presented by the Safety and Health Manager
or staff •A presentation arranged or presented by the Supervisor Employees must be trained on the proper safeguards, safe use, and physical and
health hazards of hazardous chemicals used on the job before beginning work
with those chemicals or whenever a new hazardous chemical or procedure is introduced into their work area. Also, it is recommended that employees receive annual training updates. Training will include at least the following topics:
• Physical and health hazards of chemicals in the work area;
• Methods and observation techniques used to detect the presence or release of a hazardous chemical; • How to lessen or prevent exposure to these hazardous chemicals through usage of controls, work practices and personal protective
equipment;
• How to use safety data sheet information; • How to read and understand labels; and • Contingency plans for medical and chemical accident response. All training shall be documented by recording the training session subject(s),
date, attendees, and providing a copy of the outline for the training session. The
142
Supervisor shall maintain these records and provide copies of all records to the
Safety and Health Manager.
B. New Employees
Information about NCOR’s Hazard Communication Program will be disseminated to
all new employees in the Employee Safety Handbook (page 17). All new employees must be trained by their supervisor about hazardous chemicals in their work area at the time of their initial assignment and whenever a new hazard is introduced into the work area.
Non-routine Tasks: Appropriate hazard warnings, or alternatively, words, pictures, symbols, or combination thereof, which provide at least general information regarding the hazards of the chemicals, and which, in conjunction with the other information
immediately available to employees under the hazard communication program,
NCOR will provide employees with the specific information regarding the physical and health hazards of the hazardous chemical. Please refer to Labeling System Used section at the end of this chapter for examples of NCOR labeling systems
Employees performing non-routine tasks can be exposed to chemicals from
unusual and unsuspected sources. Written procedures shall be developed for every non-routine task by the supervisor of the employees who will perform the task. The information will include chemical hazards associated with the performance of the tasks and appropriate protective measures required to
perform the task safely. The procedures shall be included in the local copy of the
Hazard Communication Program. The Safety and Health Manager will provide advice and guidance upon request.
Multi-employer workplaces.
If NCOR produces, uses, or stores hazardous chemicals at a workplace in such a way that the employees of other employer(s) may be exposed (for example, employees of a construction contractor working on-site), NCOR shall additionally ensure that the hazard communication programs developed and implemented under this paragraph include the following:
a) The methods NCOR will use to provide the other employer(s) on-site access to safety data sheets for each hazardous chemical the other employer(s)' employees may be exposed to while working; b) The methods NCOR will use to inform the other employer(s) of any precautionary measures that need to be taken to protect employees
during the workplace's normal operating conditions and in foreseeable emergencies; and, c) The methods NCOR will use to inform the other employer(s) of the labeling system used in the workplace.
143
NCOR may rely on an existing hazard communication program to comply with
these requirements, provided that it meets the criteria established in this
paragraph.
NCOR shall make the written hazard communication program available, upon request, to employees, their designated representatives in accordance with the requirements of 29 CFR 1910.1020 (e).
Where employees must travel between workplaces during a work shift, i.e., their work is carried out at more than one geographical location, the written hazard communication program may be kept at the primary workplace facility
MSDS Master List
Hazardous Chemical Where on Site Date on Site Date off Site
| | | N/A
| | |
| | |
| | |
| | |
| | |
| | |
| | |
| | |
| | |
| | |
| | |
| | |
| | |
| | |
| | |
| | |
| | |
| | |
| | |
| | |
| | |
| | |
| | |
| | |
| | |
144

Labeling System Used by NCOR NCOR may use words, pictures, symbols or any combination of these to communicate the hazards of the chemical. Employees will be trained and
demonstrate a knowledge of the labeling system. All NCOR employees are
English speaking.

Poisonous/Toxic Corrosive

Flammable Electric Shock Biohazardous
NCOR can also use several labeling systems common to the workplace. These include:
Right to Know (RTK) National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) / National Fire Rating (NFR) Hazardous Material Identification Guide (HMIG) Hazardous Material Identification System (HMIS)
The Right to Know (RTK) labeling system consists of labels that list the chemical
name, synonym or common name, hazard information, CAS (Chemical Abstract Service) number and precautionary measures and first aid procedures. (See below)

The National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) / National Fire Rating (NFR)
labeling system employs a color-coded rating guide in a diamond shape. (See
145
below). Health is defined by the color blue, Flammability is red and Instability is
represented in yellow, Other or Corrosive in white. The numbers are assigned
according to the level of hazard the chemical(s) present 0-4. Thus 0 being no hazard and 4 the greatest level the greatest hazard

Hazardous Material Identification Guide (HMIG) labeling system presents a color
formatted label and is rectangular in shape. The numbers used in this system to identify the hazard level of the chemical are based on the acute and chronic hazards present in normal day to day use in the workplace. (For example see below)

The numbers for the HMIG labeling systems can be obtained from MSDS sheets accompanying the chemical or reference books that list chemical hazards by number rating such as The Fire Protection Guide to Hazardous Materials as well as the National Fire Rating Guide.
Hazardous Material Identification System (HMIS)
Another common labeling system similar to the HMIG system is called HMIS III. It
looks similar in nomenclature to the HMIG labeling system (using the color bar format and rectangular shape) and utilizes a rating system similar to the HMIG
146
system. HMIS III refers to Hazardous Materials Identification System. The HMIS
III rating system has recently been revised. The most significant change to the
label has been to the physical hazard section of the label. Along with the assigned number, an icon is now present: compressed gas, explosive, oxidizers, etc. This is to allow for easier identification of the presence of a specific hazard to the employee. (See an example below.)

147
APPENDIX B: FORKLIFT AND MOTORIZED TRUCK PROCEDURES

Policy: All NCOR employees required to operate a powered industrial truck and/or forklift
must be trained to operate the equipment. Motorized industrial trucks and
forklifts are a vital and necessary tool that enable NCOR to conduct its business efficiently and safely. Powered industrial trucks are defined as forklifts, platform lift trucks, power
sweepers, motorized pallet jacks and all other motorized vehicles used on
NCOR’s premises. NCOR will insure that all industrial trucks are inspected daily for safety and mechanical operability. Any industrial truck found to be defective or unsafe will not be used until the defect or unsafe condition is repaired/remedied. See Daily Inspection Checklists at the end of this chapter

Employee Certification:
NCOR shall permit only those employees qualified by training or experience to operate equipment and machinery. Employees must meet the following requirements before they are “certified” to operate a powered industrial truck:
• 18 Years of age
• Is physically qualified to operate the industrial truck and has no movement limitations concerning their arms, legs, foot, head, waist, back, hands or
fingers.
• Does not have an established medical history that would interfere with their ability to operate the industrial truck to include: a) Epilepsy
b) Mental, nervous, or other functional or psychiatric disorder c) Arthritis, neuromuscular, or vascular disease
• Has the visual acuity and binocular vision of at least 20/40 (with or without corrective lenses), and the field of vision of at least 70 degrees
in each eye.
• Does not have an average hearing loss in the better ear greater than 40 decibels at 500 Hz, 1000 Hz, and 2000 Hz with or without a hearing aid.
• Has passed a pre-employment drug test.
• Does not use drugs that fall into the following categories: opiate, hallucinogenic, depressant, or stimulants.
• Has a valid drivers license
• Complete the “Industrial Truck” written Certification Examination of 70% or better
148

• Perform a minimum of 40 hours “On-the-Job Training” in operating an industrial truck. The Supervisor will provide on-the-job training about how to physically operate
the powered industrial truck and additional supervised training as necessary.
Training shall consist of a combination of formal instruction (e.g., lecture, discussion, interactive computer learning, video tape, written material), practical training (demonstrations performed by the trainer and practical exercises performed by the trainee), and evaluation of the operator's performance in the
workplace.
All operator training and evaluation shall be conducted by persons who have the knowledge, training, and experience to train powered industrial truck operators and evaluate their competence. The Trainer’s experience and history,
competence to train credentials (courses taken, special licenses obtained, etc.)
and records of/from other individuals trained, and any other related records/documentation, shall be maintained in the Trainers’/Supervisors’ personnel file.
Training Program Content:
The Supervisor/trainer will ensure that Powered industrial truck operators receive initial training and gain an understanding in the following topics and elements:
• Operating instructions, warnings, and precautions for the types of truck the operator will be authorized to operate.
• Differences between the truck and the automobile.
• Personal Protective Equipment- seat belt, safety shoes, hard hat, gloves, etc.
• Truck controls and instrumentation: where they are located, what they do,
and how they work.
• Engine or motor operation.
• Basic operation of the industrial truck to include its major components,
principals of loading, load capacity, operating “nuances”, etc.
• Steering and maneuvering.
• Starting and operating the truck- parking, turning, load traveling, stacking,
backing up, etc.
• Visibility including restrictions due to loading).
• Fork and attachment adaption, operation, and use limitations.

149
The Supervisor/trainer will ensure that Powered industrial truck operators receive
initial training and gain an understanding in the following topics and elements:
(continued)
• Vehicle load capacity.
• Vehicle stability.
• Any vehicle inspection and maintenance that the operator will be required
to perform. (Maintenance and inspection of the industrial truck)
• Refueling procedures and/or charging and recharging of batteries.
• Operating limitations and actually operating the truck in working situations.
• Any other operating instructions, warnings, or precautions listed in the operator's manual for the types of vehicle that the employee is being
trained to operate.
• Surface conditions where the vehicle will be operated.
• Compositions of loads to be carried and load stability.
• Load manipulation, stacking, and unstacking. Balances and Counterbalances
• Pedestrian traffic in areas where the vehicle will be operated.
• Narrow aisles and other restricted places where the vehicle will be operated.
• Hazardous (classified) locations where vehicle will be operated.
• Ramps and other sloped surfaces that could affect the vehicle's stability.
• Closed environments and other areas where insufficient ventilation or poor vehicle maintenance could cause a build-up of carbon monoxide or diesel exhaust.
• Other unique or potentially hazardous environmental conditions in the
workplace that could affect safe operation.
On-the-Job Coach Provides on-the-job (hands on training) of 40 hours about how to physically operate the powered industrial truck. This training will be divided into specific areas listed below:

• Pre-Operation and Inspection of Powered Industrial Trucks
• Proper start-up and mastery of controls
• Maneuvering Skills
• Safety procedures
• Re-fueling or re-charging
• Actually operating the truck in working situations Once the employee completes the minimum training time, shown consistent
safe operating skills, and has demonstrated the ability to handle the equipment, the On-the-Job coach certifies the employee according to the Truck Operator Performance Test.
150
Refresher Training and Evaluation:

Refresher training, including an evaluation of the effectiveness of that training, shall be conducted to ensure that the operator has the knowledge and skills needed to operate the powered industrial truck safely.
Refresher training in relevant topics shall be provided to the operator when:

• The operator has been observed to operate the vehicle in an unsafe manner;
• The operator has been involved in an accident or near-miss incident;
• The operator has received an evaluation that reveals that the operator is not operating the truck safely;
• The operator is assigned to drive a different type of truck; or
• A condition in the workplace changes in a manner that could affect safe operation of the truck.

An evaluation of each powered industrial truck operator's performance shall be conducted at least once every three years. Certification:
NCOR shall certify that each operator has been trained and evaluated. The certification shall include the name of the operator, the date of the training, the date of the evaluation, and the identity of the person(s) performing the training or evaluation.
Special Considerations Regarding Trucks and Railroad Cars:
• The brakes of highway trucks shall be set and wheel chocks placed under
the rear wheels to prevent the trucks from rolling while they are boarded
with powered industrial trucks.
• Provided to prevent railroad cars from moving during loading or unloading operations.
• Fixed jacks may be necessary to support a semitrailer and prevent upending during the loading or unloading when the trailer is not coupled to a tractor.
• Positive protection shall be provided to prevent railroad cars from being
moved while dock boards or bridge plates are in position.
151

Industrial Truck Written Certification Examination
__________________________ ___________
Employee’s Name Date
(Place the Related Examination Here)
Industrial Truck Operator Performance Test
__________________________ ___________ Employee’s Name Date
(Place the Related Performance Test Here)
I certify that __________________ is qualified to operate a _________________
Authorizing Signature _______________________ Title: __________________ Date: ___________
152
DAILY CHECKLISTS FOR
POWERED INDUSTRIAL TRUCKS

DAILY INSPECTION CHECKLIST
Electric Forklift Truck KEY OFF Procedures
 The vehicle inspection
 Overhead guard
 Hydraulic cylinders
 Mast assembly
 Lift chains and rollers
 Forks
 Tires
 Examine the battery
 Check the hydraulic fluid level KEY ON Procedures
 Check the gauges
 Hour meter
 Battery discharge indicator
 Test the standard equipment
 Steering
 Brakes
 Front, tail, and brake lights
 Horn
 Safety seat (if equipped)
 Check the operation of load-handling
attachments

DAILY INSPECTION CHECKLIST Propane Forklift Truck
KEY OFF Procedures
 The vehicle inspection
 Overhead guard
 Hydraulic cylinders
 Mast assembly
 Lift chains and rollers
 Forks
 Tires
 LPG tank and locator pin
 LPG tank hose
 Gas gauge
DAILY INSPECTION CHECKLIST Propane Forklift Truck (continued) KEY OFF Procedures (continued)

153
 Check the engine oil level
 Examine the battery
 Check the hydraulic fluid level
 Check the engine coolant level
KEY ON Procedures
 Test the front, tail, and brake lights
ENGINE RUNNING Procedures
 Check the gauges
 Oil pressure indicator lamp
 Ammeter indicator lamp
 Hour meter
 Water temperature gauge
 Test the standard equipment
 Steering
 Brakes
 Horn
 Safety seat (if equipped)
 Check the operation of the load-handling attachments
 Check the transmission fluid level

DAILY INSPECTION CHECKLIST
Yard Forklift Truck
KEY OFF Procedures
The vehicle inspection
 Overhead guard
 Hydraulic cylinders
 Mast assembly
 Lift chains and rollers
 Forks
 Tires
 LPG tank and locator pin
 LPG tank hose
 Gas gauge
KEY OFF Procedures (continued)
 Check the engine oil level
 Examine the battery
 Inspect the hydraulic fluid level
 Check the engine coolant level

KEY ON Procedures Test the standard equipment

154
 Front, tail, and brake lights
 Fuel gauge (if diesel)
 Windshield wiper
 Heater
ENGINE RUNNING Procedures Check the gauges
 Oil pressure indicator lamp
 Ammeter indicator lamp
 Ammeter
 Hour Meter
 Water Temperature Gauge Test the standard equipment
 Steering
 Brakes
 Horn
 Safety seat (if equipped) Check the operation of load-handling
attachments
Check the transmission fluid level

GENERIC CHECKLIST FOR POWERED INDUSTRIAL TRUCKS Overhead Guard - Are there broken welds, missing bolts, or damaged areas?
Hydraulic Cylinders - Is there leakage or damage on the lift, tilt, and attachment functions of the cylinders? Mast Assembly - Are there broken welds, cracked or bent areas, and worn or
missing stops? Lift Chains and rollers - Is there wear or damage or kinks, signs of rust, or any sign that lubrication is required? Is there squeaking?
Forks - Are they cracked or bent, worn, or mismatched? Is there excessive oil or water on the forks? Tires - What do the tires look like?
Are there large cuts that go around the circumference of the tire? Are there large pieces of rubber missing or separated from the rim? Are there missing lugs? Is there bond separation that may cause slippage?
155

Battery Check - Are the cell caps and terminal covers in place? Are the cables
missing insulation? Hydraulic Fluid - Check level?
Gauges - Are they all properly working?
Steering - Is there excessive free play? If power steering, is the pump working? Brakes - If pedal goes all the way to the floor when you apply the service brake
that is the first indicator that the brakes are bad. Brakes should work in reverse,
also. Does the parking brake work? The truck should not be capable of movement when the parking brake is engaged. Lights - If equipped with lights, are they working properly?

Horn - Does the horn work? Safety seat - if the truck is equipped with a safety seat is it working?
Load Handling Attachments - Is there hesitation when hoisting or lowering the forks, when using the forward or backward tilt, or the lateral travel on the side shift? Is there excessive oil on the cylinders?
Propane Tank - Is the tank guard bracket properly positioned and locked down? Propane Hose - Is it damaged? It should not be frayed, pinched, kinked, or bound in any way. Is the connector threaded on squarely and tightly?
Propane Odor - If you detect the presence of propane gas odor, turn off the tank valve and report the problem. Engine Oil - Check levels.
Engine Coolant - Visually check the level. Note: Never remove the radiator cap to check the coolant level when the engine is running or while the engine is hot. Stand to the side and turn your face away. Always use a glove or rag to protect your hand.
Transmission Fluid - Check levels? Windshield Wipers - Do they work properly?
Seat Belts - Do they work?
156
Safety Door - (found on stand up rider models) Is it in place?

Safety Switch - (found on stand up riding tow tractors) Is it working? Hand guards - (found on stand up riding tow tractors, walking pallet trucks, walking transtackers) Are they in place?

Tow Hook - Does it engage and release smoothly? Does the safety catch work properly? Control Lever - Does the lever operate properly?

Safety Interlock - (found on order pickers) If the gate is open, does the vehicle run? Gripper Jaws - (found on order pickers) Do the jaws open and close quickly and
smoothly?
Work Platform - (found on order pickers) Does the platform raise and lower smoothly?
157

APPENDIX C: AIRBORNE PATHEGENS

(a) Scope and Application. This section applies to all occupational exposure to blood or other potentially infectious materials as defined by paragraph (b) of this section. (b) Definitions. For purposes of this section, the following shall apply:
"Assistant Secretary" means the Assistant Secretary of Labor for Occupational
Safety and Health, or designated representative. "Blood" means human blood, human blood components, and products made from human blood. "Bloodborne Pathogens" means pathogenic micro-organisms that are present in
human blood and can cause disease in humans. These pathogens include, but
are not limited to, hepatitis B virus (HBV) and human immunodeficiency virus (HIV). "Clinical Laboratory" means a workplace where diagnostic or other screening procedures are performed on blood or other potentially infectious materials.
"Contaminated" means the presence or the reasonably anticipated presence of blood or other potentially infectious materials on an item or surface. "Contaminated Laundry" means laundry which has been soiled with blood or other potentially infectious materials or may contain sharps. "Contaminated Sharps" means any contaminated object that can penetrate the
skin including, but not limited to, needles, scalpels, broken glass, broken capillary tubes, and exposed ends of dental wires. "Decontamination" means the use of physical or chemical means to remove, inactivate, or destroy blood borne pathogens on a surface or item to the point where they are no longer capable of transmitting infectious particles and the
surface or item is rendered safe for handling, use, or disposal. "Director" means the Director of the National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health, U.S. Department of Health and Human Services, or designated representative. "Engineering Controls" means controls (e.g., sharps disposal containers, self-sheathing needles) that isolate or remove the blood borne
pathogens hazard from the workplace. "Exposure Incident" means a specific eye, mouth, other mucous membrane, non-intact skin, or parenteral contact with blood or other potentially infectious materials that results from the performance of an employee's duties. "Handwashing Facilities" means a facility providing an adequate supply of
running potable water, soap and single use towels or hot air drying machines. "Licensed Healthcare Professional" is a person whose legally permitted scope of practice allows him or her to independently perform the activities required byparagraph (f) Hepatitis B Vaccination and Post-exposure Evaluation and Follow-up.
"HBV" means hepatitis B virus. "HIV" means human immunodeficiency virus.
158
"Occupational Exposure" means reasonably anticipated skin, eye, mucous
membrane, or parenteral contact with blood or other potentially infectious
materials that may result from the performance of an employee's duties. "Other Potentially Infectious Materials" means: (1) The following human body fluids: semen, vaginal secretions, cerebrospinal fluid, synovial fluid, pleural fluid, pericardial fluid, peritoneal
fluid, amniotic fluid, saliva in dental procedures, any body fluid that is
visibly contaminated with blood, and all body fluids in situations where it is difficult or impossible to differentiate between body fluids; (2) Any unfixed tissue or organ (other than intact skin) from a human
(living or dead); and
(3) HIV-containing cell or tissue cultures, organ cultures, and HIV- or HBV-containing culture medium or other solutions; and blood, organs, or other tissues from experimental animals infected with HIV or HBV. "Parenteral" means piercing mucous membranes or the skin barrier through such
events
as needle sticks, human bites, cuts, and abrasions. "Personal Protective Equipment" is specialized clothing or equipment worn by an employee for protection against a hazard. General work clothes (e.g., uniforms, pants, shirts or blouses) not intended to function as protection
against a hazard are not considered to be personal protective equipment. "Production Facility" means a facility engaged in industrial-scale, large-volume or high concentration production of HIV or HBV. "Regulated Waste" means liquid or semi-liquid blood or other potentially
infectious materials; contaminated items that would release blood or other potentially infectious materials in a liquid or semi-liquid state if compressed; items that are caked with dried blood or other potentially infectious materials and are capable
of releasing these materials during handling; contaminated sharps; and pathological and microbiological wastes containing blood or other potentially infectious materials. "Research Laboratory" means a laboratory producing or using research-laboratory-scale
amounts of HIV or HBV. Research laboratories may produce high concentrations of HIV or HBV but not in the volume found in production facilities. "Source Individual" means any individual, living or dead, whose blood or other potentially infectious materials may be a source of occupational exposure
to the employee. Examples include, but are not limited to, hospital and clinic patients; clients in institutions for the developmentally disabled; trauma victims; clients of drug and alcohol treatment facilities; residents of hospices and nursing homes; human remains; and individuals who donate or sell blood or blood
components.
159
"Sterilize" means the use of a physical or chemical procedure to destroy all
microbial life
including highly resistant bacterial endospores. "Universal Precautions" is an approach to infection control. According to the concept of Universal Precautions, all human blood and certain human body fluids are treated as if known to be infectious for HIV, HBV, and other blood borne
pathogens.
"Work Practice Controls" means controls that reduce the likelihood of exposure by altering the manner in which a task is performed (e.g., prohibiting recapping of needles by a two-handed technique).
(c) Exposure Control.
(1) Exposure Control Plan. (i) NCOR having an employee(s) with occupational exposure as
defined by paragraph (b) of this section shall establish a written
Exposure Control Plan designed to eliminate or minimize employee exposure. (ii) The Exposure Control Plan shall contain at least the following
elements: (A) The exposure determination required by paragraph (c)(2),
(B) The schedule and method of implementation for paragraphs (d) Methods of Compliance, (e) HIV and HBV Research Laboratories and Production Facilities, (f) Hepatitis B Vaccination and Post-Exposure Evaluation and Follow- up, (g) Communication of Hazards to Employees, and (h)
Recordkeeping, of this criterion, and (C) The procedure for the evaluation of circumstances surrounding exposure incidents as required by paragraph (f)(3)(i) of this criterion.
(iii) (BBP7) NCOR shall ensure that a copy of the Exposure Control Plan is accessible to employees in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.20(e).
(iv) The Exposure Control Plan shall be reviewed and updated at least annually and whenever necessary to reflect new or modified tasks and procedures which affect occupational exposure and to reflect new or revised employee positions with occupational exposure.

160
(v) The Exposure Control Plan shall be made available to the
Assistant Secretary and the Director upon request for examination
and copying. (2) Exposure Determination.

(i) NCOR who has an employee(s) with occupational exposure as defined by paragraph (b) of this section shall prepare an exposure determination. This exposure determination shall contain the following:

(A) A list of all job classifications in which all employees in those job classifications have occupational exposure; (B) A list of job classifications in which some employees
have occupational exposure, such as those employees
trained in First Aid and are expected to provide emergency
care, and (C) A list of all tasks and procedures or groups of closely
related task and procedures in which occupational exposure occurs and that are performed by employees in job classifications listed in accordance with the provisions of paragraph (c)(2)(i)(B) of this criterion.
(D) See Appendix C2, end of this Chapter, for job classification list (ii) This exposure determination shall be made without regard to the use of personal protective equipment.
(d) Methods of Compliance. (1) General. Universal precautions shall be observed to prevent contact with blood or other potentially infectious materials. Under circumstances in
which differentiation between body fluid types is difficult or impossible, all body fluids shall be considered potentially infectious materials. (2) Engineering and Work Practice Controls.
(i) Engineering and work practice controls shall be used to eliminate or minimize employee exposure. Where occupational exposure remains after institution of these controls, personal protective equipment shall also be used.
(ii) Engineering controls shall be examined and maintained or replaced on a regular schedule to ensure their effectiveness.
161
Personal Protective Equipment shall be provided per paragraph (3),
two pages following.
(iii) NCOR shall provide hand washing facilities which are readily accessible to employees.
(iv) When provision of hand washing facilities is not feasible, NCOR
shall provide either an appropriate antiseptic hand cleanser in conjunction with clean cloth/paper towels or antiseptic towelettes. When antiseptic hand cleansers or towelettes are used, hands shall be washed with soap and running water as soon as feasible.
(v) NCOR shall ensure that employees wash their hands
immediately or as soon as feasible after removal of gloves or other personal protective equipment. (vi) NCOR shall ensure that employees wash hands and any other
skin with soap and water, or flush mucous membranes with water
immediately or as soon as feasible following contact of such body areas with blood or other potentially infectious materials. (vii) Contaminated needles and other contaminated sharps shall not be bent, recapped, or removed except as noted in paragraphs
(d)(2)(vii)(A) and (d)(2)(vii)(B) below. Shearing or breaking of contaminated needles is prohibited. (A) Contaminated needles and other contaminated sharps shall not be bent, recapped or removed unless the employer
can demonstrate that no alternative is feasible or that such action is required by a specific medical or dental procedure. (B) Such bending, recapping or needle removal must be accomplished through the use of a mechanical device or a
one-handed technique. (viii) Immediately or as soon as possible after use, contaminated reusable sharps shall be placed in appropriate containers until properly reprocessed. These containers shall be:
(A) puncture resistant; (B) labeled or color-coded in accordance with this criterion;
(C) leakproof on the sides and bottom; and (D) in accordance with the requirements set forth in paragraph (d)(4)(ii)(E) for reusable sharps.
162
(ix) Eating, drinking, smoking, applying cosmetics or lip balm, and
handling contact lenses are prohibited in work areas where there is
a reasonable likelihood of occupational exposure. (x) Food and drink shall not be kept in refrigerators, freezers, shelves, cabinets or on countertops or benchtops where blood or
other potentially infectious materials are present.
(xi) All procedures involving blood or other potentially infectious materials shall be performed in such a manner as to minimize splashing, spraying, spattering, and generation of droplets of these substances.

(xii) Mouth pipetting/suctioning of blood or other potentially infectious materials is prohibited.
(xiii) Specimens of blood or other potentially infectious materials
and blood soaked bandages shall be placed in a container which
prevents leakage during collection, handling, processing, storage, transport, or shipping. (A) The container for storage, transport, or shipping shall be
labeled or color-coded according to paragraph (g)(1)(i) and closed prior to being stored, transported, or shipped. When a facility utilizes Universal Precautions in the handling of all specimens, the labeling/color-coding of specimens is not necessary provided containers are recognizable as
containing specimens. This exemption only applies while such specimens/containers remain within the facility. Labeling or color-coding in accordance with paragraph (g)(1)(i) is required when such specimens/containers leave the facility.
(B) If outside contamination of the primary container occurs, the primary container shall be placed within a second container which prevents leakage during handling, processing, storage, transport, or shipping and is labeled or
color-coded according to the requirements of this criterion. (C) If the specimen could puncture the primary container, the primary container shall be placed within a secondary
container which is puncture-resistant in addition to the above characteristics. (xiv) Equipment which may become contaminated with blood or other potentially infectious materials shall be examined prior to
servicing or shipping and shall be decontaminated as necessary,
163
unless NCOR can demonstrate that decontamination of such
equipment or portions of such equipment is not feasible.
(A) A readily observable label in accordance with paragraph (g)(1)(i)(H) shall be attached to the equipment stating which portions remain contaminated.

(B) NCOR shall ensure that this information is conveyed to all affected employees, the servicing representative, and/or the manufacturer, as appropriate, prior to handling, servicing, or shipping so that appropriate precautions will be
taken.
(3) Personal Protective Equipment. (i) Provision. When there is occupational exposure, NCOR shall
provide, at no cost to the employee, appropriate personal protective
equipment such as, but not limited to, gloves, gowns, laboratory coats, face shields or masks and eye protection, and mouthpieces, resuscitation bags, pocket masks, or other ventilation devices. Personal protective equipment will be considered "appropriate" only
if it does not permit blood or other potentially infectious materials to pass through to or reach the employee's work clothes, street clothes, undergarments, skin, eyes, mouth, or other mucous membranes under normal conditions of use and for the duration of time which the protective equipment will be used.
(ii) Use. NCOR shall ensure that the employee uses appropriate personal protective equipment unless NCOR shows that the employee temporarily and briefly declined to use personal protective equipment when, under rare and extraordinary
circumstances, it was the employee's professional judgment that in the specific instance its use would have prevented the delivery of health care or public safety services or would have posed an increased hazard to the safety of the worker or co-worker. When the employee makes this judgment, the circumstances shall be
investigated and documented in order to determine whether changes can be instituted to prevent such occurrences in the future. (iii) Accessibility. NCOR shall ensure that appropriate personal
protective equipment in the appropriate sizes is readily accessible at the worksite or is issued to employees. Hypoallergenic gloves, glove liners, powderless gloves, or other similar alternatives shall be readily accessible to those employees who are allergic to the gloves normally provided.

164
(iv) Cleaning, Laundering, and Disposal. NCOR shall clean,
launder, and dispose of personal protective equipment required by
paragraphs (d) and (e) of this criterion, at no cost to the employee. (v) Repair and Replacement. NCOR shall repair or replace personal protective equipment as needed to maintain its
effectiveness, at no cost to the employee.
(vi) If a garment(s) is penetrated by blood or other potentially infectious materials, the garment(s) shall be removed immediately or as soon as feasible.

(vii) All personal protective equipment shall be removed prior to leaving the work area. (viii) When personal protective equipment is removed it shall be placed in an
appropriately designated area or container for storage, washing,
decontamination or disposal. (ix) Gloves. Gloves shall be worn when it can be reasonably anticipated that the employee may have hand contact with blood,
other potentially infectious materials, mucous membranes, and non-intact skin; when performing vascular access procedures except as specified in paragraph (d)(3)(ix)(D); and when handling or touching contaminated items or surfaces.
(A) Disposable (single use) gloves such as surgical or examination gloves, shall be replaced as soon as practical when contaminated or as soon as feasible if they are torn, punctured, or when their ability to function as a barrier is compromised.
(B) Disposable (single use) gloves shall not be washed or decontaminated for re-use. (C) Utility gloves may be decontaminated for re-use if the
integrity of the glove is not compromised. However, they must be discarded if they are cracked, peeling, torn, punctured, or exhibit other signs of deterioration or when their ability to function as a barrier is compromised.
(D) If NCOR, in a volunteer blood donation center, judges that routine gloving for all phlebotomies is not necessary then NCOR shall:
(1) Periodically reevaluate this policy;
(2) Make gloves available to all employees who wish to use them for phlebotomy;
165
(3) Not discourage the use of gloves for phlebotomy;
and
(4) Require that gloves be used for phlebotomy in the following circumstances:
(i) When the employee has cuts, scratches, or other breaks in his or her skin;
(ii) When the employee judges that hand
contamination with blood may occur, for example, when performing phlebotomy on an uncooperative source individual; and (iii) When the employee is receiving training in
phlebotomy.
(x) Masks, Eye Protection, and Face Shields. Masks in combination with eye protection devices, such as goggles or glasses with solid side
shields, or chin-length face shields, shall be worn whenever splashes,
spray, spatter, or droplets of blood or other potentially infectious materials may be generated and eye, nose, or mouth contamination can be reasonably anticipated.
(xi) Gowns, Aprons, and Other Protective Body Clothing. Appropriate protective clothing such as, but not limited to, gowns, aprons, lab coats, clinic jackets, or similar outer garments shall be worn in occupational exposure situations. The type and characteristics will depend upon the task and degree of exposure anticipated.
(xii) Surgical caps or hoods and/or shoe covers or boots shall be worn in instances when gross contamination can reasonably be anticipated (e.g., autopsies, orthopedic surgery).
(4) Housekeeping. (i) General. NCOR shall ensure that the worksite is maintained in a clean and sanitary condition. NCOR shall determine and implement an appropriate written schedule for cleaning and method of
decontamination based upon the location within the facility, type of surface to be cleaned, type of soil present, and tasks or procedures being performed in the area. (ii) All equipment and environmental and working surfaces shall be
cleaned and decontaminated after contact with blood or other potentially infectious materials. (A) Contaminated work surfaces shall be decontaminated with an appropriate disinfectant after completion of procedures; immediately or
as soon as feasible when surfaces are overtly contaminated or after any spill of blood or other potentially infectious materials; and at the end of
166
the work shift if the surface may have become contaminated since the
last cleaning.
(B) Protective coverings, such as plastic wrap, aluminum foil, or imperviously-backed absorbent paper used to cover equipment and environmental surfaces, shall be removed and replaced as soon as
feasible when they become overtly contaminated or at the end of the
workshift if they may have become contaminated during the shift. (C) All bins, pails, cans, and similar receptacles intended for reuse which have a reasonable likelihood for becoming contaminated with blood or
other potentially infectious materials shall be inspected and
decontaminated on a regularly scheduled basis and cleaned and decontaminated immediately or as soon as feasible upon visible contamination.
(D) Broken glassware which may be contaminated shall not
be picked up directly with the hands. It shall be cleaned up using mechanical means, such as a brush and dust pan, tongs, or forceps.
(E) Reusable sharps that are contaminated with blood or other potentially infectious materials shall not be stored or processed in a manner that requires employees to reach by hand into the containers where these sharps have been placed.
(iii) Regulated Waste. (A) Contaminated Sharps Discarding and Containment.
(1) Contaminated sharps shall be discarded immediately or as soon as feasible in containers that are:
(i) Closable;
(ii) Puncture resistant;
(iii) Leakproof on sides and bottom; and
(iv) Labeled or color-coded in accordance with paragraph (g)(1)(i) of this criterion.

(2) During use, containers for contaminated sharps shall be:
(i) Easily accessible to personnel and located
as close as is feasible to the immediate area
167
where sharps are used or can be reasonably
anticipated to be found (e.g., laundries);
(ii) Maintained upright throughout use; and
(iii) Replaced routinely and not be allowed to overfill.
(3) When moving containers of contaminated sharps
from the area of use, the containers shall be:

(i) Closed immediately prior to removal or replacement to prevent spillage or protrusion of
contents during handling, storage, transport, or
shipping;
(ii) Placed in a secondary container if leakage is possible. The second container shall be:

(A) Closable;
(B) Constructed to contain all contents and prevent leakage during handling, storage, transport, or shipping; and
(C) Labeled or color-coded according to paragraph (g)(1)(i) of this criterion.

(4) Reusable containers shall not be opened, emptied, or cleaned manually or in any other manner
which would expose employees to the risk of percutaneous injury. (B) Other Regulated Waste Containment.
(1) Regulated waste shall be placed in containers which are:

(i) Closable; (ii) Constructed to contain all contents and
prevent leakage of fluids during handling, storage, transport or shipping;
(iii) Labeled or color-coded in accordance with paragraph (g)(1)(i) this criterion; and (iv) Closed prior to removal to prevent spillage
or protrusion of contents during handling, storage, transport, or shipping.

(2) If outside contamination of the regulated waste container occurs, it shall be placed in a second
container. The second container shall be:

168
(i) Closable;
(ii) Constructed to contain all contents and
prevent leakage of fluids during handling, storage, transport or shipping;
(iii) Labeled or color-coded in accordance with paragraph (g)(1)(i) of this criterion; and
(iv) Closed prior to removal to prevent spillage
or protrusion of contents during handling, storage, transport, or shipping. (C) Disposal of all regulated waste shall be in accordance
with applicable regulations of the United States, States and
Territories, and political subdivisions of States and Territories. (iv) Laundry.

(A) Contaminated laundry shall be handled as little as possible with a minimum of agitation. (1) Contaminated laundry shall be bagged or
containerized at the location where it was used and shall not be sorted or rinsed in the location of use.

(2) Contaminated laundry shall be placed and transported in bags or containers labeled or color-
coded in accordance with paragraph (g)(1)(i) of this criterion. When a facility utilizes Universal Precautions in the handling of all soiled laundry, alternative labeling or color-coding is sufficient if it permits all employees to recognize the containers as requiring
compliance with Universal Precautions.

(3) Whenever contaminated laundry is wet and presents a reasonable likelihood of soak-through of or leakage from the bag or container, the laundry shall
be placed and transported in bags or containers which prevent soak-through and/or leakage of fluids to the exterior.
(B) NCOR shall ensure that employees who have contact with contaminated laundry wear protective gloves and other appropriate personal protective equipment. (C) When a facility ships contaminated laundry off-site to a
second facility which does not utilize Universal Precautions in the handling of all laundry, the facility generating the
169
contaminated laundry must place such laundry in bags or
containers which are labeled or color- coded in accordance
with paragraph (g)(1)(i). (e) HIV and HBV Research Laboratories and Production Facilities.
(1) This paragraph applies to research laboratories and production
facilities engaged in the culture, production, concentration, experimentation, and manipulation of HIV and HBV. It does not apply to clinical or diagnostic laboratories engaged solely in the analysis of blood, tissues, or organs. These requirements apply in addition to
the other requirements of the criterion.
(2) Research laboratories and production facilities shall meet the following criteria:
(i) Standard Microbiological Practices. All regulated waste shall
either be incinerated or decontaminated by a method such as autoclaving known to effectively destroy blood-borne pathogens. (ii) Special Practices.
(A) Laboratory doors shall be kept closed when work involving HIV or HBV is in progress. (B) Contaminated materials that are to be decontaminated at
a site away from the work area shall be placed in a durable, leakproof, labeled or color-coded container that is closed before being removed from the work area. (C) Access to the work area shall be limited to authorized
persons. Written policies and procedures shall be established whereby only persons who have been advised of the potential biohazard, who meet any specific entry requirements, and who comply with all entry and exit procedures shall be allowed to enter the work areas
and animal rooms. (D) When other potentially infectious materials or infected animals are present in the work area or containment module, a hazard warning sign incorporating the universal biohazard
symbol shall be posted on all access doors. The hazard warning sign shall comply with paragraph (g)(1)(ii) of this criterion. (E) All activities involving other potentially infectious
materials shall be conducted in biological safety cabinets or other physical-containment devices within the containment
170
module. No work with these other potentially infectious
materials shall be conducted on the open bench.
(F) Laboratory coats, gowns, smocks, uniforms, or other appropriate protective clothing shall be used in the work area and animal rooms. Protective clothing shall not be worn
outside of the work area and shall be decontaminated before
being laundered. (G) Special care shall be taken to avoid skin contact with other potentially infectious materials. Gloves shall be worn
when handling infected animals and when making hand
contact with other potentially infectious materials is unavoidable. (H) Before disposal all waste from work areas and from
animal rooms shall either be incinerated or decontaminated
by a method such as autoclaving known to effectively destroy blood borne pathogens. (I) Vacuum lines shall be protected with liquid disinfectant
traps and high-efficiency particulate air (HEPA) filters or filters of equivalent or superior efficiency and which are checked routinely and maintained or replaced as necessary. (J) Hypodermic needles and syringes shall be used only for
parenteral injection and aspiration of fluids from laboratory animals and diaphragm bottles. Only needle-locking syringes or disposable syringe-needle units (i.e., the needle is integral to the syringe) shall be used for the injection or aspiration of other potentially infectious materials. Extreme caution shall
be used when handling needles and syringes. A needle shall not be bent, sheared, replaced in the sheath or guard, or removed from the syringe following use. The needle and syringe shall be promptly placed in a puncture-resistant container and autoclaved or decontaminated before reuse or
disposal. (K) All spills shall be immediately contained and cleaned up by appropriate professional staff or others properly trained and equipped to work with potentially concentrated infectious
materials. (L) A spill or accident that results in an exposure incident shall be immediately reported to the laboratory director or other responsible person.

171
(M) A biosafety manual shall be prepared or adopted and
periodically reviewed and updated at least annually or more
often if necessary. Personnel shall be advised of potential hazards, shall be required to read instructions on practices and procedures, and shall be required to follow them.
(iii) Containment Equipment.
(A) Certified biological safety cabinets (Class I, II, or III) or other appropriate combinations of personal protection or physical containment devices, such as special protective
clothing, respirators, centrifuge safety cups, sealed
centrifuge rotors, and containment caging for animals, shall be used for all activities with other potentially infectious materials that pose a threat of exposure to droplets, splashes, spills, or aerosols.

(B) Biological safety cabinets shall be certified when installed, whenever they are moved and at least annually. (3) HIV and HBV research laboratories shall meet the following criteria:
(i) Each laboratory shall contain a facility for hand washing and an eye wash facility which is readily available within the work area. (ii) An autoclave for decontamination of regulated waste shall be
available. (4) HIV and HBV production facilities shall meet the following criteria: (i) The work areas shall be separated from areas that are open to
unrestricted traffic flow within the building. Passage through two sets of doors shall be the basic requirement for entry into the work area from access corridors or other contiguous areas. Physical separation of the high-containment work area from access corridors or other areas or activities may also be provided by a double-
doored clothes-change room (showers may be included), airlock, or other access facility that requires passing through two sets of doors before entering the work area. (ii) The surfaces of doors, walls, floors and ceilings in the work area
shall be water resistant so that they can be easily cleaned. Penetrations in these surfaces shall be sealed or capable of being sealed to facilitate decontamination. (iii) Each work area shall contain a sink for washing hands and a
readily available eye wash facility. The sink shall be foot, elbow, or
172
automatically operated and shall be located near the exit door of
the work area.
(iv) Access doors to the work area or containment module shall be self-closing. (v) An autoclave for decontamination of regulated waste shall be
available within or as near as possible to the work area.
(vi) A ducted exhaust-air ventilation system shall be provided. This system shall create directional airflow that draws air into the work area through the entry area. The exhaust air shall not be
recirculated to any other area of the building, shall be discharged to
the outside, and shall be dispersed away from occupied areas and air intakes. The proper direction of the airflow shall be verified (i.e., into the work area).
(5) Training Requirements. Additional training requirements for employees
in HIV and HBV research laboratories and HIV and HBV production facilities are specified in paragraph (g)(2)(ix). (f) Hepatitis B Vaccination and Post-exposure Evaluation and Follow-up.
(1) General. (i) NCOR shall make available the hepatitis B vaccine and vaccination series to all employees who have occupational
exposure, and post-exposure evaluation and follow-up to all employees who have had an exposure incident. (ii) NCOR shall ensure that all medical evaluations and procedures including the hepatitis B vaccine and vaccination series and post-
exposure evaluation and follow up, including prophylaxis, are: (A) Made available at no cost to the employee; (B) Made available to the employee at a reasonable time
and place; (C) Performed by or under the supervision of a licensed physician or by or under the supervision of another licensed healthcare professional; and
(D) Provided according to recommendations of the U.S. Public Health Service current at the time these evaluations and procedures take place, except as specified by this paragraph (f).

173
(iii) NCOR shall ensure that all laboratory tests are conducted by an
accredited laboratory at no cost to the employee.
(2) Hepatitis B Vaccination. (i) Hepatitis B vaccination shall be made available after the
employee has received the training required in paragraph
(g)(2)(vii)(I) and within 10 working days of initial assignment to all employees who have occupational exposure unless the employee has previously received the complete hepatitis B vaccination series, antibody testing has revealed that the employee is immune, or the
vaccine is contraindicated for medical reasons.
(ii) NCOR shall not make participation in a prescreening program a prerequisite for receiving hepatitis B vaccination.
(iii) If the employee initially declines hepatitis B vaccination but at a
later date while still covered under the criterion decides to accept the vaccination, NCOR shall make available hepatitis B vaccination at that time.
(iv) NCOR shall assure that employees who decline to accept hepatitis B vaccination offered by NCOR sign the statement in Appendix C!. (v) If a routine booster dose(s) of hepatitis B vaccine is
recommended by the U.S. Public Health Service at a future date, such booster dose(s) shall be made available in accordance with section (f) (1) (ii). (3) Post-exposure Evaluation and Follow-up. Following a report of an
exposure incident, NCOR shall make immediately available to the exposed employee a confidential medical evaluation and follow-up, including at least the following elements:
(i) Documentation of the route(s) of exposure, and the circumstances under which the exposure incident occurred; (ii) Identification and documentation of the source individual, unless NCOR can establish that identification is infeasible or prohibited by
state or local law; (A) The source individual's blood shall be tested as soon as feasible and after consent is obtained in order to determine HBV and HIV infectivity. If consent is not obtained, NCOR
shall establish that legally required consent cannot be
174
obtained. When the source individual's consent is not
required by law, the source individual's
blood, if available, shall be tested and the results documented. (B) When the source individual is already known to be
infected with HBV or HIV, testing for the source individual's
known HBV or HIV status need not be repeated. (C) Results of the source individual's testing shall be made available to the exposed employee, and the employee shall
be informed of applicable laws and regulations concerning
disclosure of the identity and infectious status of the source individual. (iii) Collection and testing of blood for HBV and HIV serological
status;
(A) The exposed employee's blood shall be collected as soon as feasible and tested after consent is obtained.
(B) If the employee consents to baseline blood collection, but does not give consent at that time for HIV serologic testing, the ample shall be preserved for at least 90 days. If, within 90 days of the exposure incident, the employee elects to have the baseline sample tested, such testing shall be done
as soon as feasible. (iv) Post-exposure prophylaxis, when medically indicated, as recommended by the U.S. Public Health Service;
(v) Counseling; and (vi) Evaluation of reported illnesses. (4) Information Provided to the Healthcare Professional.
(i) NCOR shall ensure that the health-care professional responsible for the employee's Hepatitis B vaccination is provided a copy of this regulation.
(ii) NCOR shall ensure that the healthcare professional evaluating an employee after an exposure incident is provided the following information: (A) A copy of this regulation;

175
(B) A description of the exposed employee's duties as they
relate to the exposure incident;
(C) Documentation of the route(s) of exposure and circumstances under which exposure occurred;
(D) Results of the source individual's blood testing, if
available; and (E) All medical records relevant to the appropriate treatment of the employee including vaccination status which are
NCOR's responsibility to maintain.
(5) Healthcare Professional's Written Opinion. NCOR shall obtain and provide the employee with a copy of the evaluating healthcare professional's written opinion within 15 days of the completion of the
evaluation.
(i) The healthcare professional's written opinion for Hepatitis B vaccination shall be limited to whether Hepatitis B vaccination is indicated for an employee, and if the employee has received such
vaccination. (ii) The healthcare professional's written opinion for post-exposure evaluation and follow up shall be limited to the following information:
(A) That the employee has been informed of the results of the evaluation; and (B) That the employee has been told about any medical
conditions resulting from exposure to blood or other potentially infectious materials which require further evaluation or treatment. (iii) All other findings or diagnoses shall remain confidential
and shall not be included in the written report. (6) Medical Recordkeeping. Medical records required by this criterion shall be maintained in accordance with paragraph (h)(1) of this section.
(g) Communication of Hazards to Employees. (1) Labels and Signs. (i) Labels.

176
(A) Warning labels shall be affixed to containers of
regulated waste, refrigerators and freezers containing blood
or other potentially infectious material; and other containers used to store, transport or ship blood or other potentially infectious materials, except as provided in paragraph (g)(1)(i)(E), (F) and (G).

(B) Labels required by this section shall include the following legend:

(C) These labels shall be fluorescent orange or orange-red or predominantly so, with lettering and symbols in a contrasting color.
(D) Labels shall be affixed as close as feasible to the container by string, wire, adhesive, or other method that prevents their loss or unintentional removal.
(E) Red bags or red containers may be substituted for labels. (F) Containers of blood, blood components, or blood products that are labeled as to their contents and have been released for
transfusion or other clinical use are exempted from the labeling requirements of paragraph (g). (G) Individual containers of blood or other potentially infectious materials that are placed in a labeled container
during storage, transport, shipment or disposal are exempted from the labeling requirement. (H) Labels required for contaminated equipment shall be in accordance with this paragraph and shall also state which
portions of the equipment remain contaminated.

177
(I) Regulated waste that has been decontaminated need not
be labeled or color-coded.
(ii) Signs. (A) NCOR shall post signs at the entrance to work areas
specified in paragraph (e), HIV and HBV Research
Laboratory and Production Facilities, which shall bear the following legend:

(Name of the Infectious Agent)
(Special requirements for entering the area) (Name, telephone number of the laboratory director or other responsible person.) (B) These signs shall be fluorescent orange-red or
predominantly so, with lettering and symbols in a contrasting color. (2) Information and Training.
(i) NCOR shall ensure that all employees with occupational exposure participate in a training program which must be provided at no cost to the employee and during working hours. (ii) Training shall be provided as follows:
(A) At the time of initial assignment to tasks where occupational exposure may take place; (B) Within 90 days after the effective date of the criterion;
and (C) At least annually thereafter. (iii) For employees who have received training on blood borne
pathogens in the year preceding the effective date of the criterion,

178
only training with respect to the provisions of the criterion which
were not included need be provided.
(iv) Annual training for all employees shall be provided within one year of their previous training.
(v) NCOR shall provide additional training when changes such as
modification of tasks or procedures or institution of new tasks or procedures affect the employee's occupational exposure. The additional training may be limited to addressing the new exposures created.

(vi) Material appropriate in content and vocabulary to educational level, literacy, and language of employees shall be used. (vii) The training program shall contain at a minimum the following
elements:
(A) An accessible copy of the regulatory text of this criterion and an explanation of its contents;
(B) A general explanation of the epidemiology and symptoms of blood borne diseases; (C) An explanation of the modes of transmission of blood borne pathogens;
(D) An explanation of NCOR's exposure control plan and the means by which the employee can obtain a copy of the written plan;
(E) An explanation of the appropriate methods for recognizing tasks and other activities that may involve exposure to blood and other potentially infectious materials; (F) An explanation of the use and limitations of methods that
will prevent or reduce exposure including appropriate engineering controls, work practices, and personal protective equipment; (G) Information on the types, proper use, location, removal,
handling, decontamination and disposal of personal protective equipment; (H) An explanation of the basis for selection of personal protective equipment;

179
(I) Information on the hepatitis B vaccine, including
information on its efficacy, safety, method of administration,
the benefits of being vaccinated, and that the vaccine and vaccination will be offered free of charge; (J) Information on the appropriate actions to take and
persons to contact in an emergency involving blood or other
potentially infectious materials; (K) An explanation of the procedure to follow if an exposure incident occurs, including the method of reporting the
incident and the medical follow-up that will be made
available; (L) Information on the post-exposure evaluation and follow-up that the employer is required to provide for the employee
following an exposure incident;
(M) An explanation of the signs and labels and/or color coding required by paragraph (g)(1); and
(N) An opportunity for interactive questions and answers with the person conducting the training session. (viii) The person conducting the training shall be knowledgeable in the subject matter covered by the elements contained in the
training program as it relates to the workplace that the training will address. (ix) Additional Initial Training for Employees in HIV and HBV Laboratories and Production Facilities. Employees in HIV or
HBV research laboratories and HIV or HBV production facilities shall receive the following initial training in addition to the above training requirements. (A) NCOR shall assure that employees demonstrate
proficiency in standard microbiological practices and techniques and in the practices and operations specific to the facility before being allowed to work with HIV or HBV. (B) NCOR shall assure that employees have prior
experience in the handling of human pathogens or tissue cultures before working with HIV or HBV. (C) NCOR shall provide a training program to employees who have no prior experience in handling human pathogens.
Initial work activities shall not include the handling of infectious agents. A progression of work activities shall be
180
assigned as techniques are learned and proficiency is developed.
NCOR shall assure that employees participate in work activities
involving infectious agents only after proficiency has been demonstrated. (h) Recordkeeping.

(1) Medical Records. (i) NCOR shall establish and maintain an accurate record for each employee with occupational exposure, in accordance with 29 CFR
1910.20.
(ii) This record shall include: (A) The name and social security number of the employee;
(B) A copy of the employee's hepatitis B vaccination status
including the dates of all the hepatitis B vaccinations and any medical records relative to the employee's ability to receive vaccination as required by paragraph (f)(2);
(C) A copy of all results of examinations, medical testing, and follow up procedures as required by paragraph (f)(3); (D) NCOR's copy of the healthcare professional's written opinion as required by paragraph (f)(5); and
(E) A copy of the information provided to the healthcare professional as required by paragraphs (f)(4)(ii)(B), (C) and (D).
(iii) Confidentiality. NCOR shall ensure that employee medical records required by paragraph (h)(1) are: (A) Kept confidential; and
(B) Not disclosed or reported without the employee's express written consent to any person within or outside the workplace except as required by this section or as may be required by law.
(iv) NCOR shall maintain the records required by paragraph (h) for at least the duration of employment plus 30 years in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.20.

181
(2) Training Records.

(i) Training records shall include the following information: (A) The dates of the training sessions;
(B) The contents or a summary of the training sessions;
(C) The names and qualifications of persons conducting the training; and
(D) The names and job titles of all persons attending the
training sessions. (ii) Training records shall be maintained for 3 years from the date on which the training occurred.

(3) Availability. (i) NCOR shall ensure that all records required to be maintained by this section shall be made available upon
request to the Assistant Secretary and the Director for examination and copying. (ii) Employee training records required by this paragraph shall be provided upon request for examination and copying to employees,
to employee representatives, to the Director, and to the Assistant Secretary. (iii) Employee medical records required by this paragraph shall be provided upon request for examination and copying to the subject
employee, to anyone having written consent of the subject employee, to the Director, and to the Assistant Secretary in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.1020(h) (4) Transfer of Records.
(i) NCOR shall comply with the requirements involving transfer of records set forth in 29 CFR 1910.1020(h). (ii) If NCOR ceases to do business and there is no successor
NCOR to receive and retain the records for the prescribed period, NCOR shall notify the Director, at least three months prior to their disposal and transmit them to the Director, if required by the Director to do so, within that three month period.

182
(5) Responsibility.

The Safety and Health Manager is responsible for maintaining medical and training records and has overall responsibility for the effectiveness of this program.
Sharps Injury Log
NCOR shall establish and maintain a sharps injury log for the recording of percutaneous injuries from contaminated sharps. The information in the sharps injury log shall be recorded and maintained in such manner as to protect the
confidentiality of the injured employee. The sharps injury log shall contain, at a
minimum:
• The type and brand of device involved in the incident,

• The department or work area where the exposure incident occurred, and
• An explanation of how the incident occurred.
The sharps injury log shall be maintained for the period required by 29 CFR 1904.6.
________________________________________________________________

183

APPENDIX C1 TO §1910.1030 HEPATITIS B VACCINE DECLINATION I understand that due to my occupational exposure to blood or other potentially infectious materials I may be at risk of acquiring hepatitis B virus (HBV) infection.
I have been given the opportunity to be vaccinated with hepatitis B vaccine, at no
charge to myself. However, I decline hepatitis B vaccination at this time. I understand that by declining this vaccine, I continue to be at risk of acquiring hepatitis B, a serious disease. If in the future I continue to have occupational exposure to blood or other potentially infectious materials and I want to be
vaccinated with hepatitis B vaccine, I can receive the vaccination series at no
charge to me. Signature _______________________________________ Date __________________

184
APPENDIX C2
It is estimated that approximately 5.6 million workers in health care and other fields
are exposed to blood borne pathogens. Bloodborne pathogens (BBPs) are pathogenic microorganisms that are present in human blood and can infect and cause disease in humans. These pathogens include but are not limited to Hepatitis B Virus (HBV) which causes Hepatitis B, a serious liver disease and Human Immune
Deficiency Virus (HIV) which causes Acquired Immunodeficiency Syndrome (AIDS).
OSHA has determined that certain employees (particularly health care workers) face a significant health risk as a result of occupational exposure to blood and other potentially infectious materials (OPIM), because they contain BBPs.

In order to minimize or eliminate the risk of occupational exposure to BBPs, OSHA issued the Occupational Exposure to Bloodborne Pathogens Standard. This Standard sets forth actions that employers must take to reduce the risk of exposure to BBPs in the work place. These actions include:
the establishment of an exposure control plan; the use of engineering and work
practice controls; personal protective equipment; housekeeping procedures; employee training; medical surveillance; Hepatitis B vaccinations; the use of warning labels and signs; and other provisions.
Examples of employees who are likely to be covered include the following: 1. Housekeepers in health care facilities. 2. Personnel in hospital laundries or commercial laundries that service health care or public safety institutions. 3. Employees in first aid or medical clinics in industrial, educational, and
correctional facilities (i.e., those who clean and dress wounds).
4. Employees assigned to provide first aid. 5. Physicians, physicians’ assistants, nurses, and other health care employees in clinics and physicians’ offices. 6. Employees of clinical and diagnostic laboratories.
7. Tissue bank personnel. 8. Employees in blood banks and plasma centers who collect, transport, and test blood. 9. Dentists, dental hygienists, dental assistants, and dental laboratory technicians.
10. Staff of institutions for the developmentally disabled. 11. Hospice employees. 12. Home health care workers. 13. Staff of nursing homes and long term care facilities. 14. Employees of funeral homes and mortuaries.
15. HIV and HBV research laboratory workers. 16. Employees handling infectious waste. 17. Medical equipment service and repair personnel. 18. Emergency medical technicians, paramedics, and other emergency medical service providers.
19. Firefighters, law enforcement personnel, and correctional officers.
185
APPENDIX D: ELECTRICAL SAFETY

GENERAL INTRODUCTION. This Chapter addresses electrical safety requirements that are necessary for the
practical safeguarding of employees involved in construction work and is divided
into four major divisions and applicable definitions as follows: (a) Installation safety requirements. Included in this category are electric equipment and installations used to provide electric power and light on jobsites.

(b) Safety-related work practices. In addition to covering the hazards arising from the use of electricity at jobsites, these regulations also cover the hazards arising from the accidental contact, direct or indirect, by employees with all energized lines, above or below ground, passing through or near the jobsite.

(c) Safety-related maintenance and environmental considerations. (d) Safety requirements for special equipment.
(e) Definitions. TRAINING
Scope. The training requirements contained in this section apply to employees who face a risk of electric shock that is not reduced to a safe level by the electrical installation requirements of 1910.303 through 1910.308. Note: Employees in occupations listed in Table A (starting on next page) face
such a risk and are required to be trained. Other employees who also may reasonably be expected to face comparable risk of injury due to electric shock or other electrical hazards must also be trained.
Content of training.
Practices addressed in this chapter. Employees shall be trained in and
familiar with the safety-related work practices required by 1910.331 through 1910.335 that pertain to their respective job assignments.
Additional requirements for unqualified persons. Employees who are covered by paragraph (a) of this section but who are not qualified persons shall also be trained in and familiar with any electrically related safety practices not specifically
addressed by 1910.331 through 1910.335 but which are necessary for their safety.
186
Additional requirements for qualified persons. Qualified persons (i.e. those
permitted to work on or near exposed energized parts) shall, at a
minimum, be trained in and familiar with the following:
The skills and techniques necessary to distinguish exposed live parts from other parts of electric equipment.
The skills and techniques necessary to determine the nominal voltage of
exposed live parts, and
The clearance distances specified in 1910.333(c) and the corresponding voltages to which the qualified person will be exposed. Note 1: For the purposes of 1910.331 through 1910.335, a person must
have the training required by paragraph (b)(3) of this section in order to be
considered a qualified person. Note 2: Qualified persons whose work on energized equipment involves either direct contact or contact by means of tools or materials must also
have the training needed to meet 1910.333(C)(2).
Type of training. The training required by this section shall be of the classroom or on-the-job type. The degree of training provided shall be determined by the risk to the employee.
TABLE A. -- Typical Occupational Categories of Employees
Facing a Higher Than Normal Risk of Electrical Accident ________________________________________________________________ Occupation ________________________________________________________________
Blue collar supervisors(1) Electrical and electronic engineers(1) Electrical and electronic equipment assemblers(1) Electrical and electronic technicians(1)
Electricians Industrial machine operators(1) Material handling equipment operators(1) Mechanics and repairers(1) Painters(1)
Riggers and roustabouts(1) Stationary engineers(1) Welders _________________________________________________________________________
Footnote(1) Workers in these groups do not need to be trained if their work or the work of those they supervise does not bring them or the
187
employees they supervise close enough to exposed parts of electric circuits
operating at 50 volts or more to ground for a hazard to exist.

"Working on or near exposed energized parts."
"Application." This paragraph applies to work performed on exposed live parts (involving either direct contact or by means of tools or materials) or near enough
to them for employees to be exposed to any hazard they present.
"Work on energized equipment." Only qualified persons may work on electric circuit parts or equipment that have not been de-energized. Such persons shall be capable of working safely on energized circuits and shall be familiar with the proper use of special precautionary techniques, personal protective equipment,
insulating and shielding materials, and insulated tools.
"Overhead lines." if work is to be performed near overhead lines, the lines shall be de-energized and grounded, or other protective measures shall be provided before work is started. If the lines are to be de-energized, arrangements shall be made with the person or organization that operates or controls the electric
circuits involved to de-energize and ground them. If protective measures, such as guarding, isolating, or insulating, are provided, these precautions shall prevent employees from contacting such lines directly with any part of their body or indirectly through conductive materials, tools, or equipment.
"Unqualified persons."
When an unqualified person is working in an elevated position near overhead lines, the location shall be such that the person and the longest conductive object he or she may contact cannot come closer to any unguarded, energized overhead line than the following distances:
For voltages to ground 50kV or below - 10 feet (305 cm);
For voltages to ground over 50kV - 10 feet (305 cm) plus 4 inches (10 cm) for every 10kV over 50kV.
When an unqualified person is working on the ground in the vicinity of overhead lines, the person may not bring any conductive object closer to unguarded, energized overhead lines than the distances per below:
For voltages to ground 50kV or below - 10 feet (305 cm);
For voltages to ground over 50kV - 10 feet (305 cm) plus 4 inches (10 cm) for every 10kV over 50kV.
188
Note: For voltages normally encountered with overhead power line, objects which
do not have an insulating rating for the voltage involved are considered to be
conductive.
TABLE B - APPROACH DISTANCES FOR QUALIFIED EMPLOYEES - ALTERNATING CURRENT
______________________________________________________________
| Voltage range (phase to phase) | Minimum approach distance __________________________________|___________________________ |
300V and less ....................| Avoid Contact
Over 300V, not over 750V .........| 1 ft. 0 in. (30.5 cm). Over 750V, not over 2kV ..........| 1 ft. 6 in. (46 cm). Over 2kV, not over 15kV ..........| 2 ft. 0 in. (61 cm). Over 15kV, not over 37kV .........| 3 ft. 0 in. (91 cm).
Over 37kV, not over 87.5kV .......| 3 ft. 6 in. (107 cm). Over 87.5kV, not over 121kV ......| 4 ft. 0 in. (122 cm). Over 121kV, not over 140kV .......| 4 ft. 6 in. (137 cm). __________________________________|___________________________

“Vehicular and mechanical equipment."
Any vehicle or mechanical equipment capable of having parts of its structure elevated near energized overhead lines shall be operated so that a clearance of 10 ft. (305 cm) is maintained. If the voltage is higher than 50kV, the clearance
shall be increased 4 in. (10 cm) for every 10kV over that voltage. However, under
any of the following conditions, the clearance may be reduced:
If the vehicle is in transit with its structure lowered, the clearance may be reduced to 4 ft. (122 cm). If the voltage is higher than 50kV, the clearance shall be increased 4 in. (10 cm) for every 10 kV over that voltage.
If insulating barriers are installed to prevent contact with the lines, and if
the barriers are rated for the voltage of the line being guarded and are not a part of or an attachment to the the vehicle or its raised structure, the clearance may be reduced to a distance within the designed working dimensions of the insulating barrier.
If the equipment is an aerial lift insulated for the voltage involved, and if
the work is performed by a qualified person, the clearance (between the uninsulated portion of the aerial lift and the power line) may be reduced to the distance given in Table B.
189
Employees standing on the ground may not contact the vehicle or mechanical
equipment or any of its attachments, unless:
The employee is using protective equipment rated for the voltage; or
The equipment is located so that no uninsulated part of its structure (that portion of the structure that provides a conductive path to employees on the ground) can come closer to the line than permitted in this section.
If any vehicle or mechanical equipment capable of having parts of its structure
elevated near energized overhead lines is intentionally grounded, employees working on the ground near the point of grounding may not stand at the grounding location whenever there is a possibility of overhead line contact. Additional precautions, such as the use of barricades or insulation, shall be taken
to protect employees from hazardous ground potentials, depending on earth
resistivity and fault currents, which can develop within the first few feet or more outward from the grounding point.
"Illumination."
Employees may not enter spaces containing exposed energized parts, unless
illumination is provided that enables the employees to perform the work safely.
Where lack of illumination or an obstruction precludes observation of the work to be performed, employees may not perform tasks near exposed energized parts. Employees may not reach blindly into areas which may contain energized parts.
"Confined or enclosed work spaces."
When an employee works in a confined or enclosed space (such as a manhole or vault) that contains exposed energized parts, NCOR shall provide, and the employee shall use, protective shields, protective barriers, or insulating materials as necessary to avoid inadvertent contact with these parts. Doors, hinged panels, and the like shall be secured to prevent their swinging into an employee and
causing the employee to contact exposed energized parts.
"Conductive materials and equipment."
Conductive materials and equipment that are in contact with any part of an employee's body shall be handled in a manner that will prevent them from
contacting exposed energized conductors or circuit parts. If an employee must
handle long dimensional conductive objects (such as ducts and pipes) in areas with exposed live parts, NCOR shall institute work practices (such as the use of insulation, guarding, and material handling techniques) which will minimize the hazard.
"Portable ladders."
190
Portable ladders shall have nonconductive side rails if they are used where the
employee or the ladder could contact exposed energized parts.

"Conductive apparel."
Conductive articles of jewelry and clothing (such a watch bands, bracelets, rings, key chains, necklaces, metalized aprons, cloth with conductive thread, or metal
headgear) may not be worn if they might contact exposed energized parts.
However, such articles may be worn if they are rendered nonconductive by covering, wrapping, or other insulating means.

INSTALLATION SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
(a) Covered. This section contains installation safety requirements for electrical equipment and installations used to provide electric power and light at the jobsite. These sections apply to installations, both temporary
and permanent, used on the jobsite; but these sections do not apply to existing permanent installations that were in place before the construction activity commenced.
(b) Not covered. This section does not cover installations used for the
generation, transmission, and distribution of electric energy, including related communication, metering, control, and transformation installations. (However, these regulations do cover portable and vehicle-mounted generators used to provide power for equipment used at the jobsite.) See
Chapter V of this Part for the construction of power distribution and
transmission lines. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.
(a) Approval. All electrical conductors and equipment shall be approved.
(b) Examination, installation, and use of equipment.
(1) Examination. NCOR shall ensure that electrical equipment is free from
recognized hazards that are likely to cause death or serious physical harm to employees. Safety of equipment shall be determined on the basis of the following considerations:
(i) Suitability for installation and use in conformity with the
provisions of this Chapter. Suitability of equipment for an identified purpose may be evidenced by listing, labeling, or certification for that identified purpose.
191

(ii) Mechanical strength and durability, including, for parts designed
to enclose and protect other equipment, the adequacy of the protection thus provided. (iii) Electrical insulation.

(iv) Heating effects under conditions of use. (v) Arcing effects.
(vi) Classification by type, size, voltage, current capacity, specific
use. (vii) Other factors which contribute to the practical safeguarding of employees using or likely to come in contact with the equipment.

(2) Installation and use. Listed, labeled, or certified equipment shall be installed and used in accordance with instructions included in the listing, labeling, or certification.
(c) Interrupting rating. Equipment intended to break current shall have an interrupting rating at system voltage sufficient for the current that must be interrupted. (d) Mounting and cooling of equipment.
(1) Mounting. Electric equipment shall be firmly secured to the surface on which it is mounted. Wooden plugs driven into holes in masonry, concrete, plaster, or similar materials shall not be used.
(2) Cooling. Electrical equipment which depends upon the natural circulation of air and convection principles for cooling of exposed surfaces shall be installed so that room air flow over such surfaces is not prevented by walls or by adjacent installed equipment. For equipment designed for floor mounting, clearance
between top surfaces and adjacent surfaces shall be provided to dissipate rising warm air. Electrical equipment provided with ventilating openings shall be installed so that walls or other obstructions do not prevent the free circulation of air through the equipment.
(e) Splices. Conductors shall be spliced or joined with splicing devices designed for the use or by brazing, welding, or soldering with a fusible metal or alloy. Soldered splices shall first be so spliced or joined as to be mechanically and electrically secure without solder and then soldered. All splices and joints and the free ends of conductors shall be covered with an insulation equivalent to that of
the conductors or with an insulating device designed for the purpose.
192

(f) Arcing parts. Parts of electric equipment which in ordinary operation produce
arcs, sparks, flames, or molten metal shall be enclosed or separated and isolated from all combustible material. (g) Marking. Electrical equipment shall not be used unless the manufacturer's
name, trademark, or other descriptive marking by which the organization
responsible for the product may be identified is placed on the equipment and unless other markings are provided giving voltage, current, wattage, or other ratings as necessary. The marking shall be of sufficient durability to withstand the environment involved.

(h) Identification of disconnecting means and circuits. Each disconnecting means required by this Chapter for motors and appliances shall be legibly marked to indicate its purpose, unless located and arranged so the purpose is evident. Each service, feeder, and branch circuit, at its disconnecting means or over-
current device, shall be legibly marked to indicate its purpose, unless located and
arranged so the purpose is evident. These markings shall be of sufficient durability to withstand the environment involved. (i) 600 Volts, nominal, or less. This paragraph applies to equipment operating at
600 volts, nominal, or less. (1) Working space about electric equipment. Sufficient access and working space shall be provided and maintained about all electric equipment to permit ready and safe operation and maintenance of such
equipment. (i) Working clearances. Except as required or permitted elsewhere in this Chapter, the dimension of the working space in the direction of access to live parts operating at 600 volts or less and likely to
require examination, adjustment, servicing, or maintenance while alive shall not be less than indicated in Table 1. In addition to the dimensions shown in Table 1, workspace shall not be less than 30 inches (762 mm) wide in front of the electric equipment. Distances shall be measured from
the live parts if they are exposed, or from the enclosure front or opening if the live parts are enclosed. Walls constructed of concrete, brick, or tile are considered to be grounded. Working space is not required in back of assemblies such as dead-front switchboards or motor control centers where there are no
renewable or adjustable parts such as fuses or switches on the back and where all connections are accessible from locations other than the back.
193

TABLE 1 WORKING CLEARANCES
Nominal voltage to ground Minimum clear distance for conditions 1 (a) (b) (c)
0 - 150 ......................................... 151 - 600 .......................................
Feet2 Feet2 Feet 2
3 3 3 3 3 ½ 4
1 Conditions (a), (b), and (c) are as follows: (a) Exposed live parts on one side and no live or grounded parts on the other side of the working space, or exposed live parts on both sides effectively guarded by insulating material. Insulated wire
or insulated busbars operating at not over 300 volts are not considered live parts.
(b) Exposed live parts on one side and grounded parts on the other side. (c) Exposed live parts on both sides of the workspace (not guarded as provided in Condition (a)) with the operator between.
2 NOTE: For International System of Units (SI): one foot = 0.3048 m.
(ii) Clear spaces. Working space required by this Chapter shall not be used for storage. When normally enclosed live parts are exposed for inspection or servicing, the working space, if in a
passageway or general open space, shall be guarded.
(iii) Access and entrance to working space. At least one entrance shall be provided to give access to the working space about electric equipment.

(iv) Front working space. Where there are live parts normally exposed on the front of switchboards or motor control centers, the working space in front of such equipment shall not be less than 3 feet (914 mm).

(v) Headroom. The minimum headroom of working spaces about service equipment, switchboards, panel boards, or motor control centers shall be 6 feet 3 inches (1.91 m).
(2) Guarding of live parts.
(i) Except as required or permitted elsewhere in this Chapter, live parts of electric equipment operating at 50 volts or more shall be guarded against accidental contact by cabinets or other forms of
enclosures, or by any of the following means:
(A) By location in a room, vault, or similar enclosure that is accessible only to qualified persons.
194

(B) By partitions or screens so arranged that only qualified
persons will have access to the space within reach of the live parts. Any openings in such partitions or screens shall be so sized and located that persons are not likely to come into accidental contact with the live parts or to bring conducting
objects into contact with them.
(C) By location on a balcony, gallery, or platform so elevated and arranged as to exclude unqualified persons.
(D) By elevation of 8 feet (2.44 m) or more above the floor or
other working surface and so installed as to exclude unqualified persons. (ii) In locations where electric equipment would be exposed to
physical damage, enclosures or guards shall be so arranged and of
such strength as to prevent such damage. (iii) Entrances to rooms and other guarded locations containing exposed live parts shall be marked with conspicuous warning signs
forbidding unqualified persons to enter. (j) Over 600 volts, nominal. (1) General. Conductors and equipment used on circuits exceeding 600
volts, nominal, shall comply with all applicable provisions of paragraphs (a) through (g) of this section and with the following provisions which supplement or modify those requirements. The provisions of paragraphs (j)(2), (j)(3), and (j)(4) of this section do not apply to equipment on the supply side of the service conductors.
(2) Enclosure for electrical installations. Electrical installations in a vault, room, closet or in an area surrounded by a wall, screen, or fence, access to which is controlled by lock and key or other equivalent means, are considered to be accessible to qualified persons only. A wall, screen, or
fence less than 8 feet (2.44 m) in height is not considered adequate to prevent access unless it has other features that provide a degree of isolation equivalent to an 8-foot (2.44-m) fence. The entrances to all buildings, rooms or enclosures containing exposed live parts or exposed conductors operating at over 600 volts, nominal, shall be kept locked or
shall be under the observation of a qualified person at all times. (2) Enclosure for electrical installations. (continued) (i) Installations accessible to qualified persons only. Electrical
installations having exposed live parts shall be accessible to
195
qualified persons only and shall comply with the applicable
provisions of paragraph (j)(3) of this section.
(ii) Installations accessible to unqualified persons. Electrical installations that are open to unqualified persons shall be made with metal-enclosed equipment or shall be enclosed in a vault or in
an area, access to which is controlled by a lock. Metal-enclosed
switch-gear, unit substations, transformers, pull boxes, connection boxes, and other similar associated equipment shall be marked with appropriate caution signs. If equipment is exposed to physical damage from vehicular traffic, guards shall
be provided to prevent such damage. Ventilating or similar
openings in metal-enclosed equipment shall be designed so that foreign objects inserted through these openings will be deflected from energized parts.
(3) Workspace about equipment. Sufficient space shall be provided and
maintained about electric equipment to permit ready and safe operation and maintenance of such equipment. Where energized parts are exposed, the minimum clear workspace shall not be less than 6 feet 6 inches (1.98 m) high (measured vertically from the floor or platform), or less than 3 feet
(914 mm) wide (measured parallel to the equipment). The depth shall be as required in Table 2. The workspace shall be adequate to permit at least a 90-degree opening of doors or hinged panels. (i) Working space. The minimum clear working space in front of
electric equipment such as switchboards, control panels, switches, circuit breakers, motor controllers, relays, and similar equipment shall not be less than specified in Table 2 unless otherwise specified in this Chapter. Distances shall be measured from the live parts if they are exposed, or from the enclosure front or opening if
the live parts are enclosed. However, working space is not required in back of equipment such as dead front switchboards or control assemblies where there are no renewable or adjustable parts (such as fuses or switches) on the back and where all connections are accessible from locations other than the back.
Where rear access is required to work on d parts on the back of enclosed equipment, a minimum working space of 30 inches (762 mm) horizontally shall be provided.
TABLE 2 MINIMUM DEPTH OF CLEAR WORKING SPACE IN FRONT OF ELECTRIC EQUIPMENT
Nominal voltage to ground Conditions 1 (a) (b) (c)
196
601 to 2,500 .............................................. 2,501 to 9,000 ............................................
9,001 to 25,000 ...........................................
25,001 to 75 kV ........................................... Above 75 kV .............................................
Feet2 Feet2 Feet 2
3 4 5 4 5 6
5 6 9
6 8 10 8 10 12

1 Conditions (a), (b), and (c) are as follows: (a) Exposed live parts on one side and no live or grounded parts on the other side of the working space, or exposed live parts on both sides effectively guarded by insulating material. Insulated wire or insulated bus bars operating at not over 300 volts are not considered live
parts. (b) Exposed live parts on one side and grounded parts on the other side. Walls constructed of concrete, brick or tile are considered to be grounded surfaces. (c) Exposed live parts on both sides of the workspace (not guarded as provided in Condition (a)) with the operator between.
2 NOTE: For SI units: one foot = 0.3048 m. (ii) Lighting outlets and points of control. The lighting outlets shall be so arranged that persons changing lamps or making repairs on the lighting system will not be endangered by live parts or other
equipment. The points of control shall be so located that persons are not likely to come in contact with any live part or moving part of the equipment while turning on the lights.
(iii) Elevation of unguarded live parts. Unguarded live parts above working space shall be maintained at elevations not less than specified in Table 3.

TABLE 3 ELEVATION OF UNGUARDED ENERGIZED PARTS ABOVE
WORKING SPACE
Normal voltage between phases Minimum elevation

601 - 7,500 ............................................
7,501 - 35,000 ..........................................
8 feet 6 inches 1
9 feet
197
Over 35 kV ............................................. 9 feet + 0.37 inches per kV above 35 kV 1 NOTE: For SI units: one inch = 25.4 mm; one foot = 0.3048 m. (4) Entrance and access to workspace. At least one entrance not less than
24 inches (610 mm) wide and 6 feet 6 inches (1.98 m) high shall be provided to give access to the working space about electric equipment. On switchboard and control panels exceeding 48 inches (1.22 m) in width, there shall be one entrance at each end of such board where practicable. Where bare energized parts at any voltage or insulated energized parts
above 600 volts are located adjacent to such entrance, they shall be guarded. WIRING DESIGN AND PROTECTION.
(a) Use and identification of grounded and grounding conductors. (1) Identification of conductors. A conductor used as a grounded conductor shall be identifiable and distinguishable from all other conductors. A conductor used as an equipment grounding conductor shall
be identifiable and distinguishable from all other conductors. (2) Polarity of connections. No grounded conductor shall be attached to any terminal or lead so as to reverse designated polarity.
(3) Use of grounding terminals and devices. A grounding terminal or grounding-type device on a receptacle, cord connector, or attachment plug shall not be used for purposes other than grounding. (b) Branch circuits.
(1) Ground-fault protection. (i) General. NCOR shall use either ground fault circuit interrupters as specified in paragraph (b)(1)(ii) of this section or an assured equipment grounding conductor program as specified in paragraph
(b)(1)(iii) of this section to protect employees on construction sites. These requirements are in addition to any other requirements for equipment grounding conductors. (ii) Ground-fault circuit interrupters. All 120-volt, single-phase, 15-
and 20-ampere receptacle outlets on construction sites, which are not a part of the permanent wiring of the building or structure and which are in use by employees, shall have approved ground-fault circuit interrupters for personnel protection. Receptacles on a two-wire, single-phase portable or vehicle-mounted generator rated not
more than 5 kW, where the circuit conductors of the generator are
198
insulated from the generator frame and all other grounded surfaces,
need not be protected with ground-fault circuit interrupters.
(GCP1 Line item 1) (iii) Assured equipment grounding conductor program. NCOR shall establish and implement an assured equipment grounding conductor program on construction sites covering all cord sets,
receptacles which are not a part of the building or structure, and
equipment connected by cord and plug which are available for use or used by employees. This program shall comply with the following minimum requirements: (GCP2 Line item 2)
(A) A written description of the program, including the
specific procedures adopted by NCOR, shall be available at the jobsite for inspection and copying by the Assistant Secretary and any affected employee. (GCP3 Line item 3)
(B) NCOR shall designate one or more competent persons
to implement the program.
(GCP4 Line item 4) (C) Each cord set, attachment cap, plug and receptacle of cord sets, and any equipment connected by cord and plug,
except cord sets and receptacles which are fixed and not exposed to damage, shall be visually inspected before each day's use for external defects, such as deformed or missing pins or insulation damage, and for indications of possible internal damage. Adopted equipment found damaged or
defective shall not be used until repaired.
(GCP5 Line item 5) (D) The following tests shall be performed on all cord sets, receptacles which are not a part of the permanent wiring of the building or structure, and cord- and plug-connected
equipment required to be grounded:

(1) All equipment grounding conductors shall be tested for continuity and shall be electrically continuous.

(2) Each receptacle and attachment cap or plug shall be tested for correct attachment of the equipment grounding conductor. The equipment grounding conductor shall be connected to its proper terminal.
(E) All required tests shall be performed:
(1) Before first use;
(2) Before equipment is returned to service following any repairs;
199

(3) Before equipment is used after any incident which
can be reasonably suspected to have caused damage (for example, when a cord set is run over); and
(4) At intervals not to exceed 3 months, except that
cord sets and receptacles which are fixed and not
exposed to damage shall be tested at intervals not exceeding 6 months. (F) Tests performed as required in this paragraph shall be
recorded. This test record shall identify each receptacle,
cord set, and cord- and plug-connected equipment that passed the test and shall indicate the last date it was tested or the interval for which it was tested. This record shall be kept by means of logs, color coding, or other effective means
and shall be maintained until replaced by a more current
record. The record shall be made available on the jobsite for inspection by the Assistant Secretary and any affected employee. (GCP6 Line item 6)
(G) NCOR shall not make available or permit the use by employees of any equipment which has not met the requirements of this paragraph (b)(1)(iii) of this section.
(2) Outlet devices. Outlet devices shall have an ampere rating not less than the load to be served and shall comply with the following: (i) Single receptacles. A single receptacle installed on an individual branch circuit shall have an ampere rating of not less than that of
the branch circuit. (ii) Two or more receptacles. Where connected to a branch circuit supplying two or more receptacles or outlets, receptacle ratings shall conform to the values listed in Table 4.
(iii) Receptacles used for the connection of motors. The rating of an attachment plug or receptacle used for cord- and plug-connection of a motor to a branch circuit shall not exceed 15 amperes at 125 volts or 10 amperes at 250 volts if individual overload protection is
omitted. TABLE 4 RECEPTACLE RATINGS FOR VARIOUS SIZE CIRCUITS
Circuit rating amperes Receptacle rating amperes 15 ................................................... Not over 15 20 ................................................... 15 or 20 30 ................................................... 30
200
40 ................................................... 40 or 50 50 ................................................... 50
(c) Outside conductors and lamps.
(1) 600 volts, nominal, or less. Paragraphs (c)(1) (i) through (c)(1)(iv) of this section apply to branch circuit, feeder, and service conductors rated 600 volts, nominal, or less and run outdoors as open conductors. (i) Conductors on poles. Conductors supported on poles shall
provide a horizontal climbing space not less than the following: (A) Power conductors below communication conductors – 30 inches (762 mm).
(B) Power conductors alone or above communication conductors: 300 volts or less – 24 inches (610 mm); more than 300 volts – 30 inches (762 mm). (C) Communication conductors below power conductors:
with power conductors 300 volts or less – 24 inches (610 mm); more than 300 volts – 30 inches (762 mm). (ii) Clearance from ground. Open conductors shall conform to the following minimum clearances:
(A) 10 feet (3.05 m) – above finished grade, sidewalks, or from any platform or projection from which they might be reached.
(B) 12 feet (3.66 m) – over areas subject to vehicular traffic other than truck traffic. (C) 15 feet (4.57 m) – over areas other than those specified in paragraph (c) (1)(ii)(D) of this section that are subject to
truck traffic. (D) 18 feet (5.49 m) – over public streets, alleys, roads, and driveways.
(iii) Clearance from building openings. Conductors shall have a clearance of at least 3 feet (914 mm) from windows, doors, fire escapes, or similar locations. Conductors run above the top level of a window are considered to be out of reach from that window and, therefore, do not have to
be 3 feet (914 mm) away.
201
(iv) Clearance over roofs. Conductors above roof space accessible
to employees on foot shall have a clearance from the highest point
of the roof surface of not less than 8 feet (2.44 m) vertical clearance for insulated conductors, not less than 10 feet (3.05 m) vertical or diagonal clearance for covered conductors, and not less than 15 feet (4.57
m) for bare conductors, except that:
(A) Where the roof space is also accessible to vehicular traffic, the vertical clearance shall not be less than 18 feet (5.49 m), or

(B) Where the roof space is not normally accessible to employees on foot, fully insulated conductors shall have a vertical or diagonal clearance of not less than 3 feet (914 mm), or

(C) Where the voltage between conductors is 300 volts or less and the roof has a slope of not less than 4 inches (102 mm) in 12 inches (305 mm), the clearance from roofs shall be at least 3 feet (914 mm), or
(D) Where the voltage between conductors is 300 volts or less and the conductors do not pass over more than 4 feet (1.22 m) of the overhang portion of the roof and they are terminated at a through-the-roof raceway or support, the
clearance from roofs shall be at least 18 inches (457 mm). (2) Location of outdoor lamps. Lamps for outdoor lighting shall be located below all live conductors, transformers, or other electric equipment, unless such equipment is controlled by a disconnecting means that can be locked
in the open position or unless adequate clearances or other safeguards are provided for re-lamping operations.
(d) Services. (1) Disconnecting means.
(i) General. Means shall be provided to disconnect all conductors in a building or other structure from the service-entrance conductors. The disconnecting means shall plainly indicate whether it is in the open or closed position and shall be installed at a readily accessible location
nearest the point of entrance of the service-entrance conductors.
202
(ii) Simultaneous opening of poles. Each service disconnecting means
shall simultaneously disconnect all ungrounded conductors.
(2) Services over 600 volts, nominal. The following additional requirements apply to services over 600 volts, nominal. (i) Guarding. Service-entrance conductors installed as open wires shall
be guarded to make them accessible only to qualified persons.
(ii) Warning signs. Signs warning of high voltage shall be posted where unauthorized employees might come in contact with live parts.
(e) Overcurrent protection.
(1) 600 volts, nominal, or less. The following requirements apply to overcurrent protection of circuits rated 600 volts, nominal, or less.
(i) Protection of conductors and equipment. Conductors and
equipment shall be protected from overcurrent in accordance with their ability to safely conduct current. Conductors shall have sufficient ampacity to carry the load.
(ii) Grounded conductors. Except for motor-running overload protection, over-current devices shall not interrupt the continuity of the grounded conductor unless all conductors of the circuit are opened simultaneously.
(iii) Disconnection of fuses and thermal cutouts. Except for devices provided for current-limiting on the supply side of the service disconnecting means, all cartridge fuses which are accessible to other than qualified persons and all fuses and thermal cutouts on circuits over 150 volts to ground shall be provided with
disconnecting means. This disconnecting means shall be installed so that the fuse or thermal cutout can be disconnected from its supply without disrupting service to equipment and circuits unrelated to those protected by the over-current device.
(iv) Location in or on premises. Over-current devices shall be readily accessible. Overcurrent devices shall not be located where they could create an employee safety hazard by being exposed to physical damage or located in the vicinity of easily ignitible material.
(v) Arcing or suddenly moving parts. Fuses and circuit breakers shall be so located or shielded that employees will not be burned or otherwise injured by their operation. (vi) Circuit breakers.

203
(A) Circuit breakers shall clearly indicate whether they are in
the open (off) or closed (on) position.
(B) Where circuit breaker handles on switchboards are operated vertically rather than horizontally or rotationally, the up position of the handle shall be the closed (on) position.

(C) If used as switches in 120-volt, fluorescent lighting circuits, circuit breakers shall be marked "SWD." (2) Over 600 volts, nominal. Feeders and branch circuits over 600 volts,
nominal, shall have short-circuit protection.
(f) Grounding. Paragraphs (f)(1) through (f)(11) of this section contain grounding requirements for systems, circuits, and equipment.
(1) Systems to be grounded. The following systems which supply
premises wiring shall be grounded: (i) Three-wire DC systems. All 3-wire DC systems shall have their neutral conductor grounded.
(ii) Two-wire DC systems. Two-wire DC systems operating at over 50 volts through 300 volts between conductors shall be grounded unless they are rectifier-derived from an AC system complying with paragraphs (f)(1)(iii), (f)(1)(iv), and (f)(1)(v) of this section.
(iii) AC circuits, less than 50 volts. AC circuits of less than 50 volts shall be grounded if they are installed as overhead conductors outside of buildings or if they are supplied by transformers and the transformer primary supply system is ungrounded or exceeds 150
volts to ground. (iv) AC systems, 50 volts to 1000 volts. AC systems of 50 volts to 1000 volts shall be grounded under any of the following conditions, unless exempted by paragraph (f)(1)(v) of this section:
(A) If the system can be so grounded that the maximum voltage to ground on the ungrounded conductors does not exceed 150 volts;
(B) If the system is nominally rated 480Y/277 volt, 3-phase, 4-wire in which the neutral is used as a circuit conductor; (C) If the system is nominally rated 240/120 volt, 3-phase, 4-wire in which the midpoint of one phase is used as a circuit
conductor; or
204
(D) If a service conductor is uninsulated.

(v) Exceptions. AC systems of 50 volts to 1000 volts are not required to be grounded if the system is separately derived and is supplied by a transformer that has a primary voltage rating less than 1000 volts, provided all of the following conditions are met:

(A) The system is used exclusively for control circuits, (B) The conditions of maintenance and supervision assure that only qualified persons will service the installation,

(C) Continuity of control power is required, and (D) Ground detectors are installed on the control system.
(2) Separately derived systems. Where paragraph (f)(1) of this section
requires grounding of wiring systems whose power is derived from generator, transformer, or converter windings and has no direct electrical connection, including a solidly connected grounded circuit conductor, to supply conductors originating in another system, paragraph (f)(5) of this
section shall also apply. (3) Portable and vehicle-mounted generators. (i) Portable generators. Under the following conditions, the frame of
a portable generator need not be grounded and may serve as the grounding electrode for a system supplied by the generator: (A) The generator supplies only equipment mounted on the generator and/or cord- and plug-connected equipment
through receptacles mounted on the generator, and (B) The noncurrent-carrying metal parts of equipment and the equipment grounding conductor terminals of the receptacles are bonded to the generator frame.
(ii) Vehicle-mounted generators. Under the following conditions the frame of a vehicle may serve as the grounding electrode for a system supplied by a generator located on the vehicle:
(A) The frame of the generator is bonded to the vehicle frame, and (B) The generator supplies only equipment located on the vehicle and/or cord-and plug-connected equipment through
receptacles mounted on the vehicle or on the generator, and
205
(C) The noncurrent-carrying metal parts of equipment and
the equipment grounding conductor terminals of the
receptacles are bonded to the generator frame, and (D) The system complies with all other provisions of this section.

(iii) Neutral conductor bonding. A neutral conductor shall be bonded to the generator frame if the generator is a component of a separately derived system. No other conductor need be bonded to the generator frame.

(4) Conductors to be grounded. For AC premises wiring systems the identified conductor shall be grounded. (5) Grounding connections.

(i) Grounded system. For a grounded system, a grounding electrode conductor shall be used to connect both the equipment grounding conductor and the grounded circuit conductor to the grounding electrode. Both the equipment grounding conductor and
the grounding electrode conductor shall be connected to the grounded circuit conductor on the supply side of the service disconnecting means, or on the supply side of the system disconnecting means or overcurrent devices if the system is separately derived.
(ii) Ungrounded systems. For an un-grounded service-supplied system, the equipment grounding conductor shall be connected to the grounding electrode conductor at the service equipment. For an ungrounded separately derived system, the equipment grounding
conductor shall be connected to the grounding electrode conductor at, or ahead of, the system disconnecting means or overcurrent devices. (6) Grounding path. The path to ground from circuits, equipment, and
enclosures shall be permanent and continuous. (7) Supports, enclosures, and equipment to be grounded. (i) Supports and enclosures for conductors. Metal cable trays, metal
raceways, and metal enclosures for conductors shall be grounded, except that: (A) Metal enclosures such as sleeves that are used to protect cable assemblies from physical damage need not be
grounded; and
206
(B) Metal enclosures for conductors added to existing
installations of open wire, knob-and-tube wiring, and non-
metallic- sheathed cable need not be grounded if all of the following conditions are met:
(1) Runs are less than 25 feet (7.62 m);

(2) Enclosures are free from probable contact with ground, grounded metal, metal laths, or other conductive materials; and
(3) Enclosures are guarded against employee
contact. (ii) Service equipment enclosures. Metal enclosures for service equipment shall be grounded.

(iii) Fixed equipment. Exposed noncurrent-carrying metal parts of fixed equipment which may become energized shall be grounded under any of the following conditions:
(A) If within 8 feet (2.44 m) vertically or5 feet (1.52 m) horizontally of ground or grounded metal objects and subject to employee contact. (B) If located in a wet or damp location and subject to
employee contact. (C) If in electrical contact with metal. (D) If in a hazardous (classified) location.
(E) If supplied by a metal-clad, metal-sheathed, or grounded metal raceway wiring method. (F) If equipment operates with any terminal at over 150 volts
to ground; however, the following need not be grounded:

(1) Enclosures for switches or circuit breakers used for other than service equipment and accessible to qualified persons only;

(2) Metal frames of electrically heated appliances which are permanently and effectively insulated from ground; and
(3) The cases of distribution apparatus such as transformers and capacitors mounted on wooden
207
poles at a height exceeding 8 feet (2.44 m) above
ground or grade level.
(iv) Equipment connected by cord and plug. Under any of the conditions described in paragraphs (f)(7)(iv)(A) through (f)(7)(iv)(C) of this section, exposed noncurrent-carrying metal parts of cord-
and plug-connected equipment which may become energized shall
be grounded: (A) If in a hazardous (classified) location
(B) If operated at over 150 volts to ground, except for
guarded motors and metal frames of electrically heated appliances if the appliance frames are permanently and effectively insulated from ground.
(C) If the equipment is one of the types listed in paragraphs
(f)(7)(iv)(C)(1) through (f)(7)(iv)(C)(5) of this section. However, even though the equipment may be one of these types, it need not be grounded if it is exempted by paragraph (f)(7)(iv)(C)(6).

(1) Hand held motor-operated tools;

(2) Cord- and plug-connected equipment used in damp or wet locations or by employees standing on
the ground or on metal floors or working inside of metal tanks or boilers;

(3) Portable and mobile X-ray and associated equipment;

(4) Tools likely to be used in wet and/or conductive locations;
(5) Portable hand lamps.

(6) Tools likely to be used in wet and/or conductive locations need not be grounded if supplied through an isolating transformer with an ungrounded secondary of not over 50 volts. Listed or labeled portable tools
(6) continued and appliances protected by a system of double insulation, or its equivalent, need not be grounded. If such a system is employed, the equipment shall be distinctively marked to indicate that the tool or appliance utilizes a system of double
insulation.
208
(v) Nonelectrical equipment. The metal parts of the following
nonelectrical equipment shall be grounded: Frames and tracks of
electrically operated cranes; frames of non-electrically driven elevator cars to which electric conductors are attached; hand-operated metal shifting ropes or cables of electric elevators, and metal partitions, grill work, and similar metal enclosures around
equipment of over IkV between conductors.
(8) Methods of grounding equipment. (i) With circuit conductors. Noncurrent-carrying metal parts of fixed
equipment, if required to be grounded by this Chapter, shall be
grounded by an equipment grounding conductor which is contained within the same raceway, cable, or cord, or runs with or encloses the circuit conductors. For DC circuits only, the equipment grounding conductor may be run separately from the circuit
conductors.
(ii) Grounding conductor. A conductor used for grounding fixed or movable equipment shall have capacity to conduct safely any fault current which may be imposed on it.
(iii) Equipment considered effectively grounded. Electric equipment is considered to be effectively grounded if it is secured to, and in electrical contact with, a metal rack or structure that is provided for its support and the metal rack or structure is grounded by the
method specified for the noncurrent-carrying metal parts of fixed equipment in paragraph (f)(8)(i) of this section. Metal car frames supported by metal hoisting cables attached to or running over metal sheaves or drums of grounded elevator machines are also considered to be effectively grounded.
(9) Bonding. If bonding conductors are used to assure electrical continuity, they shall have the capacity to conduct any fault current which may be imposed.
(10) Made electrodes. If made electrodes are used, they shall be free from nonconductive coatings, such as paint or enamel; and, if practicable, they shall be embedded below permanent moisture level. A single electrode consisting of a rod, pipe or plate which has a resistance to ground greater than 25 ohms shall be augmented by one additional electrode installed no
closer than 6 feet (1.83 m) to the first electrode. (11) Grounding of systems and circuits of 1000 volts and over (high voltage). (i) General. If high voltage systems are grounded, they shall comply
with all applicable provisions of paragraphs (f)(1) through (f)(10) of
209
this section as supplemented and modified by this paragraph
f)(11).
(ii) Grounding of systems supplying portable or mobile equipment. Systems supplying portable or mobile high voltage equipment, other than substations installed on a temporary basis, shall comply
with the following:
(A) Portable and mobile high voltage equipment shall be supplied from a system having its neutral grounded through an impedance. If a delta-connected high voltage system is
used to supply the equipment, a system neutral shall be
derived. (B) Exposed noncurrent-carrying metal parts of portable and mobile equipment shall be connected by an equipment
grounding conductor to the point at which the system neutral
impedance is grounded. (C) Ground-fault detection and relaying shall be provided to automatically any high voltage system component which
has developed a ground fault. The continuity of the equipment grounding conductor shall be continuously monitored so as to automatically the high voltage feeder to the portable equipment upon loss of continuity of the equipment grounding conductor.
(D) The grounding electrode to which the portable or mobile equipment system neutral impedance is connected shall be isolated from and separated in the ground by at least 20 feet (6.1 m) from any other system or equipment grounding
electrode, and there shall be no direct connection between the grounding electrodes, such as buried pipe, fence or like objects. (iii) Grounding of equipment. All non-current- carrying metal parts of
portable equipment and fixed equipment including their associated fences, housings, enclosures, and supporting structures shall be grounded. However, equipment which is guarded by location and isolated from ground need not be grounded. Additionally, pole-mounted distribution apparatus at a height exceeding 8 feet (2.44
m) above ground or grade level need not be rounded. WIRING METHODS, COMPONENTS, AND EQUIPMENT FOR GENERAL USE.
210
(a) Wiring methods. The provisions of this paragraph do not apply to conductors
which form an integral part of equipment such as motors, controllers, motor
control centers and like equipment. (1) General requirements.

(i) Electrical continuity of metal raceways and enclosures. Metal raceways, cable armor, and other metal enclosures for conductors shall be metallically joined together into a continuous electric conductor and shall be so connected to all boxes, fittings, and
cabinets as to provide effective electrical continuity.
(ii) Wiring in ducts. No wiring systems of any type shall be installed in ducts used to transport dust, loose stock or flammable vapors.
No wiring system of any type shall be installed in any duct used for
vapor removal or in any shaft containing only such ducts. (2) Temporary wiring.
(i) Scope. The provisions of paragraph (a)(2) of this section apply to
temporary electrical power and lighting wiring methods which may be of a class less than would be required for a permanent installation. Except as specifically modified in paragraph (a)(2) of this section, all other requirements of this Chapter for permanent
wiring shall apply to temporary wiring installations. Temporary
wiring shall be removed immediately upon completion of construction or the purpose for which the wiring was installed. (ii) General requirements for temporary wiring.

(A) Feeders shall originate in a distribution center. The conductors shall be run as multi-conductor cord or cable assemblies or within raceways; or, where not subject to physical damage, they may be run as open conductors on
insulators not more than 10 feet (3.05 m) apart.
(B) Branch circuits shall originate in a power outlet or panel board. Conductors shall be run as multi-conductor cord or cable assemblies or open conductors, or shall be run in
raceways. All conductors shall be protected by overcurrent
devices at their ampacity. Runs of open conductors shall be located where the conductors will not be subject to physical damage, and the conductors shall be fastened at intervals not exceeding 10 feet (3.05 m). No branch-circuit conductors
shall be laid on the floor. Each branch circuit that supplies
receptacles or fixed equipment shall contain a separate
211
equipment grounding conductor if the branch circuit is run as
open conductors.
(C) Receptacles shall be of the grounding type. Unless installed in a complete metallic raceway, each branch circuit shall contain a separate equipment grounding conductor,
and all receptacles shall be electrically connected to the
grounding conductor. Receptacles for uses other than temporary lighting shall not be installed on branch circuits which supply temporary lighting. Receptacles shall not be connected to the same ungrounded conductor of multiwire
circuits which supply temporary lighting.
(D) Disconnecting switches or plug connectors shall be installed to permit the disconnection of all ungrounded conductors of each temporary circuit.

(E) All lamps for general illumination shall be protected from accidental contact or breakage. Metal-case sockets shall be grounded.
(F) Temporary lights shall not be suspended by their electric cords unless cords and lights are designed for this means of suspension. (G) Portable electric lighting used in wet and/or other
conductive locations, as for example, drums, tanks, and vessels, shall be operated at 12 volts or less. However, 120-volt lights may be used if protected by a ground-fault circuit interrupter.
(H) A box shall be used wherever a change is made to a raceway system or a cable system which is metal clad or metal sheathed. (I) Flexible cords and cables shall be protected from
damage. Sharp corners and projections shall be avoided. Flexible cords and cables may pass through doorways or other pinch points, if protection is provided to avoid damage. (J) Extension cord sets used with portable electric tools and
appliances shall be of three-wire type and shall be designed for hard or extra-hard usage. Flexible cords used with temporary and portable lights shall be designed for hard or extra-hard usage.
Note: The National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70, in Article 400, Table 400-4, lists various types of flexible cords, some
212
of which are noted as being designed for hard or extra-hard
usage. Examples of these types of flexible cords include
hard service cord (types S, ST, SO, STO) and junior hard service cord (types SJ, SJO, SJT, SJTO). (iii) Guarding. For temporary wiring over 600 volts, nominal, fencing, barriers, or other effective means shall be provided to
prevent access of other than authorized and qualified personnel.
(b) Cabinets, boxes, and fittings. (1) Conductors entering boxes, cabinets, or fittings. Conductors entering
boxes, cabinets, or fittings shall be protected from abrasion, and openings
through which conductors enter shall be effectively closed. Unused openings in cabinets, boxes, and fittings shall also be effectively closed. (2) Covers and canopies. All pull boxes, junction boxes, and fittings shall
be provided with covers. If metal covers are used, they shall be grounded.
In energized installations each outlet box shall have a cover, faceplate, or fixture canopy. Covers of outlet boxes having holes through which flexible cord pendants pass shall be provided with bushings designed for the purpose or shall have smooth, well-rounded surfaces on which the cords
may bear. (3) Pull and junction boxes for systems over 600 volts, nominal. In addition to other requirements in this section for pull and junction boxes, the following shall apply to these boxes for systems over 600 volts, nominal:
(i) Complete enclosure. Boxes shall provide a complete enclosure for the contained conductors or cables. (ii) Covers. Boxes shall be closed by covers securely fastened in
place. Underground box covers that weigh over 100 pounds (43.6 kg) meet this requirement. Covers for boxes shall be permanently marked "HIGH VOLTAGE." The marking shall be on the outside of the box cover and shall be readily visible and legible.
(c) Knife switches. Single-throw knife switches shall be so connected that the blades are dead when the switch is in the open position. Single-throw knife switches shall be so placed that gravity will not tend to close them. Single-throw knife switches approved for use in the inverted position shall be provided with a locking device that will ensure that the blades remain in the open position when
so set. Double-throw knife switches may be mounted so that the throw will be either vertical or horizontal. However, if the throw is vertical, a locking device shall be provided to ensure that the blades remain in the open position when so set.
(d) Switchboards and panel boards. Switchboards that have any exposed live parts shall be located in permanently dry locations and accessible only to
213
qualified persons. Panel boards shall be mounted in cabinets, cutout boxes, or
enclosures designed for the purpose and shall be dead front. However, panel
boards other than the dead front externally-operable type are permitted where accessible only to qualified persons. Exposed blades of knife switches shall be dead when open. (e) Enclosures for damp or wet locations.

(1) Cabinets, fittings, and boxes. Cabinets, cutout boxes, fittings, boxes, and panel board enclosures in damp or wet locations shall be installed so as to prevent moisture or water from entering and accumulating within the enclosures. In wet locations the enclosures shall be
weatherproof.
(2) Switches and circuit breakers. Switches, circuit breakers, and switchboards installed in wet locations shall be enclosed in weatherproof enclosures.

(f) Conductors for general wiring. All conductors used for general wiring shall be insulated unless otherwise permitted in this Chapter. The conductor insulation shall be of a type that is suitable for the voltage, operating temperature, and location of use. Insulated conductors shall be distinguishable by appropriate color
or other means as being grounded conductors, ungrounded conductors, or equipment grounding conductors. (g) Flexible cords and cables.
(1) Use of flexible cords and cables. (i) Permitted uses. Flexible cords and cables shall be suitable for conditions of use and location. Flexible cords and cables shall be used only for:
(A) Pendants; (B) Wiring of fixtures;
(C) Connection of portable lamps or appliances; (D) Elevator cables; (E) Wiring of cranes and hoists;
(F) Connection of stationary equipment to facilitate their frequent interchange; (G) Prevention of the transmission of noise or vibration; or

214
(H) Appliances where the fastening means and mechanical
connections are designed to permit removal for maintenance
and repair. (ii) Attachment plugs for cords. If used as permitted in paragraphs
(g)(1)(i)(C), (g)(1) (i)(F), or (g)(1)(i)(H) of this section, the flexible
cord shall be equipped with an attachment plug and shall be energized from a receptacle outlet. (iii) Prohibited uses. Unless necessary for a use permitted in
paragraph (g)(1)(i) of this section, flexible cords and cables shall
not be used: (A) As a substitute for the fixed wiring of a structure;
(B) Where run through holes in walls, ceilings, or floors;
(C) Where run through doorways, windows, or similar openings, except as permitted in paragraph (a)(2)(ii)(A) of this section;
(D) Where attached to building surfaces; or (E) Where concealed behind building walls, ceilings, or floors.
(2) Identification, splices, and terminations. (i) Identification. A conductor of a flexible cord or cable that is used as a grounded conductor or an equipment grounding conductor
shall be distinguishable from other conductors. (ii) Marking. Type SJ, SJO, SJT, SJTO, S, SO, ST, and STO cords shall not be used unless durably marked on the surface with the type designation, size, and number of conductors.
(iii) Splices. Flexible cords shall be used only in continuous lengths without splice or tap. Hard service flexible cords No. 12 or larger may be repaired if spliced so that the splice retains the insulation, outer sheath properties, and usage characteristics of the cord being
spliced. (iv) Strain relief. Flexible cords shall be connected to devices and fittings so that strain relief is provided which will prevent pull from being directly transmitted to joints or terminal screws.

215
(v) Cords passing through holes. Flexible cords and cables shall be
protected by bushings or fittings where passing through holes in
covers, outlet boxes, or similar enclosures. (h) Portable cables over 600 volts, nominal. Multiconductor portable cable for use in supplying power to portable or mobile equipment at over 600 volts, nominal,
shall consist of No. 8 or larger conductors employing flexible stranding. Cables
operated at over 2000 volts shall be shielded for the purpose of confining the voltage stresses to the insulation. Grounding conductors shall be provided. Connectors for these cables shall be of a locking type with provisions to prevent their opening or closing while energized. Strain relief shall be provided at
connections and terminations. Portable cables shall not be operated with splices
unless the splices are of the permanent molded, vulcanized, or other equivalent type. Termination enclosures shall be marked with a high voltage hazard warning, and terminations shall be accessible only to authorized and qualified personnel.

(i) Fixture wires. (1) General. Fixture wires shall be suitable for the voltage, temperature, and location of use. A fixture wire which is used as a grounded conductor
shall be identified. (2) Uses permitted. Fixture wires may be used: (i) For installation in lighting, fixtures and in similar equipment
where enclosed or protected and not subject to bending or twisting in use; or (ii) For connecting lighting fixtures to the branch-circuit conductors supplying the fixtures.
(3) Uses not permitted. Fixture wires shall not be used as branch-circuit conductors except as permitted for Class 1 power-limited circuits. (j) Equipment for general use.
(1) Lighting fixtures, lampholders, lamps, and receptacles. (i) Live parts. Fixtures, lampholders, lamps, rosettes, and receptacles shall have no live parts normally exposed to employee
contact. However, rosettes and cleat-type lamp holders and receptacles located at least 8 feet (2.44 m) above the floor may have exposed parts. (ii) Support. Fixtures, lampholders, rosettes, and receptacles shall
be securely supported. A fixture that weighs more than 6 pounds
216
(2.72 kg) or exceeds 16 inches (406 mm) in any dimension shall
not be supported by the screw shell of a lampholder.
(iii) Portable lamps. Portable lamps shall be wired with flexible cord and an attachment plug of the polarized or grounding type. If the portable lamp uses an Edison-based lampholder, the grounded
conductor shall be identified and attached to the screw shell and
the identified blade of the attachment plug. In addition, portable handlamps shall comply with the following: (A) Metal shell, paperlined lampholders shall not be used;

(B) Handlamps shall be equipped with a handle of molded composition or other insulating material; (C) Handlamps shall be equipped with a substantial guard
attached to the lampholder or handle;
(D) Metallic guards shall be grounded by the means of an equipment grounding conductor run within the power supply cord.
(iv) Lampholders. Lampholders of the screw-shell type shall be installed for use as lampholders only. Lampholders installed in wet or damp locations shall be of the weatherproof type.
(v) Fixtures. Fixtures installed in wet or damp locations shall be identified for the purpose and shall be installed so that water cannot enter or accumulate in wireways, lampholders, or other electrical parts.
(2) Receptacles, cord connectors, and attachment plugs (caps). (i) Configuration. Receptacles, cord connectors, and attachment plugs shall be constructed so that no receptacle or cord connector will accept an attachment plug with a different voltage or current
rating than that for which the device is intended. However, a 20-ampere T-slot receptacle or cord connector may accept a 15-ampere attachment plug of the same voltage rating. Receptacles connected to circuits having different volt-ages, frequencies, or types of current (ac or dc) on the same premises shall be of such
design that the attachment plugs used on these circuits are not interchangeable. (ii) Damp and wet locations. A receptacle installed in a wet or damp location shall be designed for the location.

217

(3) Appliances.
(i) Live parts. Appliances, other than those in which the current-carrying parts at high temperatures are necessarily exposed, shall have no live parts normally exposed to employee contact.

(ii) Disconnecting means. A means shall be provided to disconnect each appliance. (iii) Rating. Each appliance shall be marked with its rating in volts
and amperes or volts and watts.
(4) Motors. This paragraph applies to motors, motor circuits, and controllers.
(i) In sight from. If specified that one piece of equipment shall be "in
sight from" another piece of equipment, one shall be visible and not more than 50 feet (15.2 m) from the other. (ii) Disconnecting means.
(A) A disconnecting means shall be located in sight from the controller location. The controller disconnecting means for motor branch circuits over 600 volts, nominal, may be out of sight of the controller, if the controller is marked with a
warning label giving the location and identification of the disconnecting means which is to be locked in the open position. (B) The disconnecting means shall disconnect the motor and
the controller from all ungrounded supply conductors and shall be so designed that no pole can be operated independently. (C) If a motor and the driven machinery are not in sight from
the controller location, the installation shall comply with one of the following conditions:

(1) The controller disconnecting means shall be capable of being locked in the open position.

(2) A manually operable switch that will disconnect the motor from its source of supply shall be placed in sight from the motor location.
(D) The disconnecting means shall plainly indicate whether it is in the open (off) or closed (on) position.
218
(E) The disconnecting means shall be readily accessible. If
more than one disconnect is provided for the same
equipment, only one need be readily accessible. (F) An individual disconnecting means shall be provided for each motor, but a single disconnecting means may be used
for a group of motors under any one of the following
conditions:

(1) If a number of motors drive special parts of a single machine or piece of apparatus, such as a metal
or woodworking machine, crane, or hoist;

(2) If a group of motors is under the protection of one set of branch-circuit protective devices; or
(3) If a group of motors is in a single room in sight
from the location of the disconnecting means. (iii) Motor overload, short-circuit, and ground-fault protection. Motors, motor-control apparatus, and motor branch-circuit
conductors shall be protected against overheating due to motor overloads or failure to start, and against short-circuits or ground faults. These provisions do not require overload protection that will stop a motor where a shutdown is likely to introduce additional or increased hazards, as in the case of fire pumps, or where
continued operation of a motor is necessary for a safe shutdown of equipment or process and motor overload sensing devices are connected to a supervised alarm. (iv) Protection of live parts – all voltages.
(A) Stationary motors having commutators, collectors, and brush rigging located inside of motor end brackets and not conductively connected to supply circuits operating at more than 150 volts to ground need not have such parts guarded.
Exposed live parts of motors and controllers operating at 50 volts or more between terminals shall be guarded against accidental contact by any of the following:
(1) By installation in a room or enclosure that is
accessible only to qualified persons;
(2) By installation on a balcony, gallery, or platform, so elevated and arranged as to exclude unqualified persons; or

219
(3) By elevation 8 feet (2.44 m) or more above the
floor.
(B) Where live parts of motors or controllers operating at over 150 volts to ground are guarded against accidental contact only by location, and where adjustment or other
attendance may be necessary during the operation of the
apparatus, insulating mats or platforms shall be provided so that the attendant cannot readily touch live parts unless standing on the mats or platforms.
(5) Transformers.
(i) Application. The following paragraphs cover the installation of all transformers, except:
(A) Current transformers;
(B) Dry-type transformers installed as a component part of other apparatus;
(C) Transformers which are an integral part of an X-ray, high frequency, or electrostatic-coating apparatus; (D) Transformers used with Class 2 and Class 3 circuits, sign and outline lighting, electric discharge lighting, and
power-limited fire-protective signaling circuits. (ii) Operating voltage. The operating voltage of exposed live parts of transformer installations shall be indicated by warning signs or visible markings on the equipment or structure.
(iii) Transformers over 35 kV. Dry-type, high fire point liquid-insulated, and askarel-insulated transformers installed indoors and rated over 35 kV shall be in a vault.
(iv) Oil-insulated transformers. If they present a fire hazard to employees, oil-insulated transformers installed indoors shall be in a vault. (v) Fire protection. Combustible material, combustible buildings and
parts of buildings, fire escapes, and door and window openings shall be safeguarded from fires which may originate in oil-insulated transformers attached to or adjacent to a building or combustible material.
(vi) Transformer vaults. Transformer vaults shall be constructed so as to contain fire and combustible liquids within the vault and to
220
prevent unauthorized access. Locks and latches shall be so
arranged that a vault door can be readily opened from the inside.
(vii) Pipes and ducts. Any pipe or duct system foreign to the vault installation shall not enter or pass through a transformer vault. (viii) Material storage. Materials shall not be stored in transformer
vaults.
(6) Capacitors. (i) Drainage of stored charge. All capacitors, except surge
capacitors or capacitors included as a component part of other
apparatus, shall be provided with an automatic means of draining the stored charge and maintaining the discharged state after the capacitor is disconnected from its source of supply.
(ii) Over 600 volts. Capacitors rated over 600 volts, nominal, shall
comply with the following additional requirements: (A) Isolating or disconnecting switches (with no interrupting rating) shall be interlocked with the load interrupting device
or shall be provided with prominently displayed caution signs to prevent switching load current. (B) For series capacitors the proper switching shall be assured by use of at least one of the following:

(1) Mechanically sequenced isolating and bypass switches,
(2) Interlocks, or

(3) Switching procedure prominently displayed at the switching location. SPECIFIC PURPOSE EQUIPMENT AND INSTALLATIONS.
(a) Cranes and hoists. This paragraph applies to the installation of electric equipment and wiring used in connection with cranes, monorail hoists, hoists, and all runways. (1) Disconnecting means.
(i) Runway conductor disconnecting means. A readily accessible disconnecting means shall be provided between the runway contact conductors and the power supply. (ii) Disconnecting means for cranes and monorail hoists. A
disconnecting means, capable of being locked in the open position,
221
shall be provided in the leads from the runway contact conductors
or other power supply on any crane or monorail hoist.
(A) If this additional disconnecting means is not readily accessible from the crane or monorail hoist operating station, means shall be provided at the operating station to
open the power circuit to all motors of the crane or monorail
hoist. (B) The additional disconnect may be omitted if a monorail hoist or hand-propelled crane bridge installation meets all of
the following:

(1) The unit is floor controlled;
(2) The unit is within view of the power supply
disconnecting means; and

(3) No fixed work platform has been provided for servicing the unit.
(2) Control. A limit switch or other device shall be provided to prevent the load block from passing the safe upper limit of travel of any hoisting mechanism. (3) Clearance. The dimension of the working space in the direction of
access to live parts which may require examination, adjustment, servicing, or maintenance while alive shall be a minimum of 2 feet 6 inches (762 mm). Where controls are enclosed in cabinets, the door(s) shall open at least 90 degrees or be removable, or the installation shall provide equivalent access.
(4) Grounding. All exposed metal parts of cranes, monorail hoists, hoists and accessories including pendant controls shall be metallically joined together into a continuous electrical conductor so that the entire crane or hoist will be grounded in accordance with §1926.404(f). Moving parts,
other than removable accessories or attachments, having metal-to-metal bearing surfaces shall be considered to be electrically connected to each other through the bearing surfaces for grounding purposes. The trolley frame and bridge frame shall be considered as electrically grounded through the bridge and trolley wheels and its respective tracks unless
conditions such as paint or other insulating materials prevent reliable metal-to-metal contact. In this case a separate bonding conductor shall be provided. (b) Elevators, escalators, and moving walks.

222
(1) Disconnecting means. Elevators, escalators, and moving walks shall
have a single means for disconnecting all ungrounded main power supply
conductors for each unit. (2) Control panels. If control panels are not located in the same space as the drive machine, they shall be located in cabinets with doors or panels
capable of being locked closed.
(c) Electric welders – disconnecting means. (1) Motor-generator, AC transformer, and DC rectifier arc welders. A
disconnecting means shall be provided in the supply circuit for each
motor-generator arc welder, and for each AC transformer and DC rectifier arc welder which is not equipped with a disconnect mounted as an integral part of the welder.
(2) Resistance welders. A switch or circuit breaker shall be provided by
which each resistance welder and its control equipment can be isolated from the supply circuit. The ampere rating of this disconnecting means shall not be less than the supply conductor ampacity.
(d) X-Ray equipment. (1) Disconnecting means. (i) General. A disconnecting means shall be provided in the supply
circuit. The disconnecting means shall be operable from a location readily accessible from the X-ray control. For equipment connected to a 120-volt branch circuit of 30 amperes or less, a grounding-type attachment plug cap and receptacle of proper rating may serve as a disconnecting means.
(ii) More than one piece of equipment. If more than one piece of equipment is operated from the same high-voltage circuit, each piece or each group of equipment as a unit shall be provided with a high-voltage switch or equivalent disconnecting means. This disconnecting means shall be constructed, enclosed, or located so
as to avoid contact by employees with its live parts. (2) Control – Radiographic and fluoroscopic types. Radiographic and fluoroscopic-type equipment shall be effectively enclosed or shall have interlocks that de-energize the equipment automatically to prevent ready
access to live current-carrying parts. HAZARDOUS (CLASSIFIED) LOCATIONS.
(a) Scope. This section sets forth requirements for electric equipment and wiring in locations which are classified depending on the properties of the flammable
223
vapors, liquids or gases, or combustible dusts or fibers which may be present
therein and the likelihood that a flammable or combustible concentration or
quantity is present. Each room, section or area shall be considered individually in determining its classification. These hazardous (classified) locations are assigned six designations as follows:
Class I, Division 1
Class I, Division 2 Class II, Division 1 Class II, Division 2 Class III, Division l
Class III, Division 2
For definitions of these locations see the definition section at the end of this chapter. All applicable requirements in this Chapter apply to all hazardous (classified)
locations, unless modified by provisions of this section.
(b) Electrical installations. Equipment, wiring methods, and installations of equipment in hazardous (classified) locations shall be approved as intrinsically safe or approved for the hazardous (classified) location or safe for the hazardous
(classified) location. Requirements for each of these options are as follows: (1) Intrinsically safe. Equipment and associated wiring approved as intrinsically safe is permitted in any hazardous (classified) location included in its listing or labeling.
(2) Approved for the hazardous (classified) location.
(i) General. Equipment shall be approved not only for the class of location but also for the ignitible or combustible properties of the specific gas, vapor, dust, or fiber that will be present. Note: NFPA 70, the National Electrical Code, lists or defines
hazardous gases, vapors, and dusts by "Groups" characterized by their ignitable or combustible properties. (ii) Marking. Equipment shall not be used unless it is marked to show the class, group, and operating temperature or temperature
range, based on operation in a 40º C ambient, for which it is approved. The temperature marking shall not exceed the ignition temperature of the specific gas, vapor, or dust to be encountered. However, the following provisions modify this marking requirement for specific equipment:

224
(A) Equipment of the non-heat-producing type (such as
junction boxes, conduit, and fitting) and equipment of the
heat-producing type having a maximum temperature of not more than 100º C (212º F) need not have a marked operating temperature or temperature range.
(B) Fixed lighting fixtures marked for use only in Class I,
Division 2 locations need not be marked to indicate the group. (C) Fixed general-purpose equipment in Class I locations,
other than lighting fixtures, which is acceptable for use in
Class I, Division 2 locations need not be marked with the class, group, division, or operating temperature. (D) Fixed dust-tight equipment, other than lighting fixtures,
which is acceptable for use in Class II, Division 2 and Class
III locations need not be marked with the class, group, division, or operating temperature. (3) Safe for the hazardous (classified) location. Equipment which is safe
for the location shall be of a type and design which NCOR demonstrates will provide protection from the hazards arising from the combustibility and flammability of vapors, liquids, gases, dusts, or fibers.
Note: The National Electrical Code, NFPA 70, contains guidelines for determining the type and design of equipment and installations which will meet this requirement. The guidelines of this document address electric wiring, equipment, and systems installed in hazardous (classified)
locations and contain specific provisions for the following: wiring methods, wiring connections, conductor insulation, flexible cords, sealing and drainage, transformers, capacitors, switches, circuit breakers, fuses, motor controllers, receptacles, attachment plugs, meters, relays, instruments, resistors, generators, motors, lighting fixtures, storage battery charging
equipment, electric cranes, electric hoists and similar equipment, utilization equipment, signaling systems, alarm systems, remote control systems, local loud speaker and communication systems, ventilation piping, live parts, lightning surge protection, and grounding. Compliance with these guidelines will constitute one means, but not the only means, of
compliance with this paragraph. (c) Conduits. All conduits shall be threaded and shall be made wrench-tight. Where it is impractical to make a threaded joint tight, a bonding jumper shall be utilized.

225
SPECIAL SYSTEMS.

(a) Systems over 600 volts, nominal. Paragraphs (a)(1) through (a)(4) of this section contain general requirements for all circuits and equipment operated at over 600 volts.
(1) Wiring methods for fixed installations.
(i) Above ground. Above-ground conductors shall be installed in rigid metal conduit, in intermediate metal conduit, in cable trays, in cablebus, in other suitable raceways, or as open runs of metal-clad
cable designed for the use and purpose. However, open runs of
non-metallic-sheathed cable or of bare conductors or bus bars may be installed in locations which are accessible only to qualified persons. Metallic shielding components, such as tapes, wires, or braids for conductors, shall be grounded.
Open runs of insulated wires and cables having a bare lead sheath
or a braided outer covering shall be supported in a manner designed to prevent physical damage to the braid or sheath. (ii) Installations emerging from the ground. Conductors emerging
from the ground shall be enclosed in raceways. Raceways installed on poles shall be of rigid metal conduit, intermediate metal conduit, PVC schedule 80 or equivalent extending from the ground line up to a point 8 feet (2.44 m) above finished grade. Conductors entering a building shall be protected by an enclosure from the
ground line to the point of entrance. Metallic enclosures shall be grounded. (2) Interrupting and isolating devices.
(i) Circuit breakers. Circuit breakers located indoors shall consist of metal-enclosed or fire-resistant, cell-mounted units. In locations accessible only to qualified personnel, open mounting of circuit breakers is permitted. A means of indicating the open and closed position of circuit breakers shall be provided.
(ii) Fused cutouts. Fused cutouts installed in buildings or transformer vaults shall be of a type identified for the purpose. They shall be readily accessible for fuse replacement.
(iii) Equipment isolating means. A means shall be provided to completely isolate equipment for inspection and repairs. Isolating means which are not designed to interrupt the load current of the circuit shall be either interlocked with a circuit interrupter or provided with a sign warning against opening them under load.
(3) Mobile and portable equipment.
226

(i) Power cable connections to mobile machines. A metallic
enclosure shall be provided on the mobile machine for enclosing the terminals of the power cable. The enclosure shall include provisions for a solid connection for the ground wire(s) terminal to ground effectively the machine frame. The method of cable
termination used shall prevent any strain or pull on the cable from
stressing the electrical connections. The enclosure shall have provision for locking so only authorized qualified persons may open it and shall be marked with a sign warning of the presence of energized parts.

(ii) Guarding live parts. All energized switching and control parts shall be enclosed in effectively grounded metal cabinets or enclosures. Circuit breakers and protective equipment shall have the operating means projecting through the metal cabinet or
enclosure so these units can be reset without locked doors being
opened. Enclosures and metal cabinets shall be locked so that only authorized qualified persons have access and shall be marked with a sign warning of the presence of energized parts. Collector ring assemblies on revolving-type machines (shovels, draglines, etc.)
shall be guarded. (4) Tunnel installations. (i) Application. The provisions of this paragraph apply to installation
and use of high-voltage power distribution and utilization equipment which is associated with tunnels and which is portable and/or mobile, such as substations, trailers, cars, mobile shovels, draglines, hoists, drills, dredges, compressors, pumps, conveyors, and underground excavators.
(ii) Conductors. Conductors in tunnels shall be installed in one or more of the following: (A) Metal conduit or other metal raceway,
(B) Type MC cable, or (C) Other suitable multiconductor cable. Conductors shall also be so located or guarded as to protect them from
physical damage. Multiconductor portable cable may supply mobile equipment. An equipment grounding conductor shall be run with circuit conductors inside the metal raceway or inside the multi-conductor cable jacket. The equipment grounding conductor may be insulated or bare.

227
(iii) Guarding live parts. Bare terminals of transformers, switches,
motor controllers, and other equipment shall be enclosed to prevent
accidental contact with energized parts. Enclosures for use in tunnels shall be drip-proof, weatherproof, or submersible as required by the environmental conditions.
(iv) Disconnecting means. A disconnecting means that
simultaneously opens all ungrounded conductors shall be installed at each transformer or motor location. (v) Grounding and bonding. All non-energized metal parts of
electric equipment and metal raceways and cable sheaths shall be
grounded and bonded to all metal pipes and rails at the portal and at intervals not exceeding 1000 feet (305 m) throughout the tunnel. (b) Class 1, Class 2, and Class 3 remote control, signaling, and power-limited
circuits.
(1) Classification. Class 1, Class 2, or Class 3 remote control, signaling, or power-limited circuits are characterized by their usage and electrical power limitation which differentiates them from light and power circuits.
These circuits are classified in accordance with their respective voltage and power limitations as summarized in paragraphs (b)(1)(i) through (b)(1)(iii) of this section. (i) Class 1 circuits.
(A) A Class 1 power-limited circuit is supplied from a source having a rated output of not more than 30 volts and 1000 volt-amperes.
(B) A Class 1 remote control circuit or a Class 1 signaling circuit has a voltage which does not exceed 600 volts; however, the power output of the source need not be limited. (ii) Class 2 and Class 3 circuits.
(A) Power for Class 2 and Class 3 circuits is limited either inherently (in which no overcurrent protection is required) or by a combination of a power source and overcurrent protection.
(B) The maximum circuit voltage is 150 volts AC or DC for a Class 2 inherently limited power source, and 100 volts AC or DC for a Class 3 inherently limited power source. (C) The maximum circuit voltage is 30 volts AC and 60 volts
DC for a Class 2 power source limited by overcurrent
228
protection, and 150 volts AC or DC for a Class 3 power
source limited by overcurrent protection.
(iii) Application. The maximum circuit voltages in paragraphs (b)(1)(i) and (b)(1)(ii) of this section apply to sinusoidal AC or continuous DC power sources, and where wet contact occurrence
is not likely.
(2) Marking. A Class 2 or Class 3 power supply unit shall not be used unless it is durably marked where plainly visible to indicate the class of supply and its electrical rating.

(c) Communications systems. (1) Scope. These provisions for communication systems apply to such systems as central-station- connected and non-central-station-connected
telephone circuits, radio receiving and transmitting equipment, and outside
wiring for fire and burglar alarm, and similar central station systems. (2) Protective devices.
(i) Circuits exposed to power conductors. Communication circuits so located as to be exposed to accidental contact with light or power conductors operating at over 300 volts shall have each circuit so exposed provided with an approved protector.
(ii) Antenna lead-ins. Each conductor of a lead-in from an outdoor antenna shall be provided with an antenna discharge unit or other means that will drain static charges from the antenna system.
(3) Conductor location. (i) Outside of buildings.
(A) Receiving distribution lead-in or aerial-drop cables attached to buildings and lead-in conductors to radio transmitters shall be so installed as to avoid the possibility of accidental contact with electric light or power conductors.
(B) The clearance between lead-in conductors and any lightning protection conductors shall not be less than 6 feet (1.83 m). (ii) On poles. Where practicable, communication conductors on
poles shall be located below the light or power conductors.
229
Communications conductors shall not be attached to a crossarm
that carries light or power conductors.
(iii) Inside of buildings. Indoor antennas, lead-ins, and other communication conductors attached as open conductors to the inside of buildings shall be located at least 2 inches (50.8 mm) from
conductors of any light or power or Class 1 circuits unless a special
and equally protective method of conductor separation is employed. (4) Equipment location. Outdoor metal structures supporting antennas, as well as self-supporting antennas such as vertical rods or dipole structures,
shall be located as far away from overhead conductors of electric light and
power circuits of over 150 volts to ground as necessary to avoid the possibility of the antenna or structure falling into or making accidental contact with such circuits.
(5) Grounding.
(i) Lead-in conductors. If exposed to contact with electric light or power conductors, the metal sheath of aerial cables entering buildings shall be grounded or shall be interrupted close to the
entrance to the building by an insulating joint or equivalent device. Where protective devices are used, they shall be grounded. (ii) Antenna structures. Masts and metal structures supporting antennas shall be permanently and effectively grounded without
splice or connection in the grounding conductor. (iii) Equipment enclosures. Transmitters shall be enclosed in a metal frame or grill or separated from the operating space by a barrier, all metallic parts of which are effectively connected to
ground. All external metal handles and controls accessible to the operating personnel shall be effectively grounded. Unpowered equipment and enclosures shall be considered grounded where connected to an attached coaxial cable with an effectively grounded metallic shield.
SAFETY-RELATED WORK PRACTICES GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.
Safety-related work practices shall be employed to prevent electric shock or other injuries resulting from either direct or indirect electrical contacts, when work
is performed near or on equipment or circuits which are or may be energized.
The specific safety-related work practices shall be consistent with the nature and extent of the associated electrical hazards.
"De-energized parts." Live parts to which an employee may be exposed shall be de-energized before the employee works on or near them, unless NCOR can demonstrate that de-energizing introduces additional or increased hazards or is
230
infeasible due to equipment design or operational limitations. Live parts that
operate at less than 50 volts to ground need not be de-energized if there will be
no increased exposure to electrical burns or to explosion due to electric arcs.
Note 1: Examples of increased or additional hazards include interruption of life support equipment, deactivation of emergency alarm systems, shutdown of hazardous location ventilation equipment, or removal of illumination for an area.
Note 2: Examples of work that may be performed on or near energized circuit parts because of infeasibility due to equipment design or operational limitations include testing of electric circuits that can only be performed with the circuit energized and work on circuits that form an integral part of a continuous industrial process in a chemical plant that would otherwise need to be completely
shut down in order to permit work on one circuit or piece of equipment.
Note 3: Work on or near de-energized parts is covered by paragraph (b) of this section.
"Energized parts." If the exposed live parts are not de-energized (i.e., for reasons of increased or additional hazards or infeasibility), other safety-related work
practices shall be used to protect employees who may be exposed to the electrical hazards involved. Such work practices shall protect employees against contact with energized circuit parts directly with any part of their body or indirectly through some other conductive object. The work practices that are used shall be
suitable for the conditions under which the work is to be performed and for the
voltage level of the exposed electric conductors or circuit parts.
"Working on or near exposed de-energized parts."
"Application." This paragraph applies to work on exposed de-energized parts or near enough to them to expose the employee to any electrical hazard they present. Conductors and parts of electric equipment that have been de-energized
but have not been locked out or tagged in shall be treated as energized parts
"Lockout and Tagging." While any employee is exposed to contact with parts of fixed electric equipment or circuits which have been de-energized, the circuits energizing the parts shall be locked out or tagged or both.

(a) Protection of employees. (1) NCOR shall not permit an employee to work in such proximity to any part of an electric power circuit that the employee could contact the
electric power circuit in the course of work, unless the employee is
protected against electric shock by de-energizing the circuit and grounding it or by guarding it effectively by insulation or other means. (2) In work areas where the exact location of underground electric power
lines is unknown, employees using jack-hammers, bars, or other hand
231
tools which may contact a line shall be provided with insulated protective
gloves.
(3) Before work is begun NCOR shall ascertain by inquiry or direct observation, or by instruments, whether any part of an energized electric power circuit, exposed or concealed, is so located that the performance of
the work may bring any person, tool, or machine into physical or electrical
contact with the electric power circuit. NCOR shall post and maintain proper warning signs where such a circuit exists. NCOR shall advise employees of the location of such lines, the
hazards involved, and the protective measures to be taken.
Proximity to Overhead High Voltage Lines and Equipment. (1) General. NCOR shall not require or permit any employee to enter or to
perform any function in proximity to high-voltage lines, unless danger from
accidental contact with said high-voltage lines has been effectively guarded against. (2) Clearance or Safeguards Required.
(a) The operation, erection, or transportation of any tools, equipment, or any part thereof capable of movement; the handling, transportation, or storage of any materials; or the moving of any building, near high-voltage lines, is prohibited, if at any time it is
possible to bring such object within 10 feet of high-voltage lines. (b) Except where electrical distribution and transmission lines have been d and visibly grounded at point of work or where insulating barriers, not a part of or an attachment to the equipment or
machinery, have been erected to prevent physical contact with the lines, equipment or machines shall be operated near power lines only in accordance with the following: (A) For lines rated 50 kV. or below, minimum clearance
between the lines and any part of the object shall be 10 feet; (B) For lines rated over 50 kV. Minimum clearance between the lines and any part of the object shall be 10 feet plus 0.4 inch for each 1 kV. over 50 kV., or twice the length of the line
insulator but never less than 10 feet. (C) For equipment in transit, on smooth surfaces, the clearance shall be a minimum of 4 feet for voltages less than 50 kV.10 feet for voltages over 50 kV., up to and including
345 kV., and 16 feet for voltages up to and including 750 kV.
232
(D) A person shall be designated to observe clearance and
give timely warning for all operations where it is difficult for
the operator to maintain the desired clearance by visual means. (c) Insulating links, or proximity warning devices may be used on
equipment, but the use of such devices shall not alter the
requirements of any other regulation of this part. (d) The 10-feet requirement shall not be reduced by movement due to any strains impressed upon the structures supporting the high-
voltage line and upon any equipment, fixtures, or attachments
thereon. (3) Warning Signs Required. NCOR shall post and maintain in plain view of the operator on each crane, derrick, power shovel, drilling rig, hay
loader, hay stacker, pile driver, or similar apparatus, any part of which is
capable of vertical, lateral, or swinging motion, a durable warning sign legible at 12 feet reading "Unlawful to operate this equipment within
10 feet of high-voltage lines." (4) Notification to Power Company and Responsibility for Safeguards. (a) When any operations are to be performed, tools or materials
handled, equipment is to be moved or operated within 10 feet of any high-voltage line, the person or persons responsible for the work to be done shall promptly notify the operator of the high-voltage line of the work to be performed, and shall be responsible for the completion of the safety
measures as required before proceeding with any work which would impair the aforesaid clearance. (b) This section when applied to railway systems, shall be construed as permitting operation of standard rail equipment, which is normally used in the transportation of freight and/or passengers,
and the operation of relief trains, or other equipment in emergencies, at a distance of less than 10 feet from any high-voltage conductor; but shall be construed as prohibiting normal repair or construction operations at a distance of less than 10 feet from any high-voltage conductor by other than properly qualified
and authorized persons or employees under the direct supervision of any authorized person who is familiar with the hazards involved, until the safety provisions of the foregoing sections have been complied with.
(b) Passageways and open spaces.
233
(1) Barriers or other means of guarding shall be provided to ensure that
workspace for electrical equipment will not be used as a passageway
during periods when energized parts of electrical equipment are exposed. (2) Working spaces, walkways, and similar locations shall be kept clear of cords so as not to create a hazard to employees.

(c) Load ratings. In existing installations, no changes in circuit protection shall be made to increase the load in excess of the load rating of the circuit wiring. (d) Fuses. When fuses are installed or removed with one or both terminals
energized, special tools insulated for the voltage shall be used.
(e) Cords and cables. (1) Worn or frayed electric cords or cables shall not be used.

(2) Extension cords shall not be fastened with staples, hung from nails, or suspended by wire.
LOCKOUT AND TAGGING OF CIRCUITS. (a) Controls. Controls that are to be deactivated during the course of work on
energized or de-energized equipment or circuits shall be tagged. (b) Equipment and circuits. Equipment or circuits that are de-energized shall be rendered inoperative and shall have tags attached at all points where such equipment or circuits can be energized.
(c) Tags. Tags shall be placed to identify plainly the equipment or circuits being worked on. SAFETY-RELATED MAINTENANCE AND ENVIRONMENTAL
CONSIDERATIONS- MAINTENANCE OF EQUIPMENT. NCOR shall ensure that all wiring components and utilization equipment in hazardous locations are maintained in a dust-tight, dust-ignition-proof, or explosion-proof condition, as appropriate. There shall be no loose or missing
screws, gaskets, threaded connections, seals, or other impairments to a tight condition. ENVIRONMENTAL DETERIORATION OF EQUIPMENT.
(a) Deteriorating agents.
234
(1) Unless identified for use in the operating environment, no conductors
or equipment shall be located:
(i) In damp or wet locations; (ii) Where exposed to gases, fumes, vapors, liquids, or other agents
having a deteriorating effect on the conductors or equipment; or
(iii) Where exposed to excessive temperatures. (2) Control equipment, utilization equipment, and bus ways approved for
use in dry locations only shall be protected against damage from the
weather during building construction. (b) Protection against corrosion. Metal raceways, cable armor, boxes, cable sheathing, cabinets, elbows, couplings, fittings, supports, and support hardware
shall be of materials appropriate for the environment in which they are to be
installed.
BATTERIES AND BATTERY CHARGING. (a) General requirements.
(1) Batteries of the unsealed type shall be located in enclosures with outside vents or in well ventilated rooms and shall be arranged so as to prevent the escape of fumes, gases, or electrolyte spray into other areas.
(2) Ventilation shall be provided to ensure diffusion of the gases from the battery and to prevent the accumulation of an explosive mixture. (3) Racks and trays shall be substantial and shall be treated to make them resistant to the electrolyte.
(4) Floors shall be of acid resistant construction unless protected from acid accumulations. (5) Face shields, aprons, and rubber gloves shall be provided for workers
handling acids or batteries. (6) Facilities for quick drenching of the eyes and body shall be provided within 25 feet (7.62 m) of battery handling areas.
(7) Facilities shall be provided for flushing and neutralizing spilled electrolyte and for fire protection.
235

(b) Charging.
(1) Battery charging installations shall be located in areas designated for that purpose.
(2) Charging apparatus shall be protected from damage by trucks.
(3) When batteries are being charged, the vent caps shall be kept in place to avoid electrolyte spray. Vent caps shall be maintained in functioning condition.

DEFINITIONS APPLICABLE TO THIS SUBDIVISION. The definitions given in this section apply to the terms used in this chapter.
Acceptable. An installation or equipment is acceptable to the Assistant Secretary
of Labor, and approved within the meaning of this chapter: (a) If it is accepted, or certified, or listed, or labeled, or otherwise determined to be safe by a qualified testing laboratory capable of
determining the suitability of materials and equipment for installation and use in accordance with this standard; or (b) With respect to an installation or equipment of a kind which no qualified testing laboratory accepts, certifies, lists, labels, or determines to be safe,
if it is inspected or tested by another Federal agency, or by a State, municipal, or other local authority responsible for enforcing occupational safety provisions of the National Electrical Code, and found in compliance with those provisions; or
(c) With respect to custom-made equipment or related installations which are designed, fabricated for, and intended for use by a particular customer, if it is determined to be safe for its intended use by its manufacturer on the basis of test data which NCOR keeps and makes available for inspection to the Assistant Secretary and his authorized
representatives. Accepted. An installation is "accepted" if it has been inspected and found to be safe by a qualified testing laboratory.
Accessible. (As applied to wiring methods.) Capable of being removed or exposed without damaging the building structure or finish, or not permanently closed in by the structure or finish of the building. (See "concealed" and "exposed.")
Accessible. (As applied to equipment.) Admitting close approach; not guarded by locked doors, elevation, or other effective means. (See"Readily accessible.")
236

Ampacity. The current in amperes a conductor can carry continuously under the
conditions of use without exceeding its temperature rating. Appliances. Utilization equipment, generally other than industrial, normally built in standardized sizes or types, which is installed or connected as a unit to perform
one or more functions.
Approved. Acceptable to the authority enforcing this Chapter. The authority enforcing this Chapter is the Assistant Secretary of Labor for Occupational Safety and Health. The definition of "acceptable" indicates what is acceptable to the
Assistant Secretary of Labor, and therefore approved within the meaning of this
Chapter. Askarel. A generic term for a group of nonflammable synthetic chlorinated hydrocarbons used as electrical insulating media. Askarels of various
compositional types are used. Under arcing conditions the gases produced, while
consisting predominantly of non-combustible hydrogen chloride, can include varying amounts of combustible gases depending upon the askarel type. Attachment plug (Plug cap) (Cap). A device which, by insertion in a receptacle,
establishes connection between the conductors of the attached flexible cord and the conductors connected permanently to the receptacle. Automatic. Self-acting, operating by its own mechanism when actuated by some impersonal influence, as for example, a change in current strength, pressure,
temperature, or mechanical configuration. Bare conductor. See "Conductor." Bonding. The permanent joining of metallic parts to form an electrically
conductive path which will assure electrical continuity and the capacity to conduct safely any current likely to be imposed. Bonding jumper. A reliable conductor to assure the required electrical conductivity between metal parts required to be electrically connected.
Branch circuit. The circuit conductors between the final overcurrent device protecting the circuit and the outlet(s). Building. A structure which stands alone or which is cut off from adjoining
structures by fire walls with all openings therein protected by approved fire doors. Cabinet. An enclosure designed either for surface or flush mounting, and provided with a frame, mat, or trim in which a swinging door or doors are or may be hung.
Certified. Equipment is "certified" if it:
237

(a) Has been tested and found by a qualified testing laboratory to meet
applicable test standards or to be safe for use in a specified manner, and (b) Is of a kind whose production is periodically inspected by a qualified testing laboratory. Certified equipment must bear a label, tag, or other
record of certification.
Circuit breaker. (a) (600 volts nominal, or less.) A device designed to open and close a
circuit by nonautomatic means and to open the circuit automatically on a
predetermined overcurrent without injury to itself when properly applied within its rating. (b) (Over 600 volts, nominal.) A switching device capable of making,
carrying, and breaking currents under normal circuit conditions, and also
making, carrying for a specified time, and breaking currents under specified abnormal circuit conditions, such as those of short circuit. CLASS I LOCATIONS. Class I locations are those in which flammable gases or
vapors are or may be present in the air in quantities sufficient to produce explosive or ignitible mixtures. Class I locations include the following: (a) Class I, Division 1. A Class I, Division 1 location is a location:
(1) In which ignitible concentrations of flammable gases or vapors may exist under normal operating conditions; or (2) In which ignitible concentrations of such gases or vapors may exist frequently because of repair or maintenance operations or
because of leakage; or (3) In which breakdown or faulty operation of equipment or processes might release ignitible concentrations of flammable gases or vapors, and might also cause simultaneous failure of
electric equipment. Note: This classification usually includes locations where volatile flammable liquids or liquefied flammable gases are transferred from one container to another; interiors of spray booths and areas in the vicinity of
spraying and painting operations where volatile flammable solvents are used; locations containing open tanks or vats of volatile flammable liquids; drying rooms or compartments for the evaporation of flammable solvents; inadequately ventilated pump rooms for flammable gas or for volatile flammable liquids; and all other locations
where ignitible concentrations of flammable vapors or gases are likely to occur in the course of normal operations.
238

(b) Class I, Division 2. A Class I, Division 2 location is a location:
(1) In which volatile flammable liquids or flammable gases are handled, processed, or used, but in which the hazardous liquids, vapors, or gases will normally be confined within closed containers
or closed systems from which they can escape only in case of
accidental rupture or breakdown of such containers or systems, or in case of abnormal operation of equipment; or
(2) In which ignitible concentrations of gases or vapors are normally
prevented by positive mechanical ventilation, and which might become hazardous through failure or abnormal operations of the ventilating equipment; or
(3) That is adjacent to a Class I, Division 1 location, and to which
ignitible concentrations of gases or vapors might occasionally be communicated unless such communication is prevented by adequate positive-pressure ventilation from a source of clean air, and effective safeguards against ventilation failure are provided.
Note: This classification usually includes locations where volatile flammable liquids or flammable gases or vapors are used, but which would become hazardous only in case of an accident or of some unusual operating condition. The quantity of flammable material that might escape
in case of accident, the adequacy of ventilating equipment, the total area involved, and the record of the industry or business with respect to explosions or fires are all factors that merit consideration in determining the classification and extent of each location.
Piping without valves, checks, meters, and similar devices would not ordinarily introduce a hazardous condition even though used for flammable liquids or gases. Locations used for the storage of flammable liquids or of liquefied or compressed gases in sealed containers would not normally be considered hazardous unless also subject to other hazardous
conditions. Electrical conduits and their associated enclosures separated from process fluids by a single seal or barrier are classed as a Division 2 location if the outside of the conduit and enclosures is a nonhazardous location.
CLASS II LOCATIONS. Class II locations are those that are hazardous because of the presence of combustible dust. Class II locations include the following: (a) Class II, Division 1. A Class II, Division 1 location is a location:
239
(1) In which combustible dust is or may be in suspension in the air
under normal operating conditions, in quantities sufficient to
produce explosive or ignitible mixtures; or (2) Where mechanical failure or abnormal operation of machinery or equipment might cause such explosive or ignitible mixtures to be
produced, and might also provide a source of ignition through
simultaneous failure of electric equipment, operation of protection devices, or from other causes, or
(3) In which combustible dusts of an electrically conductive nature
may be present. Note: Combustible dusts which are electrically nonconductive include dusts produced in the handling and processing of grain and grain
products, pulverized sugar and cocoa, dried egg and milk powders,
pulverized spices, starch and pastes, potato and woodflour, oil meal from beans and seed, dried hay, and other organic materials which may produce combustible dusts when processed or handled. Dusts containing magnesium or aluminum are particularly hazardous and the use of
extreme caution is necessary to avoid ignition and explosion. (b) Class II, Division 2. A Class II, Division 2 location is a location in which: (1) Combustible dust will not normally be in suspension in the air in
quantities sufficient to produce explosive or ignitible mixtures, and dust accumulations are normally insufficient to interfere with the normal operation of electrical equipment or other apparatus; or (2) Dust may be in suspension in the air as a result of infrequent
malfunctioning of handling or processing equipment, and dust accumulations resulting therefrom may be ignitible by abnormal operation or failure of electrical equipment or other apparatus. Note: This classification includes locations where dangerous
concentrations of suspended dust would not be likely but where dust accumulations might form on or in the vicinity of electric equipment. These areas may contain equipment from which appreciable quantities of dust would escape under abnormal operating conditions or be adjacent to a Class II Division 1 location, as described above, into which an explosive or
ignitible concentration of dust may be put into suspension under abnormal operating conditions. CLASS III LOCATIONS. Class III locations are those that are hazardous because of the
240
presence of easily ignitible fibers or flyings but in which such fibers or
flyings are not likely to be in suspension in the air in quantities sufficient to
produce ignitible mixtures. Class III locations include the following: (a) Class III, Division 1. A Class III, Division 1 location is a location in which easily ignitible fibers or materials producing combustible flyings are
handled, manufactured, or used.
Note: Easily ignitible fibers and flyings include rayon, cotton (including cotton linters and cotton waste), sisal or henequen, istle, jute, hemp, tow, cocoa fiber, oakum, baled waste kapok, Spanish moss, excelsior,
sawdust, woodchips, and other material of similar nature.
(b) Class III, Division 2. A Class III, Division 2 location is a location in which easily ignitible fibers are stored or handled, except in process of manufacture.

Collector ring. A collector ring is an assembly of slip rings for transferring electrical energy from a stationary to a rotating member. Concealed. Rendered inaccessible by the structure or finish of the building.
Wires in concealed raceways are considered concealed, even though they may become accessible by withdrawing them. (See "Accessible. (As applied to wiring methods.)") Conductor. (a) Bare. A conductor having no covering or electrical insulation
whatsoever. (b) Covered. A conductor encased within material of composition or thickness that is not recognized as electrical insulation.
(c) Insulated. A conductor encased within material of composition and thickness that is recognized as electrical insulation. Controller. A device or group of devices that serves to govern, in some predetermined manner, the electric power delivered to the apparatus to which it
is connected. Covered conductor. See "Conductor." Cutout. (Over 600 volts, nominal.) An assembly of a fuse support with either a
fuseholder, fuse carrier, or disconnecting blade. The fuseholder or fuse carrier may include a conducting element (fuse link), or may act as the disconnecting blade by the inclusion of a nonfusible member. Cutout box. An enclosure designed for surface mounting and having swinging
doors or covers secured directly to and telescoping with the walls of the box proper. (See "Cabinet.")
241

Damp location. See "Location."
Dead front. Without live parts exposed to a person on the operating side of the equipment.
Device. A unit of an electrical system which is intended to carry but not utilize
electric energy. Disconnecting means. A device, or group of devices, or other means by which the conductors of a circuit can be disconnected from their source of supply.

Disconnecting (or Isolating) switch. (Over 600 volts, nominal.) A mechanical switching device used for isolating a circuit or equipment from a source of power. Dry location. See "Location."

Enclosed. Surrounded by a case, housing, fence or walls which will prevent persons from accidentally contacting energized parts. Enclosure. The case or housing of apparatus, or the fence or walls surrounding
an installation to prevent personnel from accidentally contacting energized parts, or to protect the equipment from physical damage. Equipment. A general term including material, fittings, devices, appliances, fixtures, apparatus, and the like, used as a part of, or in connection with, an
electrical installation. Equipment grounding conductor. See "Grounding conductor, equipment." Explosion-proof apparatus. Apparatus enclosed in a case that is capable of
withstanding an explosion of a specified gas or vapor which may occur within it and of preventing the ignition of a specified gas or vapor surrounding the enclosure by sparks, flashes, or explosion of the gas or vapor within, and which operates at such an external temperature that it will not ignite a surrounding flammable atmosphere.
Exposed. (As applied to live parts.) Capable of being inadvertently touched or approached nearer than a safe distance by a person. It is applied to parts not suitably guarded, isolated, or insulated. (See "Accessible" and "Concealed.")
Exposed. (As applied to wiring methods.) On or attached to the surface or behind panels designed to allow access. (See "Accessible. (As applied to wiring methods.)") Exposed. (For the purposes of Communications systems.) Where the circuit is in
such a position that in case of failure of supports or insulation, contact with another circuit may result.
242

Externally operable. Capable of being operated without exposing the operator to
contact with live parts. Feeder. All circuit conductors between the service equipment, or the generator switchboard of an isolated plant, and the final branch-circuit overcurrent device.

Festoon lighting. A string of outdoor lights suspended between two points more than 15 feet (4.57 m) apart. Fitting. An accessory such as a locknut, bushing, or other part of a wiring system
that is intended primarily to perform a mechanical rather than an electrical
function. Fuse. (Over 600 volts, nominal.) An overcurrent protective device with a circuit opening fusible part that is heated and severed by the passage of overcurrent
through it. A fuse comprises all the parts that form a unit capable of performing
the prescribed functions. It may or may not be the complete device necessary to connect it into an electrical circuit. Ground. A conducting connection, whether intentional or accidental, between an
electrical circuit or equipment and the earth, or to some conducting body that serves in place of the earth. Grounded. Connected to earth or to some conducting body that serves in place of the earth.
Grounded, effectively (Over 600 volts, nominal). Permanently connected to earth through a ground connection of sufficiently low impedance and having sufficient ampacity that ground fault current which may occur cannot build up to voltages dangerous to personnel.
Grounded conductor. A system or circuit conductor that is intentionally grounded. Grounding conductor. A conductor used to connect equipment or the grounded circuit of a wiring system to a grounding electrode or electrodes.
Grounding conductor, equipment. The conductor used to connect the noncurrent-carrying metal parts of equipment, raceways, and other enclosures to the system grounded conductor and/or the grounding electrode conductor at the service equipment or at the source of a separately derived system.
Grounding electrode conductor. The conductor used to connect the grounding electrode to the equipment grounding conductor and/or to the grounded conductor of the circuit at the service equipment or at the source of a separately derived system.

243
Ground-fault circuit interrupter. A device for the protection of personnel that
functions to de-energize a circuit or portion thereof within an established period
of time when a current to ground exceeds some pre-determined value that is less than that required to operate the overcurrent protective device of the supply circuit.

Guarded. Covered, shielded, fenced, enclosed, or otherwise protected by means of suitable covers, casings, barriers, rails, screens, mats, or platforms to remove the likelihood of approach to a point of danger or contact by persons or objects.
Hoistway. any shaftway, hatchway, well hole, or other vertical opening or space
in which an elevator or dumbwaiter is designed to operate. Identified (conductors or terminals). Identified, as used in reference to a conductor or its terminal, means that such conductor or terminal can be
recognized as grounded.
Identified (for the use). Recognized as suitable for the specific purpose, function, use, environment, application, etc. where described as a requirement in this
standard. Suitability of equipment for a specific purpose, environment, or application is determined by a qualified testing laboratory where such identification includes labeling or listing. Insulated conductor. See "Conductor."
Interrupter switch. (Over 600 volts, nominal.) A switch capable of making, carrying, and interrupting specified currents. Intrinsically safe equipment and associated wiring. Equipment and associated
wiring in which any spark or thermal effect, produced either normally or in specified fault conditions, is incapable, under certain prescribed test conditions, of causing ignition of a mixture of flammable or combustible material in air in its most easily ignitible concentration.
Isolated. Not readily accessible to persons unless special means for access are used. Isolated power system. A system comprising an isolating transformer or its equivalent, a line isolation monitor, and its ungrounded circuit conductors.
Labeled. Equipment or materials to which has been attached a label, symbol or other identifying mark of a qualified testing laboratory which indicates compliance with appropriate standards or performance in a specified manner.
Lighting outlet. An outlet intended for the direct connection of a lampholder, a lighting fixture, or a pendant cord terminating in a lampholder.
244

Listed. Equipment or materials included in a list published by a qualified testing
laboratory whose listing states either that the equipment or material meets appropriate standards or has been tested and found suitable for use in a specified manner.

Location. (a) Damp location. Partially protected locations under canopies, marquees, roofed open porches, and like locations, and interior locations
subject to moderate degrees of moisture, such as some basements.
(b) Dry location. A location not normally subject to dampness or wetness. A location classified as dry may be temporarily subject to dampness or wetness, as in the case of a building under construction.

(c) Wet location. Installations underground or in concrete slabs or masonry in direct contact with the earth, and locations subject to saturation with water or other liquids, such as locations exposed to weather and unprotected.
Mobile X-ray. X-ray equipment mounted on a permanent base with wheels and/or casters for moving while completely assembled. Motor control center. An assembly of one or more enclosed sections having a
common power bus and principally containing motor control units. Outlet. A point on the wiring system at which current is taken to supply utilization equipment.
Overcurrent. Any current in excess of the rated current of equipment or the ampacity of a conductor. It may result from overload (see definition), short circuit, or ground fault. A current in excess of rating may be accommodated by certain equipment and conductors for a given set of conditions. Hence the rules for overcurrent protection are specific for particular situations.
Overload. Operation of equipment in excess of normal, full load rating, or of a conductor in excess of rated ampacity which, when it persists for a sufficient length of time, would cause damage or dangerous overheating. A fault, such as a short circuit or ground fault, is not an overload. (See "Overcurrent.")
Panelboard. A single panel or group of panel units designed for assembly in the form of a single panel; including buses, automatic overcurrent devices, and with or without switches for the control of light, heat, or power circuits; designed to be placed in a cabinet or cutout box placed in or against a wall or partition and
accessible only from the front. (See "Switchboard.")
245
Portable X-ray. X-ray equipment designed to be hand-carried.

Power fuse. (Over 600 volts, nominal.) See "Fuse." Power outlet. An enclosed assembly which may include receptacles, circuit breakers, fuseholders, fused switches, buses and watt-hour meter mounting
means; intended to serve as a means for distributing power required to operate
mobile or temporarily installed equipment. Premises wiring system. That interior and exterior wiring, including power, lighting, control, and signal circuit wiring together with all of its associated
hardware, fittings, and wiring devices, both permanently and temporarily
installed, which extends from the load end of the service drop, or load end of the service lateral conductors to the outlet(s). Such wiring does not include wiring internal to appliances, fixtures, motors, controllers, motor control centers, and similarequipment.

Qualified person. One familiar with the construction and operation of the equipment and the hazards involved. Qualified testing laboratory. A properly equipped and staffed testing laboratory
which has capabilities for and which provides the following services: (a) Experimental testing for safety of specified items of equipment and materials referred to in this standard to determine compliance with appropriate test standards or performance in a specified manner;
(b) Inspecting the run of such items of equipment and materials at factories for product evaluation to assure compliance with the test standards;
(c) Service-value determinations through field inspections to monitor the proper use of labels on products and with authority for recall of the label in the event a hazardous product is installed; (d) Employing a controlled procedure for identifying the listed and/or
labeled equipment or materials tested; and (e) Rendering creditable reports or findings that are objective and without bias of the tests and test methods employed.
Raceway. A channel designed expressly for holding wires, cables, or bus bars, with additional functions as permitted in this Chapter. Raceways may be of metal or insulating material, and the term includes rigid metal conduit, rigid nonmetallic conduit, intermediate metal conduit, liquid-tight flexible metal conduit, Flexible metallic tubing, flexible metal conduit, electrical metallic tubing, under
floor raceways, cellular concrete floor raceways, cellular metal floor raceways, surface raceways, wireways, and bus ways.
246

Readily accessible. Capable of being reached quickly for operation, renewal, or
inspections, without requiring those to whom ready access is requisite to climb over or remove obstacles or to resort to portable ladders, chairs, etc. (See "Accessible.")
Receptacle. A receptacle is a contact device installed at the outlet for the
connection of a single attachment plug. A single receptacle is a single contact device with no other contact device on the same yoke. A multiple receptacle is a single device containing two or more receptacles.
Receptacle outlet. An outlet where one or more receptacles are installed.
Remote-control circuit. Any electric circuit that controls any other circuit through a relay or an equivalent device.
Sealable equipment. Equipment enclosed in a case or cabinet that is provided
with a means of sealing or locking so that live parts cannot be made accessible without opening the enclosure. The equipment may or may not be operable without opening the enclosure.
Separately derived system. A premises wiring system whose power is derived from generator, transformer, or converter windings and has no direct electrical connection, including a solidly connected grounded circuit conductor, to supply conductors originating in another system.
Service. The conductors and equipment for delivering energy from the electricity supply system to the wiring system of the premises served. Service conductors. The supply conductors that extend from the street main or from transformers to the service equipment of the premises supplied.
Service drop. The overhead service conductors from the last pole or other aerial support to and including the splices, if any, connecting to the service-entrance conductors at the building or other structure.
Service-entrance conductors, overhead system. The service conductors between the terminals of the service equipment and a point usually outside the building, clear of building walls, where joined by tap or splice to the service drop. Service-entrance conductors, underground system. The service conductors
between the terminals of the service equipment and the point of connection to the service lateral. Where service equipment is located outside the building walls, there may be no service-entrance conductors, or they may be entirely outside the building.
Service equipment. The necessary equipment, usually consisting of a circuit breaker or switch and fuses, and their accessories, located near the point of
247
entrance of supply conductors to a building or other structure, or an otherwise
defined area, and intended to constitute the main control and means of cutoff of
the supply. Service raceway. The raceway that encloses the service-entrance conductors.
Signaling circuit. Any electric circuit that energizes signaling equipment.
Switchboard. A large single panel, frame, or assembly of panels which have switches, buses, instruments, overcurrent and other protective devices mounted on the face or back or both. Switchboards are generally accessible from the rear
as well as from the front and are not intended to be installed in cabinets. (See
"Panelboard.") Switches.

(a) General-use switch. A switch intended for use in general distribution and branch circuits. It is rated in amperes, and it is capable of interrupting its rated current at its rated voltage.
(b) General-use snap switch. A form of general-use switch so constructed that it can be installed in flush device boxes or on outlet box covers, or otherwise used in conjunction with wiring systems recognized by this Chapter.
(c) Isolating switch. A switch intended for isolating an electric circuit from the source of power. It has no interrupting rating, and it is intended to be operated only after the circuit has been opened by some other means. (d) Motor-circuit switch. A switch, rated in horsepower, capable of
interrupting the maximum operating overload current of a motor of the same horsepower rating as the switch at the rated voltage. Switching devices. (Over 600 volts, nominal.) Devices designed to close and/or open one or more electric circuits. Included in this category are circuit breakers,
cutouts, disconnecting (or isolating) switches, disconnecting means, and interrupter switches. Transportable X-ray. X-ray equipment installed in a vehicle or that may readily be disassembled for transport in a vehicle.
Utilization equipment. Utilization equipment means equipment which utilizes electric energy for mechanical, chemical, heating, lighting, or similar useful purpose.
248
Utilization system. A utilization system is a system which provides electric power
and light for employee workplaces, and includes the premises wiring system and
utilization equipment. Ventilated. Provided with a means to permit circulation of air sufficient to remove an excess of heat, fumes, or vapors.

Volatile flammable liquid. A flammable liquid having a flash point below 38° C (100° F) or whose temperature is above its flash point, or a Class II combustible liquid having a vapor pressure not exceeding 40 psia (276 kPa) at 38° C (100° F) whose temperature is above its flash point.

Voltage. (Of a circuit.) The greatest root-mean-square (effective) difference of potential between any two conductors of the circuit concerned. Voltage, nominal. A nominal value assigned to a circuit or system for the purpose of conveniently designating its voltage class (as 120/240, 480Y/277, 600, etc.).
The actual voltage at which a circuit operates can vary from the nominal within a
range that permits satisfactory operation of equipment. Voltage to ground. For grounded circuits, the voltage between the given conductor and that point or conductor of the circuit that is grounded; for
ungrounded circuits, the greatest voltage between the given conductor and any other conductor of the circuit. Watertight. So constructed that moisture will not enter the enclosure.
Weatherproof. So constructed or protected that exposure to the weather will not interfere with successful operation. Rainproof, raintight, or watertight equipment can fulfill the requirements for weatherproof where varying weather conditions other than wetness, such as snow, ice, dust, or temperature extremes, are not a factor.
Wet location. See "Location."
249
APPENDIX E: SAFETY RULES
Your safety is the constant concern of this company. Every precaution has been
taken to provide a safe workplace. A designated NCOR Project Safety Officer makes
regular inspections and holds regular safety meetings. [He or she] also meets with
management to plan and implement further improvements in our safety program.
Common sense and personal interest in safety are still the greatest guarantees of your
safety at work, on the road, and at home. We take your safety seriously and any
willful or habitual violation of safety rules will be considered cause for dismissal.
NCOR sincerely concerned for the health and well being of each member of the
team.
The cooperation of every employee is necessary to make this company a safe place in
which to work. Help yourself and others by reporting unsafe conditions or hazards
immediately to your supervisor or to a member of the safety committee. Give
earnest consideration to the rules of safety presented to you by poster signs,
discussions with your supervisor, posted department rules, and regulations published
in the safety booklet. Begin right by always thinking of safety as you perform your
job, or as you learn a new one.
Accident reporting. Any injury at work—no matter how small—must be reported
immediately to your supervisor and receive first aid attention. Serious conditions
often arise from small injuries if they are not cared for at once.
Specific safety rules and guidelines. To ensure your safety, and that of your
coworkers, please observe and obey the following rules and guidelines:
* Observe and practice the safety procedures established for the job.
* In case of sickness or injury, no matter how slight, report at once to your
supervisor. In no case should an employee treat his own or someone else's
injuries or attempt to remove foreign particles from the eye.
* In case of injury resulting in possible fracture to legs, back, or neck, or any
accident resulting in an unconscious condition, or a severe head injury, the
employee is not to be moved until medical attention has been given by
authorized personnel.
* Do not wear loose clothing or jewelry around machinery. It may catch on
moving equipment and cause a serious injury.
* Never distract the attention of another employee, as you might cause him or
her to be injured. If necessary to get the attention of another employee, wait
until it can be done safely.
* Where required, you must wear protective equipment, such as goggles, safety
glasses, masks, gloves, hair nets, etc.
* Safety equipment such as restraints, pull backs, and two-hand devices are
designed for your protection. Be sure such equipment is adjusted for you.
* Pile materials, skids, bins, boxes, or other equipment so as not to block aisles,
exits, fire fighting equipment, electric lighting or power panel, valves, etc.
250
FIRE DOORS AND AISLES MUST BE KEPT CLEAR.
* Keep your work area clean.
* Use compressed air only for the job for which it is intended. Do not clean
your clothes with it and do not fool with it.
* Observe smoking regulations.
* Shut down your machine before cleaning, repairing, or leaving.
* Tow motors and lift trucks will be operated only by authorized personnel.
Walk-type lift trucks will not be ridden and no one but the operator is
permitted to ride the tow motors. Do not exceed a speed that is safe for
existing conditions.
* Running and horseplay are strictly forbidden.
* Do not block access to fire extinguishers.
* Do not tamper with electric controls or switches.
* Do not operate machines or equipment until you have been properly
instructed and authorized to do so by your supervisor.
* Do not engage in such other practices as may be inconsistent with ordinary
and reasonable common sense safety rules.
* Report any UNSAFE condition or acts to your supervisor.
* HELP TO PREVENT ACCIDENTS.
* Use designated passages when moving from one place to another; never take
hazardous shortcuts.
* Lift properly—use your legs, not your back. For heavier loads, ask for
assistance.
* Do not adjust, clean, or oil moving machinery.
* Keep machine guards in their intended place.
* Do not throw objects.
* Clean up spilled liquid, oil, or grease immediately.
* Wear hard sole shoes and appropriate clothing. Shorts or mini dresses are not
permitted.
* Place trash and paper in proper containers and not in cans provided for
cigarette butts.

Safety checklist. It’s every employee’s responsibility to be on the lookout for
possible hazards. If you spot one of the conditions on the following list—or any
other possible hazardous situation—report it to your supervisor immediately.
251
* Slippery floors and walkways
* Tripping hazards, such as hose links, piping, etc.
* Missing (or inoperative) entrance and exit signs and lighting
* Poorly lighted stairs
* Loose handrails or guard rails
* Loose or broken windows
* Dangerously piled supplies or equipment
* Open or broken windows
* Unlocked doors and gates
* Electrical equipment left operating
* Open doors on electrical panels
* Leaks of steam, water, oil, etc.
* Blocked aisles
* Blocked fire extinguishers, hose sprinkler heads
* Blocked fire doors
* Evidence of any equipment running hot or overheating
* Oily rags
* Evidence of smoking in non-smoking areas
* Roof leaks
* Directional or warning signs not in place
* Safety devices not operating properly
* Machine, power transmission, or drive guards missing, damaged, loose, or
improperly placed
Safety equipment. Your supervisor will see that you receive the protective clothing
and equipment required for your job. Use them as instructed and take care of them.
You will be charged for loss or destruction of these articles only when it occurs
through negligence.
Safety shoes. The company will designate which jobs and work areas require safety
shoes. Under no circumstances will an employee be permitted to work in sandals or
open-toe shoes.
A reliable safety shoe vendor will visit the company periodically. Notices will be
posted prior to the visits.
Safety glasses. The wearing of safety glasses by all on-site employees is mandatory.
Strict adherence to this policy can significantly reduce the risk of eye injuries.
Seat belts. All employees must use seat belts and shoulder restraints (if available)
whenever they operate a vehicle on company business. The driver is responsible for
252
seeing that all passengers in front and rear seats are buckled up.
Good housekeeping. Your work location should be kept clean and orderly. Keep
machines and other objects (merchandise, boxes, shopping carts, etc.) out of the
center of aisles. Clean up spills, drips, and leaks immediately to avoid slips and falls.
Place trash in the proper receptacles. Stock shelves carefully so merchandise will not
fall over upon customer contact.